Manual Petrel

(1)
L
(tr
nE=
.= .N .9
H
ts
=
rF-U
CN F
V,rH
-,
trLl,!e
r
-
L
-
C' rrCJ g)
r
c) v,
==r
--
()o)=
-rI
o-cn(tr
CN
o- o
t
o ?
l FL
Eg,
tlr
tg,
(t, rts
L
H F(tr
(l) I
o- o-
ln
ar
lr
r
rrr
I-
C
g?
t
About this Manual
l+
C\ CD
CT)
cr)
II'' L.l) LO
F-r-
Lr)
(O r'-
CO
O)O-C!<-C\C\C!c\
lJ)Lr)co(o(o
(\I
C\ C\ C\
!::::
::
@A
(g
()
O
C!
q
(o
o)
ac-)
CO
C
O
.F
=
O
U)
OE=
(I)<
st
(tr
o-)
'->.
.O
Z
.c
0)
(o
o) E E
C
(E
=.A
OJ
O- O -o
O
C)
o)
.2
CO
O t--
c)
-.o
'q
co)
.C
o
o)
o
x
=O= LUo
cf) (
r
c
OYJ C
-t d) C
0)
;--
-.c
(tr
F-
o
6)
o
o O
o
=
O
C.)
o)
(
(o
-)
0
(-)
4.
o-)
o
o)
I
CU
E
E
=
(./)
(t)
c)
U)
E
0)
-
o) .=
a
OJ
o)
_a
o)
.C
C
a
o)
.PC
CE^
O-
cn
-z
o)
o)
o) C
O
q) (J
o_ o)
@ 0) a
a)
(E
o) -o
0)
a Z-
(tr
(
-o
= OJ
O
(-) o)
0)
CJ;
9=
c/)
o-
()-9r
(E
la-
-=
(E
0)
+G)
O C-/)
o)
'-lOI
o- o)
r=
I r
I
a
(./)
(./)
O
o)
O OO
o_ LO_
0)
J
0)
-o
o
L
CE
:P
:(O
:o
.O
=
(
.a
:0)
:C)
: O-)
:Ctr
:=
:A-
Yi
0)
=
;r
E
f,
Ctr
c o)
'= O
C;
.C
-o
C
O
J .O
CU
(o
.N
CO
C
C.
o)
o)
"O
O
o) E
0)
=
Z.
(o
E
E
(tr LO
(o
o_
E c)
CE
o)
C
.F
c)
0)
c)
o)
-o
G)
.L
o_
(5
.= t!
o)
E
(1 v) +OJ .o) -(J
(tr
(
C
:q
E o .@
o)l
o)
C
>. ( o
a_
cn
.c
o->
E
o o) OJ o E o
O
s
.S -o
.O
a _t
= = .s2
E'r: .OE o-o
., o) O O c! E q) c/)
E
E
o
O
.a
-(]
o)
.2 C' ,a
C -@
o)
>-Y
0) o C 0) LLi C)
-.c 0) O (./)
c-D o_ c/) :) o- C-)
o_ ( U) c/) (-/)
a
C
::=
o)
o)
o)
0)
0)
CJ
O -.c
a_
q)
,!:
m
um[fLttf1r.,tlJtuult,u.u.
:C)
:O
:C
:P
o_
>-l
=o) u)1
c0)
c\
:=
o-
,Y<
@
C\
c? c.)
i@
i.C
i: _.c
:C
iq
iq
c?
::
ii
:C
,C
:s
:C)
-o _o)
r-Ci
-o) O
@L
6
c'.1
: 1
iP
;.
v) a
o-
O)OC)
:0)
:cc
.Ec
(E
c\
:G)
:O
:C
.O
:L
.ts
:o)
Fc.l
C\] c..l
lLllu
ll
l
Segments..... ............122
lines........."... .................. .......122
Procedure
from
- Building Composite lntersections
a 2D Base Map Window
.. .. . ....122
Seismically Aligned
Composite
Procedure
Building Composite lntersections from
an lnterpretation
........................125
Jumper Composite
....121
Window
Section
.. .
Procedure
Creating a Jumper Composite Section....127

Seismic Data Visualization and Manipulation
Windows Ti1ing.............
......130
Windows to Visual Groups Linking
..........131
Procedure
- Linking Windows to Visual Gr0ups..........132
Windows to Coordinate Groups Linking...."..... . ...133
Lesson 4
Procedure
Linking Windows to Coordinate Groups..134
Synchron ized Camera Position for 3D Wind0ws............

Procedure
Synchronizing a Camera Position for 3D
34
Windows......
...13b
Seismic Ghost Curve.
...136
Procedure
..............131
- Creating a Seismic Ghost Curve
lntersection Style Settings
.................. ....138
Settings Dialog Box for 3D Seismic Data in a 3D
Window
..140
.............."... ....."................143
Survey Manager
.................143
Procedure
Using the Survey Manager to Sort and
Manage Seismic Data ........".....
................14b
SEG-Y Settings
r
I
I
I
-
i
I
tI
I
I
t
I
Procedure
Survey
the
- Searching for Seismic Data in .................141
Manager
Data Selection in the Survey Manager ..........................i47

Procedure
Realizing Selected Seismic Data in
-Manager
the Survey
..148
Seismic Data Visualization using the Survey Manager.l48
Procedure
Moving Seismic Data into F01ders...........148
Procedure
Changing the Template for Multiple
Entries in the Survey
..149
Color
................ ......149
Creating a New Color Template ..............150
lmport and Export of Color Templates.......... . .............151

Procedure
Editing Color
..."....j52
0 pacity Ta b ...
.......... 1 b6
- .......... Palettes
I.
Table of Contents
ts
Manager.......
Manipulation............
Procedure
Petrel Geophys cs
Lesson 5
Visualization Tools
- Benderrng.....
.'.......'.157
......157
Volume
Procedure-UsingVolume Rendering.....
Volume Wall
.............158
Optrons
...'.... .160
Displaying Volume Wa11s.........................'l

......162
Light Tool
Applrcations of the lightT001............... 164
........."...' ...... ......"165
Procedure
- Using the Light Tool
..... ......'166
Light Tool Examples
.....161
M0de........"...
lmmersion
168
M0de........
Starting the lmmersion
Procedure
.............169
lmmersion Mode Available Tools
170
Visualrzing Seismic Data . ...... ....
Exercrses
lnterpretation
the
Seismic
rom
Manrpulating Colors
..........170
Toolbar
61
Procedure
o
o
C
=
@'
0)
=
C
o_
Manipulating Seismic Llnes ln an lnterpretation
Window
..... .111
Exploring the Settings of the Interpretati0n Window .. 173

Modifying the Seismrc Data Display (Wrggle Drsplay) ..174
Setting a Display Scale for the lnterpretatlon Window 175

Manipulating Seismic Lines in 2D and 3D Windows.....'176
Displaying Base Maps and Annotatlons in 3D
178
Windows.......
Displaying Base Maps and Annotations in 2D
.............179
Windows......
....... ....'179
lntersections
Creating Random
...182
.
CompositeLines.............
Creating Composite Lines in 3D Windows. ....... ........183
Creating Composite Lines ln an lnterpretation
wrndow
Creating a Jump Tie
Section
"
184
...........'.186
Displaying Multiple Selsmic Vlews on the Same
Screen
...........186
Linking lnterpretatton or 3D Wlndows to Coordinate

...........188
Groups
- 0ptional
Curve
Display.
Using the Survey Manager...."..
Editing and Creating Color Palettes
Using a Seismlc Ghost

Modifying the Seismrc Data
.......".....190
..."191
..............19?
.194
lmportingandExportingColorPalettes ..................196
Petrel Geophysics
Table of
Contents.9
V01ume......... ...........191
Wa11s............ ..............200
Rendering a Seismic
Displaying Volume
Summary......
.......201
Module3-Fault1nterpretation......................................'.203
..................203
objectives
.....204
- Fault lnterpretation in Petrel
205
lnterpretation Manager
Learning
'l
Lesson
Manager
206
0pening the lnterpretation

Fault lnterpretation in Petre1............ ........201
..........201
Manual Fault Picking
.""......208
Picking Faults Manually
Procedure
..................210
Fault
Segment.......
Editing
a
Procedure
- Moving a Fault Segment....... ...................212
Procedure
.........214
Move Faults Laterally 0ption ..........
Moving Faults Laterally .................. .........21 4
Procedure
- Displaylng and Annotati ng 1ts............ 6
Procedure
....................218
Clean Faults
.......218
Procedure
- Cleaning Faults.....".....
.. ................219
Fault Autotracking ..............
........221
Tracking Faults .."........
Procedure
Procedure
- Digitizing a Fault on a Surface.................223
.........2?5
Restrict Mode ...........
Procedure
Fau
in
Bestricting lnterpretation Displays

.......................225
3D Window..
...................226
Exercises
- lnterpreting Faults
Manually lnterpreting Fau|ts............ ........226
Procedure
Editing and Manipulating Faults using the Function

..........227
I!
I
!
II
Toolbar
Editing and Manlpulating Faults using the
Window
Cutting a Fault Segment.......
Joining Two Points
lnterpretation
228
.. .............228
.............229
Using the lnterpretation Manager for Handling Faults..229

............230
Displaying and Annotating
................231
Beview
Faults
0uestions.....
Summary......
.......231
10
Table of Contents
Petre Geophvsics
Module
Horizon lnterpretation ...................................233

-0bjectives....
... ......233
Lesson 1
Horizon lnterpretation in Petrel ......................234
Function Bar lcons for Horizon lnterpretation ... .........29s
Horizon lnterpretation Techniques
....236
Horizon Interpretation Workflow...... ........231
Procedure
. .....238
- Creating or lnserting a New Horizon
Lesson 2
Autotracking ..............
...
. .243
Guided Autotracking
.-..243
Procedure
Performing
ided Autotracking .............Z43
Seeded 2D Autotracking...... .. ...
... . . .245
4
Learning
Gu
Procedure
Performing Seeded 2D Autotracking.......Z45
Seeded 3D Autotracking ..
.....246
.........
Performing Seeded 3D Autotracking.......246

Autotracking Tabs and
...............248
Constraints
.........................261
Procedure
Settings
Tab................
Paintbrush Autotracking in 3D Windows .."....................26S

Procedure
Performing Paintbrush Autotracking in
Window
........."............265
Procedure
Performing Box and Polygon Paintbrush
Autotracking
.......................261
a 3D
Horizon Editing and Manipu1ati0n...................269

Seismic Horizon Display Styles
....269
Lesson 3
Procedure
..........
Displaying and Annotating a Horizon
Procedure
Wind0w...."............. ....209
Displaying and Annotating a Horizon in
......................211
Displaying a Neighboring lnterpretation .272
in an lnterpretation
Window
Procedure
lnterpretation Editin9...........
... ... .. .213
Parent-Child Editing..........
. .. .. 274
Procedure
- Editing Parent and Child Points...in..an . Zl5
lnterpretation
lnspector Tool ....".........
. .276
Procedure
Using the lnspector T001.............. .. .Z7B
Horizon Flattening in 2D.............
. 280
a 3D
Procedure
Flattening 3D Vol umes.. ...........................28j

Flattened 0bjects.".......
.......284
lnterpretation Ouality Fi|ter............. ... ....286
Procedure
Filter.....286
- Using the lnterpretation 0uality.................281
Horizon 0perations. Bulk Shift
Petre Geophysics
Talle of
Contents.
ll
Procedure
Horizon
Bulk Shifting a
Horizon
Operations:Smoothing....
......281
....290
Procedure
Smoothi ng a Horizon.. ". "........................... 290

Horizon lnterpretation Surface Converslon
and Surface Attributes Generation

................292
Make Surfaces Process
......292
Procedure
Generating a Surface...
......292
Procedure
ng a H0ri20n...... ..........................294
- Smoothi
Procedure
Creatrng an Attribute Map Based on
Surface 0perations....
.........296
Surface Attributes
..............297
Procedure
............291
- Generating Surface Attri butes.....................299
Exercises
lnterpreting Horizons
Using a Simple Horizon lnterpretation Workflow ....299
Lesson 4
SettingupHorizonTrackingParameters .................302
Editing Horizon lnterpretations Manually and
Automatically
..............."....".305
Horizon 0perations: Bulk Shifting a Horizon
Interpretatron
................307
Horizon 0perations: Smoothing a Horizon
lnterpretation
................308
Displaying and Annotating Horizons: IVodifying the

Seismic Horizon
Display
.....309
Flattening a Horizon and Generating Flattened 3D
Volumes
Generating Flattened 3D
Volumes..
........313
..........314
Creatrng 2D Grd Surfaces wrth the Make/Edit

Surface
..................3'15
Process
Surfaces
...........318
Creating Attribute Maps........".".. ..............320
Generating Surface Attrrbutes
.................320
Review 0uestions.....
................322
Summary......
.......322
Smoothing
Module
Seismic Restoration 2D.................................323

Learning 0bjectives
..................323
Lesson 1
Seismic Restoration for 2D H0ri20ns.....".......".324
Restoration Model ....... ..
.........................325
Bestoring a Seismic Secti0n....................326
Vrew the Restored Seismic
........ 3?9
Tall e of Contents
L=
tE
{E
.
E.
Procedure
12
Petrel GeophVsics
I
:
Interpretation Ouarity check in the Bestored

section."..330
0C the lnterpretation in Restored Secti0n..............
."....330
Bestoration
Attributes
Bestoration Model Settings......

Exercise
Restoring a Seismic
Review
. ..
........332
.........................337
Section
0uestions......
Summary....
.....33g
...............340
.......340
Depth Conversion.
....................341
-0bjectives....
..............341
Lesson 1
Basic Velocity Modeling
............342
Domain Conversion Workflow......
............342
Velocity Modeling Examples
....................344
lnput Data Ouality Control
........................345
procedure
TDB Data...345
- Creating a Crossplot of Well
Model Well Data Method
.. ... ... ....... .....348
Velocity lntervals
................3S0
Procedure
Defining Velocity Intervals.. ..."................ 350
Velocity Modeling Using Well Data .................
Module
Learning
... ......... 353
Procedure
Using Well Data to Create a Velocity

.............."........353
Correction and 0utput from Velocity Modeling .............354
Procedure
Creating 0utput to Ouality Check the
Velocity
M0de1...........
M0de1...........
Well TDR Estimation parameters
Procedure-EstimatingWellTDR.."...
Velocity Modeling with Uncertalnty.
..
......"..3S5
.............3b6
.................357
....".......... ...358
lnserting a Standard Deviation Surface ..358
Using Uncertainty t0 Create a Velocity
Procedure
IV0de1...........
.......................359
Lesson 2
Domain Conversion.... ................362
Procedure
- Performing a Domain Conversion by
Active Velocity Model..... .
.................362
Procedure
General Depth
C0nversi0n...............
.........364
Performing a Domain Conversion of
Several 0bjects Simultaneously.....
.................364
Seismic Data Domain
............366
Procedure
Conversion
Procedure
Performing a Domain Conversion on
Seismic Data
Depth Conversion for 3D
Grids.......
..........368
Petrel Geophyslcs
Tab e of Contents
13
L-
L
r.-
lnterpretation 0uality Check in the Restored Section....330

0C the lnterpretation in Restored Secti0n................ ....330
Bestoration
... ....332
Bestoration N/odel Settin9s................... ...............337
f
f
f
Attribuies
I.
- Bestoring a Seismic Section

0uestions.....
Summary......
Exercise
r_-
Review
r.-
.....339
........... ....340
.......340
Depth Gonversion.
....................341
-Objectives
................341
Lesson 1
Basic Velocity lVlodeling
............342
Domain Conversion Workflow...... ............342
Velocity IVodeling Examples
............... ....344
lnput Data Ouality Control
................... ....345
Procedure
TDR Data...345
- Creatrng a Crossplot of Well
lVlodel Well Data Method
................... ....348
Velocity lntervals
...............350
Procedure
Defining Velocity lntervals .............".".. ....350
Velocity Modeling Using Well Data................"......... ....353
Module
Learning
r,_-
Procedure
Velocity
- . Using Well Data to Create a ......"..."....
....353
M0de1.........
Correction and 0utput from Velocity Modeling ........ ....354
- Creating 0utput to Oualrty Check the........"355

M0de1...........
Well TDH Estimation Parameters
...."..".."..356
Procedure
Velocrty
Procedure-EstimatingWellTDR...
Velocrty Modeling wlth
Procedure
Procedure
Uncertainty
................357
..............358
lnserting a Standard Deviation Surface ..358
Using Uncertainty to Create a Velocity

359
3bt
Procedure
Performing a Domain Conversron by
- M0de1........
Active Velocity
General Depth
.......................362
C0nversi0n...............
........364

S imu |tane0us|y................................ .... 364
Seismic Data Domain
...........366
Procedure
Severa I 0bjects
Converslon
Performing a Domarn Conversion on

Seismic Data.........
Procedure
Depth Converslon for 3D

Pet
Geoph\,s cs
Grids.......
..........368
Table of
Confefts. l3
-* --Jl-
Procedure
Performing a Depth Conversion on a

Grid368
Exercises 1
Velocity Modeling
.................37i
Ouality Checking Time-Depth Relationships for Wells..371
3D
DefiningVelocityModellntervals...."."........................376
Creating an Uncorrected Velocity Model using Well

.......................317
Creating a Corrected Velocity Model Using Well Data..37g
Creating a Velocity Model With Uncerta inty .................382
Da1a.............
Exercises 2
Performing a Domain C0nversi0n................384
Depth Converting a 3D
General Depth
Grid...............
C0nversi0n...............
.......384
.........384
Using the Domain Convert by Active Velocity Model

.......................385
Using the General Depth Conversion Pr0cess................387
Converting More than One
........387
Command.....
0bject....
0uestions.....
Summary......
Heview
................388
Appendix B
Surface
Attributes
I
L.
......"388
L.
L-'
Appendix A
- Shortcut Keys for Seismic

!nterpretation....,,.............
L,
...,...,...389
................393
La
I
.-
C
,
fT.
t.
L
b14
Table of Contents
Petrel Geophysics
a.
L.
1-
About this Manual
-j
r.
.l
1*
r---
L
L
L
L
lL
I
I.
a,
lntroduction
The purpose of this course,is
to introduce you to petrer Geophysics
functionality and the workflows.
Vr, *if irfro,.ougi,
functionalities in petrel and

learn
interpreting 2Dl3D seismic data.
f,o*,,?nrLntly
different
use these for
rr,r pr*rrtritoors and argorithms

can
uni prorpur,s which, in
be used to calculate size/areaof your'leads

turn, can be used for reserves
estimation.
You
will be provided with a ready-to-use petrer

2013 project containing
2Dl3D seismic and well data.

The
exercises provide hands on training

that enabres
you to exprore the
"
functionalities through dedicated
u*urr]rr.'
"
I.
L
L
L
L
L
I
Prerequisites
To
successfully complete this course,

you must have:
English proficiency
o
.
o
o
---
r
u<
-,
L
J
l-r
basic Windows and practical

computing skills
familiarity wirh geophysical fundamentts
Petrel Fundamentalscourse 0r
simitaiexperience
Petrel.
with
[earning 0bjectives
of this course is to introduce you
to the petret
is m ic i ntu,p,.ti o
15 3"y,lq*l.r],:.
19 r se
::y:i:f
ll]:r,ra1e
and visualization
toois
n,;;l;il;
ffi:
rques,
After completing this training, you

will know about:
___-,..i, eH ,ruvv
n9w pr
project
uJtrr,r..vvrrr
with (_:0rrecl
correct prolectton
projecti
.I
r
and unit system

::,1,n, !p
basic seismic data loading techniquls '
various dispray and visuarrzation
techniques incruding mis-ties
analysis
domain conversion
Petrel Geophysrci
About this lvlanual
lE
Lfault and horizon interpretation techniques including structural

framework and 2D restoratlon
t*
calculatrng reserves on leads/prospects and preparrng maps

for presentations.
What You Will Need

ln this course, you
will need the following hardware and applicatrons to

!
perform the workflows:
0perating System
Windows 7 64-bit,
_r
SP1
0uad-core processor (best with a fast clock
L-
l-
speed and hlqh cache)
Ouality of the viewing experience increases

with size and number of monitors
NVIDIA 0uadro K2000 or NVIDIA Ouadro
K2000M
Primary Storage
Fast rotati0nal speed HDD (10K, 15K) or SSD
Secondary storage
0 pti ona
0perating System
Windows 7 SPl 64-bit Enterprise or Ultimate
C
*
t-_
1'
L
rl*
I_
ed rtrons
Dual quad-core or six-core processor (best

wrth a fast clock speed and hrgh cache)
Two monitors, minimum vrewing size of 24

inches (32 inches preferred)
G
raph rcs
Primary Storage
f\
NVIDIA 0uadro K5000

Fast rotatronal speed HDD
{-
(1
0K, 1 5K) or 300
r-
GB SSD
-16.
About this l\,4anual
Petrel Geophysics
alL
rr
L.
L..J
L--
LLLf--l
What to Expect
ln each m0dule within this training material, y0u will encounter the
following:
o
o
o
o
.
L-J
L,-
L:
rt_
f-rl
f..-ra
o
o
You
0verview of the module

Prerequisites to the module (if necessary)
Learning objectives
A workflow component
Less0ns that explain ab0ut a subject or an activity in the
workflow
Procedures that show the sequence 0f steps needed t0
perform a task
Exercises that allowy0u to practice a task by using the steps
in the procedure with a data set
Scenario-basedexercises
Summary of the module
will also encounter notes, tips, and best practices.
l--{
t_
f--l
LL4
L-
L.
L-{
L=1
Petrel Geophysics
About this l\,4anual
17
lcons
Throughout this manual, you will find icons in the margin representing
various kinds of information. These icons serve as at-a-glance
reminders of the meaning of their associated text. The following icons
are used.
i-'; -):''
:
_.'-.
Tips
Notes
Best Practices
This icon points you to a tip

that will make your work
This icon indicates the besl
easier.
This icon ndeates that the

following information is
partjcularly impodant.
Warnings
Questions
This icon indicates when

you need to proceed with
extreme cauton.
This icon dentifes the

questions at lhe end of
each lesson.
way to perform a given

task when different options
Lessons
This icon identifies a
lesson, which covers a
paftcular topic.
a
L_
irrtt'f
tL
Procedures
Exercise
Review Questions
This icon identfies the
This icon indicates that it's

yourturn to practice the
procedure.
This icon identifies the

review questions at the
steps required to perform a

given task.
LL.
end ofeach module.
l.-
rPrerequisites
This rcon identifies any
prerequsites that are
required for the course, or
for ndividual modules.
Learning Objectives
What you will need
This icon identifies any

learning objective set out
for the course, or for the
current module.
This con identifies any

applications, hardware,
datasets, or other material
requred for the course.
Petrel Geophysics
L-
r_
lr-
L
=
l--l-
More Petrel Training Courses

provides many courses for Petrel and
Schlumberger SIS Petrel Training
you how multiple types of training
its functionalities. The chart shows
they are built
can ne combined and for what level
http://www nexttraining net'
For more information, vistt our web stte:
ca
O
l
a
(l)
(n
o
(J
(7,
'=
'6
l-
(l)
o-
tr
tr
About this [,{anual
Petrel Geoph\/sics
' l9
Gourse Content and Agenda
ffim%t*il
=lil==
Wffi/ ffiffi
mm'*''''lwl @@ffi
visuarization and interpretation
/ I*,m:
::y:':ll.
uncriona ities
in petrel.:ul:ri:
lr,ri ., Vr,,,irn,*r,i,iriXlri,rrfi
f
ic dara, visua I iz, r?,r:_o

ip,
T?,
conventionar horizon, and
se ism
lu,rl L rr,r,
,,rr r,
ume renderin g,
faurt intrrpruturion. in aodtion,
you wi, iearn
about voiume extraction,
attribute ,up rnJr'rn. generation,
surface
generation, and depth
conversion.
vo
l-
The course is intended

for seismic nterpreters
who have some
experience
petrel.
using
Day
"
1
.
.
.
.
.
Set up a New project
Mis-tie Anaiysis
Data Visualization
Display Toois for ZD and3D
Seismic Data
Seismiclntersections
Day 2
Fault lnterpretation
}.-
Horizon lnterpretation (to

be continued)
Day 3
a
a
20.
About this
IViJ
F.
Horizon lnterpretation
Seismic Bestoration 2D
Velocity Modeling
Domain Conversion
Petrel Geophysics
1-
<
Data Sets
1.
The first data set ls located in the Gulf of Mexico and contains
salt induced tectonlc and stratigraphic traps towards the salt.
The data conslsts of seismic data, well data, checkshots, a

velocity cube and stacking velocities. This data set wlll be
2. The second data set contains a high srnuosity channel systems
used for most of the exercises.
developed in drarnage areas dominated by low gradient

slopes.
The data consists of seismic data, well data and checkshots.
t-
L__
L-
t---
LI.*
a-l---
l_
a-<
l_
L
L
C
f
_"
-i
Gloudspin Data Set

The training data set for this c0urse c0mes from the Cloudsptn field in
Gulf of Mexico. The producing reservoir ls bounded to the west by a salt

dome and rts local structure is characterized by smallto large scale
west-east growth faults.

The seismic data set used ln the trainrng comprises of eight 2D lines.
Along wrth seismic, data are available from 28 wells, 20 of whlch are
deviated. Wireline log data are widely varied with different log sets and
most boreholes include trme and depth markers for the picked horizons.
------"l
f
E
Petrel Geoph\/S cs
Ahort thls [.lanua .21
Help Center
ln one place, the Help Center contatns all documentation associated
with Petrel and your installed Dcean plug-ins.
The Help Center contains the latest Petrel documentation artifacts, as

well as documentation from the two previous Petrel versions. ln
addition, you have access to the Support portal, the NExT training
portal, and the Ocean Store.
=
22 .
About th s lvlanual
Pefe
Geophysics
L
=
n
l--
I.l--
The Help center arso features a universar

search, capabre of searching
through all installed documentation
t_
r-_t_
3l9l:q weil Tops to rhe wetr Tops
l--
l"_
r--
l_
r-_-
]]..:!.:
I-
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
]:
'jl
1.,
:r: :]:]|'
-:
--d
I--
r--..:
I--
I---,
-.
-l_-
I-J
Petrel Geophysics
Abolrt this lVanual
.23
Summary
ln this introductlon, we:
o
.
.
.
.
defrned the learning objectives

described the structure of the manual
outlined the tools you wrll need for thrs traintng

discussed course conventions that you will encounter withln
this matelal
listed some terminology used ln this manual.
1-
Module
Proiect Setup
and Data Preparation
ln this module, you wrll learn howt0 set up a new project in Petreland
prepare data for seismrc interpretation. This module includes
drscussions 0n new projects, the projection and unit systems, seismlc
datum, data optimrzation, and analysis of mis{ies.
Learning 0bjectives
After completing this module, you will know how to:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
set up a project
access and use the projection and unit systems
use seismic datum handling
load basic seismic data
load check-shot data
optimize seismrc data for enhanced performance
analyze mis-tres.
Petre Geophvs cs
Project Setup and Data Preparati0f
.25
If
Lesson 1
Proiect Set Up and System Settings
proecr sYslem
t0 create a proect' spec\fy
.
This lesson discusses how
system' and
reference system and unit
coordinate
the
as
such
settings
load data into the Proiect'
Procedure-settingUpaNewProiectinPetrel
' '-i- opens'
By default' a new prolect
Opun
Petrel'
locatton'
2. Save this proiect t0 your desired
system'
unit
3. Specify the proiect and proiect either bv loadins it or ustns
;,
;;; i.rt data into the

S[';io or the Proiect reference tool'
other options,
t;';;
Settings
Proiect Set UP and SYstem
box to specify the Coordrnate

dialog-You
You use the proiect Settings
the
open this dialog box from
unlil''it*
reference system uno

*.nu nut bv selecting Proiect > Proiect
#5
T
-l
F-
:t
-_l
F-l
settlngs"''
-If-
--
rcLlpsEtJrin,
loGgeun*s "
lnt
Z
O,splal opcf,s
'-.--:j
Lllog iomlt
'ir' a)eq:tx-rilrriai i*i'liiil!
u*
r- -,,r:: rajn
fuea unrt
Vlla
lnil
Seisslc
lme:
ns
..r lr::t*.iJl;l]
Serrsic
velo
Ytll! f-l
llum
F;'"r-,I ."r-,rsr, 0
6.
0n
Project Setup and Data Preparat
Gecdelic dailm
Projecl relerEn'<
T.
E
-t
'
lr
{
.
rl
I.
I
Projection System
r-i
L-
rL'
f--r
r.
tr-l
Ll.
L'
r--d
It is vitalthat every type of data, including

seismrc and well data, is
displayed in the correct pr,jectr0n systemi
Errors can read to incorrect
interpretation. ln worst case scenarios,
seismic data can u urqriruO'
from the wrong rocation and wers
can be oritteo of structure or off
target due to an incorrect projection system.
Procedure
Accessing the Coordinate Reference System

P.etrel has the capability
to handle the coordinate reference system
effectively"
1. ln the Petrel main window, select project > project
2.
settings.
ln the
Project settings dialog box, go to the Coordinates
and units tab.
t_
r-
t-a!
t_
r,--
L-
Lra
t_
t:
lE-ra
L_
LJ
t_
/,
Project Setup and Data preparation
27
fI
^l
-I
b
Proiect Units
:.Si:,.
.;
:
--
You cannot convert

Units after data is lmPorted
XY and Z units are defined
,
on the
:t
-l
L-r
It is important that the proiec: It: - ' : system. The unlt system can be eiir:'
standard units used tn the area trom
Coordinates and
units tab in the Settings
System
You can change the Proiect Unrt
UTlvi se
Field
or
Field,
Metrrc,
predefrned
'
F-
Petrel
-l
e:' --:
F.
us: -^" not follow any 0f these systems exactly'

US foot c' X\
selection. The training proiect uses
-l
clialog box for the Proiect
--r
-J
-.-
systenlCRSi
-l
!nits
Slullo
H
Storsge
lnts
XYrrd
Zunli
Are
unrt
Virme unl
:t
q2
-d
'i
Sesmchfie
m!
!EGfrricrioc\
mls
-l
I.J
I
-
-:
=
ffi
=-
r.
=
Petrel GeoPhVSlcs
28.
Prolect Setup and Data PrE3:''
-I
Seismic Reference Datum

A Petrel project must be defined with a single
seismic reference datum
(SBD); however, you can import
data from diiferent SBDs.
The sBD is the onry predefined reference
datum that y.u can change in
Petrel. You can edit the distance from Mean
Sea Lever (MSL) in tne
Settings dialog box for the SBD.
A positive number means that the sBD is going

in an upward direction,
for example, 200 ft higher than MSL. you cann"ot
edit the other
predefined datums in the Templates pane
because they are fixed
reference levels (MSL) or well-specific references (KB
and CRD).
rtr
Petrel Geophystcs
P,o,ecr Se-to
.0 D, a p,opo
al,orl2g
User-Defined Datums
You also have the option to add user-defined datums. To access these
datums, right-click rhe Datumsfolder ln the Templates pane' You can
choose a name for the new datum, the Z distance from MSL, and a time
datum. You specify the time datum by using a replacement velocity, or

by entering two-way time (TWT) from the SRD.
Elevation at Time Zero (EII\ rs, in theory, elevation of the seismic
source used in a check-shot survey. when check-shot data is processed,
the reference can be converted to another reference level. This needs
to be considered when importing check shots through 0penSpirit. See

the Petrel Help for more information.
Procedure
1.
Setting Up Reference Datums
Go to the Templates pane > Datumsfolder'
f-
:*fs.$?s
rt{S
.i_
iffi
-i-a.
#J?s
Select Seismic Beference Datum (SRD).

OB
b.
30.
Pto
SelJp a.d Data P eoa a ior
Right-click Datums and select lnsert new datum
Petre Geophyslcs
Double-click Datums to open Settings dialog box.
i-
5erlrrqc
il.&
rrl'i*
fP
1*
l
f*r
"r*{'
dx9'!n'.'
i,i!,!ff.e'i1,rigx
(ll;rrr
il .:: it;tr-;l
:a'r
,,1"-
r,tr
r,.,
I*r*,iL
i.
fr,ls
2*{
T;n* *rr:
1 11 T 1
r' *rf::(kn.'.!'.*!!(j
o e;l!'
iC!l
Specify the Datum domain settings
'
strfi
a: is' t.n
l:St
;;"
t,-. lar*mre*,cq*
l,il
i'
irep[
'
lpe +satss
__
t-
MSL
tus d*m$s lerlig

tfli irlL
lJt
"i!fl rtu
llfi
fem
*Q*
:!. *ei,laexer,t v*ctf
Petrel Geophysics
ili
Prolect Setup anC !ale F'e:'aI : r
31
Checkshot Reference Datum

You cannot set the checkshot Reference Datum (cBD)
regionally in the
Templates pane because it is a well-specific referenr..\lvh.n yo,
import check shots, you can serect the cBD as depth and
time datums
by entering values in the corresponding fields.
ffi
'
Impor.e
chJchotsl Diant+nd
14,cs
f,snnedttEfE
::l: Hename:
specific reference
Velocity Modeling
Defining a time datum in velocity modeling sets the starting point
for
the model. Typically, y0u use the sBD (defining the distance
from the
MSL), or y.u can select a user-defined datum if a time

datum is set for
the SBD (as specified in the Temptates pane).
lime: -'1f,-FE*--,
XW
orher:
Ldiijlilitriffii[:l ;
*--:__grer
32
nppr'riher:
:? :'-:+:
"
:
l-
L-
Data Loading
Seismic
part of any setsmic interpretation
Seismic data loading an integral
Lesson 2
is
project. ln some ,u,t',
in
load the data themselves and
by a
loaded
is
data
where
'n"'fitiers
are ptouiJti with a project
L_
some cases they

data loading sPecialist'
t_
L
of the
for the interpreter to be aware
ln etther case, it is rmportant
steps
These
for loading data
trnO*.*uf seismic data loading steps
you
the loaded data' ln this lesson'
,f r. ,.rr n.f p with quality checkig
and check-shot data into
will learn how to load 2 and 3D s'eismic
1_
1_
Petrel.
Seismic Data 0rganization

to
in Petrel into folders and subfolders
You should organize all data
a specrfic Seismic
--r
tismic data rs stored in

keep the project u,uuu"J
ftlters
p"OttintO hierarchy of folders and
main folder. ln thrs foldi u
folder'
bulk data in the Sersmic
extsts. You sfroutO store f f
!J
can be stored outside of the

Some data types, such as interpretations'
of the available
gives a less accurate overview
structure, but doing so
L
L
L
L
I-#
--
tei"i'
seismic data.
survey
you Can Create multlple setsmic
ln the Selsmic main folder,
The 2D seismic data is
for each survey'

folders, preferably ont totOti
rs the
3D seismic data lf the format
iftt
loaded in the same *r7 as
load all lines in one operation'
same for all 2D lines, y0u can
L
-,-
l-
f
---t
lc
aI
-,------a
-.
Pt.-.
Petrel GeoPhYsics
'
--oFrt
s.tup .nd Duta Preparatlor
'
33
,s*rc
i ::: i
r& +
tr*
liB
ca]:::;#
Procedure
Survey
1.
Creating a New Seismic Main Folder and
ln the menu bar, select
t@
lnsert > New seismic main folder.
L4
ll
jss
,.,;,,:,.:
- -" -_ -_-
i
I
ff
_"-_-_ "
iler.r anncia:.icns
i {,
,l
j
i,
kS
f,lrrr intersertirn piane
;+
i ,ff it*u, *,"i1
$$
tier,.*re;i :*p.s
S U**:tcrirfl*lt
I fJ ldeit:r-secn-irn
ile,x grct--au3,
I fi
i S fdr*r stratig.aphl iBclEr
j & g.le#:S re.siam:i*r rnclel
i.,---,,,---,,-h t{Err raut: otcf es ,-,tder

jfi lrlerr lL'd +ctder
iliert nrap seruire.,.
ir_
*,.," ll*u'-idder
,
I ilS_: il,I,s nxrFrl,iicr fcicler
.+ l{ert -ock chys,cs rerds

ffi Neor se;srn;c mtn tcrder
lW.
i
i.L
';'.
f.
t"i
:: ::. ..i:' ;,: : i
f,Jir sei cldr
, r.::i:
l&
:r,r
:,:r;
Find it in the lnput pane with predefined subfolders:
.
.
.
Vintages
lnterp survey inclusion filters

lnterpretation tolder with an active seismic
horizon.
i' eimlc
I S f*:re6s
;, S **psavq,,c1tre,.i?sffisns
ot .l In$ertrehtio blder
1
&l]
;*,*.eryitfssios#,e
Ssmlehsrhsnt
I
I
34
b.l\>
Project Setup and Data PreDaration
Petrel Geophysics
rL
L
rI--
Insert menu. You also can right-click the Seismic

main folder and select lnsert seismic survey.
Use th'e
r_
--t
L
--2
A-t
r_--
L-.
---
a_
l
arlF--
aU
Au
L
L
L
-
L
,-4
T.
Seismic Data lmport Format

The standard format for 2D and 3D seismic data is SEG-Y which is a
binary format that you can import easily into Petrel. The resolution of
the data is decided by the bit size, the in-line, and the cross-line
spacing (3D) or trace spacing (2D).
There are two SEG-Y import options in Petrel: SEG-Y seismic data
and SEG-Y
import with preset parameters. Petrel
uses the SEG-Y
sesmic data format to find the correct byte locations for X,

Y-coordinates and line numbering automatical ly.
A SEG-Y cube can be full-fold data, near and far offset cubes, inversion
data, and attribute cubes. In addition, y0u can import data in the ZGY
bricked format.
The ZGY format is a seismic file in which the seismic representation is
changed to a bricked format rather than the traditional trace format.
When seismic data is displayed, only the required bricks are loaded into
mem0ry. Petrel loads large bricks with low resolution into memory
first, then loads the smaller bricks with high resolution.
Seismic data is shown as a c0arse resolution that refines overtime as
Petrel Geophysics
Proiect Setup and Data Preparation
35
-__-=--:
the program loads the smaller bricks into memory. The benefit of
seismrc bricked data is that large volumes of data can be rendered
the 3D window.
rn
User interactions always are avarlable, because Petrel stops loading

the bricks if you move a seismrc line. This means that even volumes
larger than the physical memory of the computer can be rendered and
handled without data loss if you interact with the data.
Survey Geometry Definition

You can predefrne the survey geometry wrthout loading the selsmic
cube by using the options on the Geometry tab in the Settings dtalog
box for the .Surveyfolder.
This typically is done in the final stages of a processing job, afterthe

intermediate outputs from the processing sequence are loaded and
before the final seismic cubes are defined.
SEG-Y lmport
with Preset Parameters
When you import sersmic data with the ,SEG-)'w ith presef
parameters option, you must specify the correct byte locations. You
define byte locations in the SE6-}/ headers from first f/e section of
the SEG-Y lmport dialog box. You can ignore traces wrth zero
coord i nates.
You can specify SEG-Y loading parameters automatrcally from a
previously loaded SEG-Y file by usrng the blue arrow at the top of the
SEG-Y lmport dialog box. Scan the frle to check rn-line and cross-line
numbers and X and Y coordrnates. This quality control step is very
important because the seismic data cannot be set up to correctly read

any other byte locatrons afterthe data is loaded. You would have to
reload the cube.
Seismic Data in ZGY Bricked Format
When using seismic data in ZGY bricked format zgyl as input, the file
is read wrthout an option to specify parameters. When the frle is
loaded, a Vintage selection dialog box opens and then the Input data
dialog box opens. Use options in the lnput data dialog box to change
36
Project Setrp and Data Preparation
Petre Geophyslcs
L-
the name, template, domaln, vintage, and X, Y conversion for the

seismic data.
Goordinate Reference System (CRS)

uses the Esri catalog for coordinate reference systems. All CBSs
in Petrel are available by clicklng Other GRS in the lnput data dialog
box where y0u set the correct reference system for the file that y0u are
Petrel
rmporting. lf the CRS for the file is not displayed in the file header, you
must flnd it and set it manuallY.
Goordinate Transformation Between Reference Systems

By default, you choose the CRS of the project in the lnput data dialog
box. lf the CRS of the file is drfferent from the CRS of the project, then
y0u must selectthe CRS from the list displayed rn the lnput data dialog
box. A coordinate transformation between the project and flle reference
systems is run and the data is positioned c0rrectly in the project
reference system.
Note that unlt converslon is not possible;X,Y and Z unlts are defined in
the Coordinates and units tab in the Settings dialog box for the
project.
Petrel Geophysics
Pr0ject Setup and Data Preparati0n
37
Seismic Data
(on selectionlto
- Loading
u ,r,uir7 totOtr and select lmport
1. Right-click
Procedure
open the lmPort
2.
bor
file
dialoO
. .. . .. .,.....,.,..,.,",.,,:,,.r1:r::L'}:
0pen
Choose the file and its type' Click
F,'e xap'e,Cscr'Pton
T.
Y'mpor a'ros
Eet bErora tl'e h'as a' oadeo

erd tne rle tan tre scannd
p9rarel's to be
s SEG
'aJr'g
-"rl .i v ,"i"- .*"i"' po.,tol' t"n b* 't
Petrel GeoPhYS cs
38-.o.ohcl
Se,Jp and Dard PreparaLlon
rL
r
3.
Line
Set corresponding data type (2Dl3D), define vintage and
detection method.
L
L
l-,
a-,
lgnere EGY coordinates
,? lgnore traces uil nuli {.0i oordinates
nYt!.
poston
13 -
r_
Line detcEn
meiod
Headerfomlai
.: bl.te (32-brt) intsger
iffi',
,t b}"ie i3?'biti inieEer
i. ,- , :Witt
Aetamatic
Line detection
method > Automatic, the

most likely line/inline and
trace/crossline headers are

selected from trace headers
-,_-
4.ChangeLinedetectionmeth0dtoTraceheadersfieldslfyou
need t0, check the headers and adjust
o
o
5tc.f bF!
l* ::.:t'_'_.'
..
_'-'
::l
.l,r
1i
ln-line/cross-line number byte positions for 3D data

CDP and SP byte position for 2D lines'
. l.
ii : tWaSEY.@iee )
r@t
analysis. In this case,

scannlng is unavailable
because the headers are
undetermined until the SEGY
file is read.
&id4
, Sa!t*..dd$$&iir@
l.,
lt
ll
parameters
Scan a specified number 0f traces to quality check
Prolecl SelLIl oro Dol PrPpral o1

Petrel Geophystcs
'
39
6.
ln the
lnput data dialog box, choose
a color template and a
domain.
Template
Domain:
vrntage:
@ffiEffi-
Cocrdinate refsrense sysietn {CRS}
FrojectCRS:
SPCS27-17$2
0-$erQ!..
Rsultifts dat rnge {approx.}
---*
7. Create or add a Vintage.
40 o Pr0ject Setup and Data Preparation
ill Seismic {default}

tJ EleYationtime
v ,
r\Ew
'-.
L
L
L
l-:
f-
I-
L
L
L
I-
t.-
B. Specify the CBS of the loaded seismic if it differs from the

project
r_-.-
l_
r-_-
l_.*
L
L
rLL
r,-
-_-
---t
is\
il
tl
i..
ffi
Input data
l*
CRS transformations
exporting to a file or using

the Beference project
Name,
S typ"'
I?
---*i
aiso can be done by
General
Template:
tool
3D seismir
Domsin:
ii
Vintrage:
ffi
$;(d"r";ki
ProjectCRS:
File
CRS:
'-
ri."*ii."ii-*
Coordinate reference system {CRS}
r__
I-_-
CRS.
-.----'-'.'-'
PCSI7-1702
SDCSZ7 1702 C'i*IEN'TCR SPCS2I
1702 v
t.i:;#
OtherCR5..,
Resuhing data range (approx.)
X range:
Y range
Z range:
UNDEF
UhIDEF
3502C0,0
fl
UNDEF
UNDEF
US
frUS
20$0.{X} ms
Unit conversion
Seismic Vintages
When you load seismic data or create attribute cubes in Petrel, a
sesmic vintage is assigned to different versi0ns 0f the same data.
Typical examples of vintages (or versions) are fullJold 0r near and far
trace cubes of the same v0lume. Different attributes that generate
mis-tie corrected lines also will generate a new vintage.

A vintage is an independent seismic type; 3D cubes and 2D lines can
have the same vintage.
Vintages are different versions of the same seismic data.
a-=4
--r
U
I-:
-*1
----
Petrel Geophysics
Project Setup and Data Preparatlon
41
a Display Window
Different Vintages in
u,,.,,
u',. n d
1r : l:1, :*xn,f ;',U
call vrruorrLe
or on the lnput pane' Y0u
window'
oblects in an active
I; fl [ fii,jJ::'JiT,.i,.Ji:;
o]
is shown'
line' with zoom iacto111{Oosition'
The same part of the
and volumes'
iittrent vintage lines
making it easy to
'o*pu"
to select
interpretation toolbar
if you use the seismic
bv
ln the 3D window,
visible seismic planes
vintase, 1,ou can
'pp
'htt;i;t't
tcon'
vintage
clicking the APPIY
io
urr
by clicking the Reset

to its original vintage
intersection
the
Reset
vintage icon'
The previous vintage
to using the Shift
Up
* Sftitt + Down key combinations'

and
Assignly^Yllttntt
Editing
'i'*1i11t1::::Sl toolbar
the
to
1 -; r'p'"l to*1r'9 the
Procedure
ii,*
iron, are equivalent

,no Next vintage [@
Go
:;;
si'Jtus'ba r)
fi
avai I abl e,vi nta
nd
es
,ffi!'i;.':+;i;".,rrlli'.,lrii'i ;l'
l-ffi j
:, ,{
sersmic
w*aso
" #!} fr'dc]rsdq'
-,
B$ - 'b'i{#'stc'r'
fyO,+SsSr'"*'
i,'..1
4'r
ei':
riras'rr'
Psr!
F5-8,*d
iffi.l#Seismic fime:'
40
Petrel GeoPh\/Slcs
z'-+roprt s.tup
und Data Preparatton
l_
l_
aI-
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
I_
a-
a-
Display one line in an lnterpretation window or several lines

in a 3D window from various seismic cubes.
Assign different vintages to each line from the Seismic
interpretation toolbar or lnput pane.
i=ffffi
: W{ t**se
!-
I_
*
,a]
#*
B#
I-
5?r..ftiirs Srroi
prdd
PSA,
I-
Ad
,a--
rr
L
5.
ot @
Activate the Seismic interpretation process and click
vintage
selections
all
in the Function toolbar to scroll through
for an intersection.
---
lr--<
Petrel Geophysics
Project Setup and Data Preparation
43
Checkshot Parameter Selection

you loaded is correct, invest
To make sure that the check-shot data that
to
understand what each of
try
some time in parameter selection and
entry rn the
these parameters does. lf you click 0n an Attrlbute or unit
a drop-down list
spreadsheet of the lmport checkshots dialog box,
change the depth
opens where you can select the parameters' You can
datum.
input
and time datum references to match the available
The acronyms used are
.MSL:Meansealevel,inthefileshown'TVDSSreferstoTVD
o
.
.
subsurface (that is, MSL).

KB: Kelly bushing elevated from MSL
SRD: Seismic reference datum
CRD: Checkshot reference datum'
E-
-t-
YouenterthevaluesforthegrayedoutfieldsinfheDepthandTime
sectionsofthelmportcheckshotsdialogboxIntheTemplatespane
details'
during project setup. See the Petrel Help for more
given as negative
Even if time and depth values below MSL are
(MD' TVD' and

numbers in display windows, the spreadsheet numbers
positive, you
not
are
values
TWT) for check shots are positive. lf these
Negate
fhe
you select
must reload the check shots. Make sure that
box when
time values check box in the lmport checkshots dialog
tL
time and depth values are positive'

_L_
L
L
E-
L
E
44 o Projeu, Setup
a|d Datd Prepa'alior
Petrel Geophysics
Procedure
[oading Check
Shots
- l-.-: c< .ce Wells
foiOer anJ s-etect
trmport (on
.- :t:^ r.e lmport
selection)
dia/og box.
----
L
L
L
L
.*_i
,*
_- .t
L
1r;
Yr-
____
| ffi|il:tJffi:?.t*,osh0ts
,4
a
I---
4.
ct:^t
Ciick
0pen.
"jlr
5GL,s.r be
I-J
l$ etiilgs
{,G*
-i
r,rmar(ASCI)
llles to import.
(.
.)
I-_-
L
L
L
L
L
---_
--
lr----
I.
--=.
L
E-
f---4
L.
L
F-J
L
t,F-J
E----./
Petrel
Geophffi
erolect Setup anJOata
ereparation
.m
Selecting Gheck'shot Parameters and

Procedure
Ouality Ghecking Check-shot Data
1. Fit input parameters (A) to file (B).

2. Yer\fy Connect to trace and Number of header lines
3. Choose a time and depth datum.
ffi
46
Pr0ject Setup and Data Preparatl0n
Impert rheckhokr Biawnd-l4 cs
Petrel Geophysic:
4.
Bight-click Checkshots inthe Global well logs folder and

select Spreadsheet.
1vffi
l,Jr,.
!:itir,ri
tE! I'n]!.t ir,n releCir,:
i3
l*
&
Edit Elrbsl ;Erlrrtille
':1
5.
ir
,: clert,:C l5o Jr lDt
ttr,pli:r
Change depth from MD to TVDSS and compare TVDSS and
TWT with input files and other time-depth information.

{$
Crt',*ts::or :preaAshet
{e'Diffiild-14..r
ltell:
d-.ri ','tx"
..
--
onie
l#-lLlElr4liryl
tA
'1
TUJa
Araq
*loity
lateml Elay
1E
1C.3i
'185
539
tire
3i
.5:{:
,5*1.8:
"E4G.6
-\281 i
-5&41
*l
4
,5813.:
$5
le
11
-5;:{ *
'
'l
1
14
15
1
:3-
E:
-8.n
,sEt1.2
-3T.5,S
-t: .6i
i:gq Fl
ii
iiirP
irES:i,
19
ai
F't1.81
ria *'t
51
A':R i]{21 4f
33F.i
am$l
SS:;
D{a,@#'}4
17421
1514.3:
:Ld
-'5.5i
3t.;
15'1.Ee
niffsBl.'1d
4.!;
iwe$f4
DMSt4
r:
0imd-:1,"{
15146.1
1.tr
j''l* l{
51
151eS
1g*::
I51.i3 1{
I
514E.24
t-5i\:1
-Si4
243 [d
31'1.l
D-swd.]4
Erod-14
Bism&14
15T{i.3i
l1
l,! Bi*Mxd-1S
13'd,.tl
Eil
d-1
3:5.4
Biawrdl-1ia
5t"8
-6:68.11
3E3.;i
.EEZ' 3:
z1
EriEffild-
Ditrwld-'14
15'144.
].]',l
.Eqq m
2*
Petrel Geophysics
7!
,11.1tJ
A.{
i#sd*-1
&14
--{6-?.f!
1A
z2
-383
,6:-2:{
11.
l24r.t
1.r+. l
151+8.55
-:{*,
l{. }t
fi2
.s'r{.sl
-485.:d
Bi*m&14
tumd].1,*
1 E'1
r3
rre[
t4
,54?A.li
]S*:.S!
,nft
:'i.;'1
-5,r,:S.8
.51't:.,n
,5:5,!.rl
1
*if=,*t
-58.3fi.3
'1
soBtu
l3.Tt
EliMd14
Project Setup and Data Preparati0n
47
Reference Project Tool

The Reference project tool is useful for quickly transferring
horizons,
faults, models, surfaces, and data from a backup project to the working
project.
The Reference project
tool is object generation aware; it can identify
older object versions from the most recent ones in the working and
background projects. This information is iconized behind each object
entry in both projects. You can filter this information for easy selection.
lf incompatible coordinate or unit systems are set for the working and
background projects, you cann0t c0py the data. The Reference project
tool performs coordinate transformations between reference systems if
the projects are set up with different CRSs.
48.
Pro.er . SetL0
a.o Ddtd Prepatat
0r
Refer to the
Petrel Help for more details about the Reference project
tool and its
use.
Petrel Geophys cs
--
L
L
L
L
I-
Procedure
Data Through the Reference
-Transferring
Project Tool
--
1.
ln menu bat select File > Reference proiect tool.
I-<
I-r
LL-
ffi
2.
File
E-
L-
i';1
trl'Lol
fioudspin_SecandaryProiest.pe{R y
pe:
3.
4.
t*ai
Choose a Background project
nme:
Files nf
A*l*r*nr* prrer:i
l Fdrel files {".pd
"pdR}
Toggle on the Background

Click
[El
*pen
f,eql
project dara check
boxes
to transfer to the Working projecr.
"re..-" so'*t trl
--
anrdinb
l6prs!.i i!al4 dd:3sCtl P.
rFeH ptslr_1rf &&rffi Pa:i 14?&
E, tr I .C
::---!
radr
3yr&n! sFc:-t ffi,
*", i;i-*-lL
i-ulrffi H?_118?N
:v
:,e , .;
--<
r__-----
:t
.&i
a'mr
s
ta
&i
i. ri
rl
E]::
ii:]
J ri
"l
Br
,l
irde
- rl;
l----1
I r...1-.I
I:
,
SEG-Y 2D Toolbox
Petrel 2013 introduces the SEG-Y 2D toolbox to improve loading of

2D seismrc data that has navigation and header issues. The tool is
intended to be used with 2D SEG-Y files that cannot be loaded correctly
using the standard SEG-Y import tools in Petrel.
A major focus of the tool is the handling 0f 2D navigation data. The

SEG-Y 2D toolbox can work with navigatr0n data from multiple
sources, including:
a variety of externaliextfile formats that have either a fixed

number of characters per field, or files where fields are
delimited by a specrfic character, for example, a tab, c0mma,0

semi-col0n in Excel's comma separated (CSV) save formats. lt
also can work with UK00A standard formats including
lonqitude and latitude c00rdinates.
Pefel Geophysics
49
sesmc vintages that are loaded onto 2D seismic lines that

already exist in the Petrel project.
offset-VSP seismic data, where you specify a surface location,

(for example a wellsurface location), the azimuth, and a fixed
distance between traces.
links to coordinates of a polyline set.
For more
6S sre-v.zr
Tcalbm
Lcading
details on the SEG-Y 2D toolbox, see the Petre! Help.
to*t**
t{ut1,
*rrldcx
rqqq { Uqlie
i
i
EE-Ydrectcqr r,i"*"i.
r---:
i_,,i
j
I
E/le positors:
f.or
i"nn*O
f,,iavgatirnsauree: iqF.q.Iq*g",.qlgs!e.,F-u,.........,,........,.....,...,.......,,,:J
,!
-'ll
'.,.;;
EEG'Y a.*n!des:
Corrdie relererc system ltESi

lnpull CHS
OuhL.tfle 'GroiPcJ
Cnh
eslnan
itruP'
t"iJi"J r,=r"-iJ;;;
&s
tdo cordnate slstem detned
_;:
r .:
!.inao: i"Jit
OUFTJiSEG-Y
diretrry
50
Pro.lect Setup
afd Data Preparati0n
Lnad gen*rated SEtrryles t* Plrl
Petrel Geophyslcs
1_
l-
L
l-
Seismic Data Export Formats

The standard export format for 2D and 3D seismic data is SEG-Y which
is a binary format that you can import easily into other applications.
The other export format is ZGY bricked format (3D seismic data only),
which is faster for rendering data through a cube than the SEG-Y
format.
Procedure
Exporting Seismic Data
1. Bight-click
the seismic data and select Export.
i+ rc".:...
C1.1.t
'E
:d'1
'
r,.u'",",
..;r;,.
'
.:: .rl.: :.rie
.uta,x
eatt:
a)
ro', 1y,.".,.'
TY L:a !rr'
!G lu: a,:
. B
' ". ::.:r.:*, .
i $ Ser ii r:f-rrir-!
. )e1tE.-. t.- t.t.s'r../
# .'e:e s:tgr., -ar.er,rr
B rr:e,rr-qo,:':,c..,nd.r
ffl :u-:r..,qr,..
6i ir:erPrEi:r.1 rra:qr.,
r
2.
Specify the output File name and format. Click Save.
Seismic data in ZrIY bricked format {'.zgyJ

Shapefile i'.shpl
3.
Complete the export dialog box to create disk files

SEG-Y
export
--,.:: :.',,
r,.l:: :,
s'rdinatqcaleict.
lpit1.'.'.r
ffi
amplevelueformat rrrrrcatlntfoini'
l_.ll
'.-it-:::1,,,1:-'t;,.,rt:,1,
Lr-e,[,-,-j
Petrel Geophvsics
; i--i
'- ; i;
.,)
i-,_.:i
{,
51
Enhanced
0ptimization
Lesson 3
ln this lesson, you
Performance Through Data
will learn to optimize your data through cropping
and
realization, which can help improve computrng performance'
3D Volume and 2D Line CroPPing

the amount of
By cropping a 3D volume or aZD line, you can reduce
you to focus on the
Ota avatante from a 3D volume. Cropping helps
time'
zone of interest and allows for faster computlng
you can crop the 3D sersmic data by reducing the volume in the X, Y or
with 2D
Z domain. lt also is possible to skip in-lines and cross-lines.
that y0u can reduce
lines, you can skip trace numbers, CDPs, or SPs so
the vertlcal range as well as the extent of the line'
rii'-*li
il .,:ir iii
,:1 - .l
:1 --.-i
GroPPing a Volume
Procedure
1'Bight-Clicktheseismicvolumeandselectlnsertvirtual
the
croppeO volume' A virtual seismic cube appears under
original seismic cube with identical ggonn'tty
: ffi
,+] Lrieg sruey inrlusien frlfers
i5q
: ffi
Iriterprelisa fslder
& ;-] $e*srnc
1; 38mfe4n irrlsa !?es
lrarizon
,$ i-l S:rrvey t
Crop the virtual
cube:
h.
a.
Click SelecVpick mode
lS
'
in
tht
process toolbar and
the green handles display in the 3D window'

OR
b.
52. P'oier'SelLp d'd Dat"
Prepa'otror
Select Settings > Cropping tab and specify line ranges
5e*iilqsict ,iil $rssl
i?$e
1'
isl
iir*r*lin*:ange Jru
,5
'
;**
li{*{;i:ste.
,l:t
tr
certain types of data manrpulation and interpretation (for
example, autotracklng and ant-tracking), it is convenient t0
reduce the size of the cube when you work wth lt.
To do
.si.'
l
..-....
-...:
A contlnuous read0ut
of the volume size disPlaYs in

the lower r ght corner when
graphical y cropp ng the
cube.
Seismic Data Realization

Realrzation ts the process of creating a physrcal copy of seismic data in
the ZGY brcked selsmic format. The orrginalvolume can be an imported
SEG-Y file, virtual seismic data (for example, a cropped volume), or a
previously realized volume.
Realizatron serves four important purposes. lt
creates a physical representation of a cube. A reallzed seismic

volume is created as a ZGY format file. lt cannot be used in
other applications that supp0rt only SEG Y However, you can
rmport it into another Petrel project. The reallzed seismic
volumes usually are noticeably faster t0 use c0mpared to a
SEG-Y file. You can export the realized data into a SEG-Y
ormat.
changes value resolution. Many SEG-Y files use 32-bit floatingpornt format for trace amplitude values. Such resolutlon
sometimes is not necessary. lt adds a certain overhead to all
operations on the volume. You can gtve volumes that are
realized in Petrel a value resolution of 16-bit or even B-bit
integers, which can increase the available storage space.
However, gorng from a higher bit format to a lower bit format
can decimate seismlc data Changing back to a higher bit
Petrel Geophysics
53
format adds to the storage size only and will not recover the
initial data.
changes how seismic data is handled. You cannot completely
visualize arbitrary intersections of any volume. ln a SEG-y file,
for example, data is always stored sequentially as trace
following trace, then in-line following in-line. The realization
operation creates a new volume file that is organized for rapid
ACCESS.
increases memory-loading speed. A realized cropped cube is

significantly faster to upload than the equivalent virtual
cropped cube. The entire original cube needs to be accessed
when loading a virtual cropped cube.
54
Petrel Geophysics
L
-,--
L
L
L
L
L
L
ffi
Settings for'miq'
JI-
,tI-
---l16.8SESlo -1 14.1lll
Srce anlpltuds rtsngs:
-) Setfronr s*urce as shom above
'
..
Sifronr source symnretjcal
l,':
UsEr dfined
8j
Zero
centric
P+li:
Histogranl
:;
+w
ffi
40
Lower clipping: 0.01186".'!, Upper clipping: 0.C0Bi
320
suv
SEGO
+G00
J-
r--
L
L
L
L
r,_-
-88
-48
I-
I,
Realized v0lunits
L
T
L
L
--L:
-=
size: Max$2.
M8
kl:-,[-'..]
Et!*] @:g-l
Bealization requires disk space and can be a time c0nsuming process" lt

is strongly recommended that you save your project to a specific
location, preferably the local hard disk, before realizing large seismc
volumes. Otherwise, the system's temp0rary directory (for example, C.\
TEMP)will be used for the generated volume file.
-a-1
;---=
F
Petrel Geophysics
55
Seismic Data
Realizing
1 0pen-the Settings dialog box for the cropped setsmic cube'
2. 0n the Operations tab, g0 t0 the Realize sub'tab'
Procedure
3.
4.
+-
Toggle off rhe Zero centric check box'

option as the
Select the Set.from soLtrce as showtt above
Source amPlrtude range'
5. Click Scan.
6. 0bserve the histogram'
Click
the Filterbx and observe that the spike (zero values)
is
removed from the histogram display'
B.
Ensure that the
Realization quality is lnteger
bit
56
so
r0
'10
rower cippng: .&0s09i lJpper clippiilg: 0 Sgfl:t
Petrel GeoPhvs s
Pr0lect Setup and Data Preparation
lL
-,-
Prefetch to Cache 0ption
--
lnteractively browsing through huge 3D seismic cubes and 2D Iines in

an exploration scenario requires quick access to the data.
-,-
r_-,-
The speed at which data is read from the disk can reach 100 IVB per
second. However, in some cases this is not sufficient. With the
emerging 64-bit operating systems, it is possible t0 store data in BAM;
Petrel includes an 0ption to prefetch seismic data to cache.
You can use the Prefetch to cache option on seismic volumes with a
size that can reside in the computer's memory (independent of operating
system, that is, 32 164 bI) Both SEG-y and ZGy volumes or 2D Iines
have the option to load all seismic data into memory. This operation
will
run as a multi-threaded asynchronous task.
Prefetch to cache is similar fofhe Load iruto

used in pre-Petrel 2007 releases.
m,n,y option that was
Procedure
Using the Prefetch to Cache 0ption for
Seismic Data
1. Select Tools > System settings > Seismic tab t0 set the
Seismic cache size and graphics card memory.
:
Tt:*le 1-Wind*.w..,!:!!p
(,,.'
t9l _r*iefi]51iifi!5.,.
.'
....
.,
h
2.
Right-click on a seismic data object (3D volume or 2D line in

either a SEG-Y or ZGY cube) and select prefetch to cache.
-:
il
.t SEG y and ZGy

voiumes can be prefetched
I .-,,
to cache if the volume is not

larger than the available
cache size.
Project Setup and Data Preparatl0n.5T
:-
=-
-.t_
+
lf you selected a seismic cube in SEG-Y format, the Task
manager 0pens (if it is not already open) below the
graphc display area of Petrel and a counter updates until
it reaches 100%. At this point the volume is successfully

Ioaded into cache.
lf you selected a seismic cube ln ZGY format, the petrel
Message log opens and reports the Levels 0f detail (L0D)
that is prefetched to cache. When Level0 (highest level of
detail) is completed, the volume is successfully loaded into

cache.
Seismic Calculator
Use the Seismic calculator to generate virtual calculator volumes
based on existing cubes or between two or more existing cubes. The
calculator expects that all input volumes are of the same size and
definition (in-line, cross-line, and sample count).
Any calculator volume can be realized as any other seismic volume.

--<
58
-4I}**
Petrel Geophysics
Procedure
1.
Usino the Seismic

Catculator
Righr-ciick the
** =.:?l1-f_1l.1ru and select Catcutaror

#:-:g:il
,
.:4
2.
l:iJ
{alcultor,..
Enter the equation

bv tuninn and selecting
from the seismic
variables and
,n._ calculatoi
vv,wq,qLUl brtton,
uurruils.
^",^,,,1l.]yprng
^;;:=-
vartffi
lm
aces, functions).
L4;j
SelBCt seismc vBriable:
:o,1,.r"
$m:n
r*t
il'"
i';,,----:- ;-----
,;-i_Tt
,Fornea
seismic.
T:.11::::19::::
L, G:]
;#=r_EErE@E4rr
ggEqE8,
#*PgEqFrtrr:s
I
4
f,
th e eq
"r'[:llilT#l
uation A new,iu,u
*illi,,o,.uo
@,-*j m,q-F;r*{
i i& il
: j-il-l
:$ ll
x#*
tntine 77
xlrne 4rc
r-ffr
tJe,*-rht
: r& i_l
Petrel
Geopffi
l..-l
Intine 35
tu.*
+zO
Pro;ect Setup and
Da-a ppaitton
.E
Examples
To
cut back a seismic cube between two surfaces:

NewSeis = lf (Z<Surfacel (X,Y) And bsurface2
NewSeis: The name of the new volume
Surfacel and Surface 2: Surfaces
(X,Y), Seismic, U)
!-
Sersmic:Theseismicvolumeonwhichtoperformthetransform
To clip values
to a value range of (MinVal, MaxVal):
NewSeis = in (MaxVal, Max(Sersmlc, MinVal))

NewSers. The name of the new volume
perform the transform
Seismrc: The selsmic volume on which to
To transform selsmic using a function:
NewSeis = Function (Seismic)
NewSeis: The name of the new volume

perform the transform
Seismic: The seismrc volume on which to
pane that acts like a
Function: The function stored in the lnput
lookuP table
60
a:-
+-
=-
Mis-tie Analysis
this lesson, you will learn howto analyze and remove mis-tres from
Lesson 4
ln
the seismic data.

ln an ideal world, a sersmic interpreter would prefer to work on seismic
data that does not have mis-ties. However, this might not be the case,
particularly when interpreters have to work on data sets coming from

different vrntages that were acquired with varying acquisition
parameters and processed differently.
Mis-tie analysis in Petrel allows you t0 extract and apply mis-tie value
corrections for different seismic surveys. All lines contained ln the
Surveyfolder or a subfolder with the same vintage will be used when
a mis-tre set is created. You can estimate and correctforthese mlstie
va I ues:
o
o
Vertical Mis-ties: Corrects any vertical mis-tie between seismic

lines. You can define if the correction to be applied is a
c0nstant shift (default)or a floatrng shift.
Gain Mis-ties: Balances the amplitude differences between
the sersmic lrnes, applying different sets of gains to normalize
the display. Correcting for these mis-ties is useful when data
from vrntages that have been processed wrth drfferent
parameters are drsplayed together.

Phase Mis-ties: Extracts a phase rotation value for every line in
relation to the respective cross pornts. This value can be
=
)
applied t0 c0rrect differences in phases between lines. For

every crossing point, the algorithm calculates the correlation
between traces at the corresponding line and tries to minimize

the difference between them.
-1
<
urveyx
<
ffill4:v+
:/,.?{r1By
>
:'rl 3
L
--
@.
i,,*
,.
$ir6tJ
FinMiE
Tirne{vrtualelsssedl
5fcleo 1u
k:r:::l gi:L,l
H.
Virlc
Petrel Geophysics
PrOiecl Setup and Data Preparat on
61
---?-
Mis-tie Manager
The
Mis-tie manager
is an interactive t00l for managing vertical, gain,

and phase mis-ties and corrections between 2D or3D seismic lines in
Petrel. You can use it to calculate or specify correcti0ns, select
reference lines, clear Iines to exclude from mis-tie analysis, and select
which 2D lines to display in the active graphic window.
Procedure
Manager
1.
Managing Corrections Using the Mis-tie
lnsert the mistie set by right-clicking on the Ser'smic main

folder.
,SF:ffi*,,
,#!lmiqil& -..'
-\e. LItLl5 . ,
bSvlr,=
r;;;"
;;J.;;";;,',
.&; xi T
,
;l rfli l* ixpnr: , ..
@i; r 3*ier*. .
;&tj x
P:k ltr:lr
&'-- *is [
{
,;:
"
firl+L
. Survel,:', ,F.i
r:.--. ...- ,,,,--._
trsei': -'lder
,'#F-lsluI"" tJrrllaps* irerrsirr*.1

rffqsrnzj. Erpand ir*rr:rsi,',ei
o # e ura:i*
Ssru+ fo*r ic nkl*r-;
# i *tu J 5*ri hy narr*r
I Ss srbi
,rr-i Ly inline nur-.rber
S s stbl err &u:*. crlr all
# ,yl slb .ry
$ il Filters i cs ..uir name ali
'*'ciun* Iribu:ps,,,
lnseri nflls-ire
se: I\
Pr*:ei.h; ra.he
62.
P'oject Setup and Data Dieparat.on
Pelrel Geophysics
The survey selector showing selection of multiple surveys
Use the Mis-tie manager to control which lines to correct,

what corrections to perform, and how to perform them.
ki
0rM
The original and corrected composite lines show in the
.4
Mis-tiesfolder.
ff
"F,
H[s+iesesl *mey2
ffi 7
Potueeon lis-lie sef
Survey Z
finginal composite seismir
-al
-_
-a
Petrel Geophysics
. l
Seismic Mis-Tie Visualization

You can dynamically create composite lines of mis-tie corrected seismic
data and visualize it

:owi*ooriranyl
.
i-
I
I
0rigrnal and corrected composite lines appear in the lnput pane under
the Mis-tie set
,#
rvils{r
i,.l
hlis-tie set'l 2 lines
,' ,:4 i-:i Points finm h;lis-tie set
1 l line
seismic
site seismic
l, m i.,l riginel conrp*siie
64
Project Setup and Data Preparatlon
Petre Geophysics
I
You can display mls{ie values In a 2D window.
LI
l_*
]-
l_
l_
l_
r--l
I
I.-
L
l*
r.
An interactive point set with attributes is generated for quality control.
L
L
tr
L
r
,g; ur+ey
ffit{
,r
6f
ft
inis-tie set
Surxey I
p*, 1fr Folnts fron tis-te set 1 SurYey
t-r
htis-ties
f,*u,r;: Attnhutes
tT ir.l
tI
i:, J
:-l
E
i::ll
furtor
\ertical mis'tie torrelation

\rertical mis'tie residual itutal ualuei
:_.'
,,:i :...-l
ii
Phase nris-iie {ahsolute ualuel

pnas* mis-tie rorrelaiion furtr
1 ,i': e=n
ffi
mis-tre {nnrmalized ualuei
Line name
11'>l
t-1
1-1
--{
Perre Geopht/s cs
Project Setup afd Data Preparati0n
'
65
!Exercises
Data
Setting up a Proiect and Preparing
ln these exercises, you
wlll get hands-on experlence with setting
up a
new Petrel Seismic lnterpretatlon project and preparing data for

interpretation.
Exercise Workflow
o
.
.
.
o
.
.
Create a new project and select the projection system

Set the seismic reference datum (optional).
lmport seismic data into Petrel'
Transfer data between Petrel projects'
Prefetch to cache.
Crop and realize the 3D volume'
Analyze and remove mis-ties.
Exercise Data
has been assigned to
ln this directory"
create
thatyou
data
you. save all proiects and other
You
will
be working in
a studentdirectory that
Vou run find this directory inthe Geophysics Fundamenfalcourse

ls located
directory (see the figure). The input data used in this exercise
in the
--
these folders.
+-
oafa importfolder and the pre-made Petrel projects are located

you cannot find
in the secon dary proiectsfolder. Ask the lnstructor if
i i
Geophysirs tundanrentai
i
!
I
Data lrnPurt
Serondary Frcjerts
Student
66
Petrel Geophysics
-*
:
j-
Creating a New Proiect and Selecting the Proiection

System
ln this exercise, you willcreate a new project in Petreland selectthe
projection and unit systems.
Petrel is coordinate enabled, meaning that coordinate transformatlons

can be done during import, export,0r by using the Reference proiect
tool.
i
L_
t-
t_-
LLL-*
Unit conversion can take place during data lmport, but flrst y0u must
specify or checkthe unit and coordinate systems used in a new project.
1. Open Petrel.
2. Create a new project.
3. From the menu bar, select File > Save proiect as.
4. Choose a name for your project and save it in the Student
folder.
5.
6.
From the menu bar, select
Prolect > Proiect settings.
ln the Settings dialog box on the Coordinates and units tab,

click Select to choose a coordinate system.
ffi
Setrings fo*'New
prejef
tilisrsettircs2 I Sotsbae
C6..dinstesandunits
{fl &s:L-:l
Cqardnale refeence
system iCRS):
L:
i,-jH!:9j!,'.-']
l..lntsysenrl
1-
Sinrslaon
units:
cliPsf'nnf
DisplayopDns - '.-
Storage unis
L
L
L
l-;
)=
--*--i
Lal{ongfomat
Y soit
fIJS
Z unit
11
fuea unit
t?
,:::) Dcmal angle (dgrees
,.'l
"i
Degrees'minutes-seconds
Voume
rrt
fll
Gesdetc dahrnl:
Seisnric
time:
nts
lit
Proiect datunr
eismic
velocity: f;
,.:'-:
wcse,l
fL-1
L
L
Proiectrefrencedatu$ -Tine
r_--)
Depth
r----J
iSRDi:
fL,iSLl:
f lcP,,--li{.e{--:.l
Petre Geophyslcs
l{-...na l
Project Setup and Data PreDaratior'.67
"__
+.J
<
ln the Goordinate
enter NAD2
o
o.
reference system selection dlalog box,
7 Loui s iana for Fllter by string.

Louisiana State
SelecI MENTOR: SPCS27
-1702:l'{AD27
Planes, Southern Zone, (JS Foot" f rom the list and cllck
0K.
l-
<
S+le
ffidmsF refumm slFiffi
{CFIS)
Fiiie tly
FilkbYsEig: N'\D27Le
F&er
try:
i,
&xnt insrde aea
cd
!alq:
iEHF!a*
&
eGct6lw eblqg lf
.11,".'
u*
l:r Ma shape dis**im
;;*Cr frrysl CR asd *a
HdzBbl nit
w&
Aut-
lB
'MENTC'RTSFCS3-1][3:NAB3 Lsisine SBe Rn* Oiishore Meb'"

-Me Ug Fmi'
'*IENTR:SetS2f-l?01:MD27 Leisiann te F!en* NEdhetn
(}fhDe h{ets'
"MENIORITAriP-Oj-|PN L*iisna ShE Plane,
'MEiITOR:LA-:IIAS?? Lsaisns Stqte Flses fe{&sn Ztre U
F@i
"trENTAR lA83SF:itADS3 Leiisna S:eb Planes- Olh@. US Fd"

%tENf O:L483-O:NAD83 Lruiiaa SbE Flsne, O!{shtre Mds"
'irIENIOF:SPC?-LI]03 NAB27 Lfti$sa SsE Plnes' Of'hse. US
'IiENTO*:LA O t'{4D27 Leiiana SSae FIan*. {ihr' US Fd"
sRthm ?tre.
US
'MENTCR:LA-:iAD2f Lsane Sl6!e Ple.a.

'TIENTOF L-AiP{F:HFG}.i LHiitns bte Pin- OlJshGe U
FN'
Fd'
Fml'
;lU
StS
sts
irats
{tl-rs
ls
iU
:.US
*US
cus
l
sts
sts
68
9.
CIick
0K
in the Petrelmessage box that refers to the Xy unit
in ftUS.
# P"to*l
i-----"
l
.r::,.
#
The selected coordinaE iferenee s-ysem {CRs} re-desse )l ueit o .lt_js,,

T6 voidftis. click Csnc end
Do
see.ts difreBntaRs.
youMtto B-define iheXf uni
10
0n the Coordinates and units tab in the Settings dialog box,

click the Unit system drop-down menu. The default unit
settng in Petrel is [Vletric.
Petrel Geophys cs
Project Setrp and Data Preoarat on
59
All input data is given in feet. Changing the unlt settings to

Field
will ensure that a correct import is done. You can change
the unit settings after you import the data; howevel the data
itself will not be changed, so a correct position of all data is
not guaranteed.
11. Select Field , click Apply and click 0K.
12.
From the menu bar, select File > Save
proiect'
Setting Reference Datums (0ptional)

setttng reference datums ls required for onshore projects only. This
exerciie shows you how to set up the reference datum in a Petrel
project.
1.
ne, find
lnthe
the Datumsfolder and expand it
q*&.. %.,m$.:i
,.armlf
trr ,*rsrl'/6*i,
ffi
n:
tri
m
tr
: ffi
: frf
) ff
r. m
' ffi
=-
" *SX
-";t
,?rsaF$.*$rF,rrP
daprt i#s rtrPrb
Prsdatfi41sfi18!6
#sfrrtdFs96i:if/#srsfr
$4$"rioa,tetriespefrbrrp,r*&3
,i$1edtcF+Fcdfltpspi,rs.,
rsrffiesl,?t*r*fiF*l*s
F6f/*$m
cfifis#
esprbP
r sfig-8
5Jc-4str-6
st ,rrlrFlf,
,ts
rf
i.
2.
3.
ffi
SsS
!&
5xin.
Bight-click SBD (Seismic Reference Datum) and select
Settings.
0n the Datum settings tab, the Z from MSL field can be set ln
project units, for example, 200 ft higher than MSL FoT this
exercise, make sure Z from MSL is 0 (zero, because thls data
set is referenced to MSL). Note that Time datum is nof

editable.
4.
5.
Cancel the dialog box.

Open the Settings dlalog box for MSL, KB, and CBD. Observe
that nothrng can be edited!

s
70
*Iln-*
Pr0lect Setup and Data Preparation
Petrel Geopl'r
7
B
Open the Settings dialog box for the new datum.

0n the lnfo tab, change the name of the new datum to
uy
Datum.
9.
ln the Datum settings tab, enter a value for Z from MSL (such
as 300 feet).
10
=
11
=
=
i-
1_
L
t
L
L
.I
r-r
velocie check box).

Click 0K (you will not use this datum in the project).
Loading Seismic Data

This exercise shows you basic loading of a 3D seismic cube. More
advanced opti0ns for Ioading data are out 0f the scope of this course.
1. From the menu bar, select lnsert > New seismic main
2.
Toggle on Time datum and enter a value for Beplacement

velocity or TWT from SBD (toggle off fhe Replacement
folder.
ln the Input pane, review the Seismic main folder and its
structu re.
3. Right-click Seismic and select lnsert seismic survey.

4. Double-click Survey 1 to open the Settings dialog box.
5. 0n the lnfo tab, change the name of the survey t0 3D
seismic.
6
.
Right-clck the 3D seismic folder and select lmport (on
B.
selection).
lnfhe Data import/Seismic input data/3D volumes
9.
directory, select the flle mig.sgy.

Set Files of type to SEG-Y seismic data with preset parameters
(".") and click 0pen.
Click 0K.
--)
--
P'0lect SetJp d1d Dar D epdrar
or.7l
l--r
-:
Look
in
.
e&
.i
- *r
3D volumes
\ame
moo.f'ecj
l, ..,2004 I I.l;4V
Ddle
m1g.sqy
"-
,,e
SGv -,
5 e
2.t?.980
(B
Reaent PJace5
ffi
B
De!Kop
iirrres
:r&,
Cop!ter
t&
Uetwork
File name:
F'solrype
File xample/descilplor:
mig
SLC.,"o.""uu,rp,es-tL,a-ek,sr'.1
Opefl
Cancel
";;;;;
/t
inls SfC V rmpon attows loading parameies to e setbforeiheftes sre joa;d

TheSEG'Yfacehesderposronscabesetan!hllecanbEcned
<
10
The SEG-Y lmport dialog box opens with default parameters

Change the parameters to 3D to fit the input data.
11
lnthe Vintage drop-down list, leave the selection as Set

default vintage (this command creates sequential vintage
names, the first being Seismic Time
12
1.)
IJ.
1).
lnlhe Line detection method drop-down list, change

Automatic Io Trace header fields.
Try
figuring 0ut the different parameters for in-line and
cross-line numbers by scrolling down in the SEG-y headers

fromJirst.fi/e list in the lower part 0f the dialog box (bit
location information ts found under the first three SEG-y trace

headers).
72 o D oject Se. tp
,Er
drd Data o epa a.ion
&-
Petre Geophysics
r!,r$r
t{-
.,;
'?'3s
coof8te
:,t*
issr ree$ wdh ry;il {*,*}
X csndi.'r*s
,:
Y sssrdir!tE
::
i-rsle deteta'1 me{,hsd
irce
!-r*de
fr*l** r I
su{i&r
oss:rr n ber
l:]
,r'iiise
m,*b*r
Sheipsil* &L'eer
{*F
Sagrrplefoan&
Wisspsrfusc
* btle
b;ie
e:**r*S**
32.Lrt,
,rg;er
l
Trace*
.! btre
JV
i3;-btj iric*r ?
bytr i*?-bitl in**r
ilf-biij
l*
s*av:
0+:l
iEiier
l.-:
': xlxgep*iss
ssfisie
f{eader larlai
p.sf}n
Ilaee heder*;
!{r:taqe etd*iarlt';ir,lcgre
SamBte
"er.ra
,.:
r"l {o*rd*txe s**i*
l-le taee waddrrq faet*rs
l..l
kp ked*reegy qecks
GY headels {r.n lirs file
5EG-Y i'rt:
Inret
!ra{l {1-,i}
!:nc. { -8)
f j dr {9-111
irecf a:.3-161
n /r : i>n\
cd 431-34,1
-l-*
LU'J!
r:':
, v>
....
-;,
r_)_l
d i:-;t]
{)*5
iraCe hsd!*
r.8{?
3SA
6i.
;
s
?
*
!
sr{.fi} iS't71,163 :1"3{i61{63
5 6.:L
6:
s
!
l
t
,'-.''-l
,
F Lancd
14. SetTraces to
scan t0 1000 and click Scan. 0bserve thatthe

graphic displays of in-line, cr0ss-line, and X- and Y-coordinates
are sequential, indicating that the parameters are set c0rrectly
(lnline number ai byte p0slt0n 221 and Crossline number at

byte position 5 or 21).
Petre Geophysics
Project Setup and Dara Frearar o 73
E
l-+
rnl i ne
500. g
500,0
500.
500.
500,
500.
500.
lnline
o
o
o
o
f60.0 15s858?. OO _170134.00

361. O 15S8617. OO _170114. OO
162.0 1598692.OO -170134.O0
361,0 1598747. OO -170134. O0
164. 1598802.00 _170114.00
365. O i598857. O0 -170134. OO
366. 0 1598912. 0S -i701 14. 00
.,|
I
: r.,
"'-
.tt
_-<
._
L--
f-.
E-
L-"
,l ,' .
-t
--
"E
--l
2fl0
4oo
600
,'t3:"':e,
]oi
/l /i ll ll
ill1/{,7
/l
It t/ ti ii
/t U
/ lll,
tll l/ li l/u --i--ll1
=
"
rl
U
?00
ll
400
-l
t-
:.J
Jrl
lE
-)
--a
f-
t.
.J-
.l
, V
Trad.b seo
60 800 tri
,
_l
_l
.-J
Click 0K in the SEGY Scan dialog box.
_L.d
_t
-\{
74
Petrel Geophysics
_l
:l:J
16. Click 0K
in the SEG-Y lmport dialog box.

An Input data dialog box opens. The X, y Z ranges should
be the same as illustrated in the figure.
By default, the color template for the seismic data is set to
Seismic (default). You can change this color template in the

Template drop-down list. You also can change it after the
seismic data is loaded.
ffi
lnput data
6eneral
Name:
ffi
Type:
$g
Template:
3D seismic
Domain:
fr%.r jG
Vintage:
Caordinate referenee sysiem
Froj+ctCR5:
iHi
SPCS27 i7C?
File CRS:
0grCR...
158554.5
-"!5S1.i.5
X range
Y range
Zrange.
Unil conversion
-35S2
i6ts7s?.5{i
fll
-':?Cl{re.50
ftUS
*8
'.-
ij
i-"*---i
lf you use SEG-Y
Seismic data {".") as the

format when loading the
seismic volume, steps
Z conversian:
j-'St
10-16 in this exercise will

not be performed. A
Negate Z-values when mostly pasilive
Vintage selection dialog

box opens, after whrch the
Input data dialog box
in
Step 16 opens.
17. Click 0K. A new icon
is displayed in the
lnput pane under
fhe 3D sersmic folder.

lf the Petrel message log opens, view its content and
close it.
18.
the menu bar, select Window > New 3D window,

19. In the lnputpane, toggle on mig to displaythe outline of
the seismic data.
In
Petre Geophysics
lf you load a bricked

seismic volume usng Files
of type: Seismtc data in
ZGY bricked format
{"
zgy),
the same Vintage
selection dialog box

appears and Step 16 and
the remaining steps are

requ ired.
Pr0lect Setup and Data Preparai 0n
75
+
20. Toggle 0N lnline and Crossline to display the seismic data
iCli:re
ffi*;na*r1any
+
I
>
-.--.
>
:
21
Observe that
lnput
22
the Vintages folder (under Sersmic ln the
pane) n0w c0ntains 0ne entry, Seismic Time
Save your prolect.
Loading 2D Data
1
Bight-click the Sersmic main folder and select lnsert
seismic survey.
0pen the Settings dialog box for the new folder (Survey 'j).
0n the lnfo tab, change the name of the new folder to 2o
1
Click 0K
tr
Rght-click fhe 2D lines surveyfolder and select lmport

(on selection).
6.
7
76
rne s.
4
.,
lnfhe Data import/Seismic input data/2D lines

directory, select the ".sgyfiles.
Make sure Files of type is set to
SE6-l seismic data with

Petre Geophysics
Click 0pen.
Complete the SEG-Y lmport dialog box as shown in the
figure and click 0K.
10
ln the Input data dialog box, make sure that File CRS is set
to
SPC27*1102... and click 0K for all. lf the Petrel

message log opens, view its contents and close it.
Save your project.
Petrel Geophysics
Project Setup and Data Preparat on
77
E
LTransferring Data between Petrel Projects
The Reference proiect tool is object generation aware. lt displays
information about which version of the same object is newer 0r
older in the local and reference projects.
1. From the File menu, select Reference project tool. An

0pen project dialog box opens.
ffi
fetrel 2S13.1 {64-bt} alpha -
lNevr
prqect - lmpo
Fl
ii
loler,*
prejec:
pen prcjet:
impart.ile.
l-
.: ffi 5a'd preieci
L-
C:rl+5
ffi Save :rejec:r as. ..

e* ..--i.i.:
Sl Database lcol...
ffi pr-t" serch lnd*x
o3 i:t:1. s11:c! s5rel::r:n
L.
[L
m
-5" irrrnl ...
il*i
Lr-i {_
T_
: t't ,:'
Find Cl o ud s pin_S
ry P roj e ct.p efR in the

Secondary prljects folder and open it. (lf the Petrel
message log appears, view the content and close it.)
All available data in the selected reference project is listed
e c onda
on the right srde of the Reference
!L
proiect tool dialog box.
78.
Proiect Setup ard DaLa Preparal on
Petrel Geophysics
-.
----{
r-_J
Rderepojdtd
r__
r--
Ba.kgroud prcid
1_
r-
1_
i,Ei
Olceophyss Fudamenbliscondary ProFcialcudspin co"a..ve..crpen

Cood$abqsbm: SPCS2I l2{'UENTOR SPC27-I& W27LoinaSEl
ii$l
',".lEllElB@iliEJ
%8tr
"*" :
--J
LL-l
.
r.-
f
f
f
>.:spr-:- o e,e,
.,"
v 'Ti
,i"rHii. r-,-J,
'El sq:.-
u
E
,i ,'.c[B dsta
- I'rr-d:il-?r_(6t)-
.r ' armcr Polrp

'l 1", o' 4er.*
f
3v uqq
ii3 r, N{m*r
5 lsirududr@*e
r/r
\J
q
E
!-:.
.."'
r--r
--*l:'uu'""*
.
.i
rmprd
f/m+
I .r"""**
li
Debrrs
Debils lAlrackPofaonl
i&cloudainl
rime:
r-
Febl3201311:15i3
.-i
Rete@nce DiGeophr$cs Fndmnbtlsuden{t1y-CloudsplnFei
Ti:
f:l
Fb2m706S:59
Eetsnce. DlceophysiFn&enblscondary
--
+il. makh'n!
E--
L
L
1L
=
---
f
f
'[
oaer&'s
k"
Toggle on the check boxes for these objects: Wells, Well

Tops 1, Cultural data, lmported lnterpretation, Surfaces,
ATrack Polygon, and New model.
*\
,i
i
lf there are any
mismatches between the
4.
Use the blue left arrowto copy data into your Iocal project.
coordinate systems of the

local and reference projects,
The Petrel message log lists the copied objects.

Close the Reference proiect tool and save your project.
a warning message is
displayed and you will be
unable to transfer the data.
This limit prevents you from

copyinq data between
geographically incompatible
projects.
Also, if the two projects have

different unlt systems (metric
vs. field), you will get an
error message and you wlll
be unable to transfer the
data.
-4
79
Prefetching Data to Cache

Accessing volumes is one of the most critical and, potentially, time
consumrng processes when interpreting and handling seismic data.
Both SEG-Y and ZGY format volumes are stored and accessed from
disk, although the bricked seismic format (ZGY) is handled much
faster than SEG-Y
Ir
To reduce the trme t0 access volumes, you can prefetch data to
cache if the size of the volume is not too brg for the c0mputer's
RAM. This process involves loading the entire volume rnto computer
mem0ry.
1.
--
ln the
lnput pane, right-click on mrg and select Prefech to
cache.
The Petrel Message log opens and displays the prefetch
status of each level starting with 0 (zero) and continurng

upward until all levels requrred to prefetch the entire
volume
at full resolution
are loaded.
the Message log if it is closed, gofo View >

Panes > Message log.
The volume size cannot be larger than the set seismic
cache srze for the project.
Change the cache size:
Go to Iools > System settings > Seismic tab.
lncrease the cache size so that you can load larger
volumes. However, do not to set t too high because a
--,
-,
-,
y._
To display
2.
a.
b.
high number can cause unstable performance. The

range is dependent on the available BAM of the
computer. Hold your mouse pointer over the question
mark to frnd out how to calculate the optimalvalue.
**l
G*
!l
+E
-.J
>-l
)
Ll
-_l
=-J
-l
_l
-J
80 o Project Setup and Data Preparation
Peel Geophysics
:l
Gropping Seismic Data

cropping the seismic data means reducing the
vorume in the X, y
or Z domain and skipping in-rines and cross-rines.
with 2D rines, the

same process means reducing the vertical
range as wellas the
extent of the line by limiting or skipping trace
umbers, CDps, or
SPs.
1. Rght-crick on the 3D seismic cube (mig) and serect rnsert

Virtua! cropped votume.
A new icon with the same name as the original

followed by
[Crop] / appears below the original icon.
Open the Settings dialog box for the cropped
volume.
0n the 0perations tab, change the Bealization quality
to
B, 16, and 32 bf.0bserve the changes in file size
2.
3.
(realized volume size).
4. Open a new 3D window.

5. Display the cropped data by roggling on mig [Crop] 1. The
6.
B.
outline of the seismic cube is displayed.

Under mig [Crop] 1, toggle on lnline and Crossline.
To add
more lines, right-click the cropped volume and
insert
in-line, cross-line, time slice, or seismic intersections

from
the menu.
Activate Select/pick mode. The corners and
edges of the
volume appear with green squares. By clicking
thse green
squares, you can drag the edges of the cube
manually.
A continuous readout of the size when cropping
down a
volume is displayed in the lower right corner
petrel.
of
Get an exact cropping to a specific in_line and
cross-line
range by opening the Settings dialog box
for the cropped
volume (if not already opened) and slecting
the Gropping
:*'..
i*r
-
You cannot use
Selec(pick mode to
crop
2D lines graphically in a 3D
window
tab.
Set these parameters:
o
.
o
lnline range from 500 to 700, Skip g

=
Crossline range from 360 to 580, Skip
=
Vertical range from _800 to 2500 ms
Petrel Geophysics
Project Setup and Dut,
p,.pu,utrrffi
t-.
L-
tt_
L
10.
Apply and check the Statstcs tab.

Go to the 0perations tab > Realize subtab for the
Click
cropped volume and check the file size again.

1
1.
12.
Cancel the Settings dialog box.
a.
b.
c.
Rght-click 0n 0ne of the imported seismic lines and

select lnsert virtual cropped 2D line.
0pen the Settings dialog box for the inserted 2D line.
0n the Gropping tab, set the Vertical range t0
Click 0K
3.
14.
-4000.
e.
1
t-
Crop a 2D line:
With a 3D window active, toggle on the cropped
2D
line in the lnput pane.

Change the lateral extent of the cropped 2D line. Select
appropriate values in the drop-down Iist for First trace or
Last trace on the Gropping tab in the Settings dialog box
You can also enter a number for Skip traces.

Save your project.
=.
l'srEd @e :
.4f3:
C*T
Ff.ffi
82
- tr 0
Lasr*m:
ii3 " m
@tlBB
?lr
=-
!1
ffise
Petre Geophysrcs
,)
Realizing the 3D Volume

L
t
L_-
f,
L"
a,
L
L
lealilalpn is the process of creating a physical copy of seismic

data in ZGy bricked format.
A reatizei ,,r'i rr.,
faster to upioad than an equivrl.niuotruf'J.ppeO is significantty
cuOe. tt s
strongly recommended that you
save y0ur prolur, to a specific
locarion, preferably rhe locat
hard dis[, Ouior.uulrng
large
seismic volumes. Otherwise,
tf-le.sysiemt t*po,u,V directory (for
example, C\TEMP)will be used
foithe generaieo volume file.
1
0pen the Settings dialog box
for the cropped seismic
f--
0n the Realize subtab on the

Operations tab, toggle off
the Zero
centric check box.
G*#:**"i*i:;i.ll:rt:,::i:i
I-d
-,
cube.
2.
o.u,,r.
L-
::il.ii.1:t:rrrii.,::ii.ijf]il..:,::r..i.
Iff.,*i *r*Y. 1'*:

i
'
':p*'
o*,ro
I S"ee *u*rde *rr: .?16.e t l?.(r7S

l; .9. S**m*howble
i. l:., soti*******
,:.'.i
iq ***
,**
i oo*" -""T F*c
-
ij1i:,:iti,1':ii##i
'-
-'- -' '
"-
ki
-- " I i
il
,.d ii
LlBd{sd
-: s. me
Itsogrfr
*n
lX:t, , ll**
,;:,
**
jlti
:d
li
il
li
li
jl
ri
i:
rl
i:
ti
1!5 .r$
.is
l.rj
io s6. S
Fe*rtuqq{t neg* aU,i
*r"**n
org*d qrhy
O+*+*..
*:.ir,,
!*t*
.*,
'
e&edvo[fts Lt&3]0f,{B
.5h ';:----"]T
EEI .edopd.g t *O.

'
lr
ts
O*,,'
no#g per
ti
125
ri
ri
3, bt
. il*'o*
---
li-. ,**g,n
......
ii usdftd
r"
rj
ii
:--,1 ] i
:. ,: li
'-,s ]i
3. Use the Setfrom soltrce as shown aboveoption

as
Source amplitude range andciick
Scan.
"4. Observe the
histogram.
Petrel Geophysics
Droiect
Serrp and
pgpflffi
--:
check box and observe that the sprke
(zero values) is removed from the histogram display.
Ensure that the Realization quality ls lnteger B bit.
Toggle onfhe
b
Filter
Keep the remainlng values as defaults and click Realize

The Task manager opens under the graphic window area
showing the status of the realization process. The

information also is written to the Petrel message log
'i**q *
-.:i **:.
*. :,i,;:*i *: e; e
*4
B'--: mig Ecrryl I
[Fteaizedl
0.
_l
.*:-i
l---
L--a
:A:,,1 nlin &3

..:,-: Xline4?&
Z=_t752
-]
--l
B. Close the Settings dialog box.

9" Realize the mig cube in a similar way.
1
Save your Project.
Analyzing and Removing Mis-Ties

The Mis-tie manager is an interactive tool for managing
L-/
mis-ties
between 2D lines and 3D surveys. lt works in much the same way

as the Survey Manager for sorting and viewing data.
-]
>l
>
You can generate mis-tie sets for the entire survey folder or for
different subfolders ln the main survey folder.
ln part A of this exercise, you will analyze and remove the mistie in
allvintages. ln part B, you will remove the mis-tie in selected lines.
Part A. Analyzing and Removing the Mis-Tie in All Vintages
1.
ln the
2.
Choose both the 2D lines and the 3D seismic survey and
lnput pane, right-click the 2D /rnes folder and select

lnsert mis-tie set.
-<
click 0K.
=
=
84.
Prolect SelLp ano Data Prepatatior
;e" 4,+e*. -til t;**""
A new seismic volume named mig [Bealized] 1 appears in

the lnput Pane.
'
-l
_l
!J
[.-
Petrel Geophysics
L_
i;r
L_
rl
j::l
!.l.,.,-l1@.-j
L-
The
Mis-tie manager opens as a spreadsheet with
one
entry for each crossing between the 2D lines and the 3D
L_-
survey.
feiiffil
:t****",-.,1il
L_-
L---.
t_
LLr___-
t-i
ari
191 St_ E: la.
t-r
l-f
Toggle on lhe Vertical and Gain check boxes in the top

section of the
l1
Mis-tie manager, but leave Phase toggled
off.
4.
>a
t--l
L-
L
L
Leave the Start and End values as the defaults (they define
the time window or which statistics will be computed

between any two crossing lines).
Click Gompute mis-ties and observe the values entered
into the different columns.
Use Constan as the method for calculating mis-tie
corrections and click Gompute.
L
U
I.
P.l rel Geophysics
85
r:
crrertions
rii Constsnt
r
1.
Varisble
Ihe Gain correction and Vertical correcfion columns

are filled in. You can edit the c0mputed values in these
columns manually. lnlhe Vertical correction c0lumn,

enter - 10 . 0 (10 ms downward relative to the crossing
lines) for all entries of slb2.

Click Apply.
>_
>
9.
11
You can use and lock different 2D lines by selecting the
appropriate check boxes in the Us and Lock columns

Use all lines, but do not lock any of them.
When satisfied with the set-up, click Realize to generate
physical versions of the mis-tied lines.

1?
ln the Realize
mis-tie corrected seismic dialog box,
>
make these selections:
a.
b.
Toggle onfhe Scanfor exact amplitude check box.

Toggle off the Zero centric check box.
Use lnteger '16 bit as Realizatlon quallty.
c.
d. Selecf Default vintage.
==
85
Petrel Geophysics
I
-a
-J
I
-l=
I
13
Click 0K. These lines can now be found at the bottom of

fhe 2D /rnes folder. The realized Mis-tie 3D volume is
found at the bottom of the iD seismicfolder.
14. 0pen a 3D window and display

the original lines by clicking the first column as shown
rn the figure.
o
-l
--tI
&ffi1
r., *ti{
'1
r*;? **r_. a1
, -
l*r*feut*-
:r- tt * e *rr*st*{$ i *t*rs eeti **t
5 Click 0K to save and close the Mis-tie manager.
16
--/
the virtual mis-tied lines by clicking the second column

as shown in the figure.
Open a Map window and view the points from
Mistie
set,
found in Ihe Mis-tie foldel under fhe 2D /inesfolder.

17. 0pen the Seftings dialog box for the points from mis_tie
set.
Petrel Geophysics
-1
g7
L.
.--
10
to. 0n the Style tab:
a.
b.
c.
-l
-J
Activate the Number annotation.

Toggle on the ,Sftow check box.
Select a font suitable for display.
lE-l
19
Click 0K
20
Expand the Attributes folder of the Points from mis-tie set

and choose attributes to disPlaY.
l--a
l-_l
.--.
:?100
-l
L.-J
,--.
]
t-.-
?4.16'
^
zoPB,
-
01
H.lA
Iq
I-l
h-
8.28
12+30
I-_l
,"d,; uqiq
ggli,? 15f." ,
--J
t,
Ll
.J
5i
<
Mao
g*s
nBe
I l{a5itt}
L*ti! E
lr#
'{sddfffi
_+&raffi
:!10 5{t ;t!sr0s41:5s
lffi
I tar*
n1:..?,r 1
nFv.e
=
88
Petrel Geophysics
Part B. Removing a Mis-Tie in Setected Lines

Bight-click fhe 2D linesfolder and select lnsert mis_tie
1.
set.
2
3
Choose the 2D lines survey only.

Select the Seismic Time 1 vintage.
Click 0K.
A new set named Mis-tie set 2 is generated and the
Mis-tie manager
opens.
Bemove the tick marks for all lines in the tse column
except slbl and slb2.

Set tick marks in the Lock column for slb1.
E.n **
Co.d.tu
lador
13:
3,
1351
531:
4tl:
2a1l
:ti"--5ij;: - 'ii,
-i;t:
?;--
idb!
sal
7
B.
ve&t
c.rdon
lgr
Use Vertical as the method and click Compute mis{ies.
Make sure Constant is selected and click Gompute.

0bserve that only two entries are present in Ihe Vertical
correction column where the two lines
cross.
9. Vertical correction for slbl is 0 (zero) because this line is

0
locked. Enter -2 0 .
ms infhe Verticctl correction
column for slb 2 (20 ms downward relative to slbl and
)
click Apply.
10. View the result in a 3D window by using the two eye

columns in the Mis-tie manager.
1 1. Compare the two different mis-tie
corrected versions of
slb2 (manually select/clear them by expanding slb2 in the
lnput
pane)"
A mis{ie set is created for the Surveyfolder or subfolder

from which it is inserted. All lines in that folder belonging
to the selected vintage are displayed in the Mis-tie
manager, including all subfolder lines.
Petrel Geophysics
89
Review 0uestions
Why is it important t0 use the correct projection and unit

system?
Can you import different vintages of seismic data with
different SRDs?
ls it important for projects to have the same projection
system when using the Reference project tool?
What are the benefits of cropping and realizing seismic
data?
What are the different types of mis-ties that can be

computed in Petrel?
Summary
ln this module, you learned about:
.
o
.
o
.
.<
setting up a new project

setting project and unit systems
loading 3D and 2D seismic data
importing check-shot data
vL
optimizing data by
.
.
.
cropping
>
realizing
performing a mis-tie analysis.
90 o Projecl Setup and Data Preparatl0n
Petre Geophysics
I
-
2-
Seismic Data
Module
Visualization
will be introduced to the seismic interpretation
ways t0 visualize and display seismic data.
various
interface and
ln this module, you
Learning 0biectives
r:='r
r-a
After completlng this module, you will know how to:
o
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
o
.
.
.
use the seismic interface and toolbar
display 2D and 3D seismic data

set up a seismic disPlaY scale
make and annotate seismic base maps
make and display composite and ump tie lines
use and link multiple windows
use color template and palette optimization
use the Survey manager
use the visualization tools
render volumes in 3D windows
tool
lmmersion mode.
use the Light

use the
Pelrel Geophvsics
Seismic lnterpretation Preparatl0n
'
91
lnterface
Petrel User
The Petrel user interface consists of two main areas, the Display
Lesson 1
window and the Petrel Explorer panes.
Display window: Displays objects. The objects can
different types. You can open any number of windows at the

same time and use window tabs to select them'
Petrel Explorer panes: Contain all data used in the project:
.
.
.
.
.
be
lnput pane: Contains imported and created data.

Models pane: Contains created models
Templates pane: Contains predefined templates'

Results pane: Filters simulation and volumetric results'
Processes pane: Contains a Iist of the available
processes in Petrel in the order ln which they are t0 be
:
->
performed.
.
.
Workflows pane. Contains workflows that you insert from

the lnsert menu and modify using the Workflow editor'
Gases pane: Stores all simulation and volumetric cases'
Windows pane: Stores all used wlndows (30 window'
InterPretation wi ndow).
Favorites pane: Allows you to customize access to the
data and processes in Petrel. lt conslsts of shortcuts to
data (lnput pane and Models pane), processes, windows'
>
>
>
temPlates, workflows, and cases.

These features provide access to the functionallty in the Petrel user
>
interface.
.
.
.
.
.
.
92.
Se smic
lrterpte.arion Preparatior
Toolbar: Dlsplays general tools related to import and

visualization.
Menu bar: Drsplays familiar Windows menu commands, such

as File > 0pen, Edit > Copy, File > Save, and Help >
Manual.
Function toolbar: Displays tools related to the active process in
the Processes Pane.

Object tnformation: Displays information about an Object when
you select that object in the Display window.
Status bar: Displays the status of the last performed action'
Message log: Displays a log of all actions done in a Petrel
session. You can toggle it on and off from the View menu'
Petrel Geophysics
l,
-
L_
rl
tr
tr
1_
r--
l_
L
fl
L
f
f
J-
a-r
--.--{
f
I-<
--
Cases, Workflow, and Windows Panes
information
Seismic InterDretati0n Preparation' 93

Petrel Geophysics
-J
i--.
-_l
t-_l
Geophysics Processes Pane

look at the processes
Before you start t0 visualize the data set, take a
the Processes pane.
and thelr related toolbars under Geophysics in
process actions
When you select a pr0cess, the process toolbar and
that process and
toorui change, depending on the available tool in
you have
*u, tvp. of"wirdo* (20, 30, or lnterpretation window)that
t--
I>
active.
prerequisite steps for the process

A grayed out option indicates that the
with a red circle

nave not been completed. A grayed out option
that utility'
indicates that you do not have a license for
>
4
4
a.
TL
i!
rl$.-
lnpu
L,
ffi Seismic interPreiatian

ffi Volume atlributes
t$ Surfuce aributes
'{ft Autarnatic fuult extraclion
lY1 $,{ake velocitY mndel
,,
i j r {r+::: . f
=.,+,ii iif lr
GeabadY interPretann
Seismic rr,'ell tie
Make restaratian 2D model
ffi
fl
E
t"
$
-;
er
i?
L--'
1t
o
,r
3t
L:
>
{-.
L'
:
1:
E
E
'rr,
:
94
Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparation
F
L.-
rL
I-
L
L
L
l-
J-
J#
Lesson 2
Data
Display Tools or ZD and 3D Seismic
ln this lesson, you wilr rearn about toors that you can
use in petrer to
display and interpret ZD and 3D seismic data.
Seismic lnterpretation Toolbar

The seismic interpretation toolbar provides easy access
to commonry
used interpretation tools. lt is available for 30, 2D, and
lnterpretation
windows. You can turn this toolbar on and off by using the
in the menu bar.
vibw
menu
These are the available toors in their defaurt order of

appearance:
o
'
.
o
a
Active seismic obiect: rndicates the active seismic object.

color scale: Disprays the coror tabre of the active sectin and
allows you t0 c0mpress (symmetrically), rotate, or alter the
opacity.
Fp color table: Flips the color bar.

Reset color table: Besets changes made to the color bar.
Active property template: Shows the property template of
the active section and allows y0u t0 change property
templates.
Toggle wiggle and bitmap: Toggles between two VI/VA/

VAVI displays in the
lnterpretation window.
lt/horizon interpretation: D isp lays the contents
of the active lnterpretation folder in a drop_down list.
Active
fa
Choosing a horizon or fault from the list makes it active.
Create new fault/horizon: AIlows y0u t0 create new faults

and horizons and add them to the active rnterpretationforder.
Toggle on/off all interpretation obiects: Hides or displays
all seismic horizons, faults, and surfaces.
Selected vintage: Lists the vintages available for the current

intersection. You also can select a new vintage.
Apply selected vintage to visible seismi planes: Applies
the selected vintage to all visible intersections.

Reset visible seismic planes to original vintage:
Resets
the vintage of visible intersections to the vintage
that
is
defined for the displayed intersection.
Petrel Geophysics
Sei.- 'rre,p.ert o-
Pepd,or
01.
95
Procedure
1.
Using the Seismic lnterpretation

Toolbar
View > Seismc interpretation
From the menu bar, select
toolbar
YiPH
rlt{
rn ps
Il
I
.,sFEa:L-r
:(
-{
.1,J,
Tir
pi'y'er
ilirlh:
si r"; r:
5::us
ba,-
:r:rlsr
:cr
:c
r: j h
ar
;rii srieet
5.L'.! Ji:;i,.!,trrali-f.,-:,._,\
I:hase'cr
Seisr:rlc
im.
lr..
.a
Li
:EJ
?;{
.jf.r
inteipr*itinn :ofl
learch:r:r:lL,ar
!:lil
l
;r.-
:.
:Ll ::.1!
ir_s.
.,
trie
lrericus pan*
inpr-:; pane
)b
ffi
2
.)
J.
4
tr
jL]tsr
Jrncesles p:ne
prc.i=r:
;5
5hi-: + FE
f:r!-f
f:i+1
irlcdis trnp
Create new faults and horizons.

Select a template for seismic display.
Activate and switch between restorati0n

models.
Activate and swtch between vintages.
.m"....r
Procedure- 0pening and Displaying
a Seismic Line in an
lnterpretation Window
1. From the Window menu, select tnterpretation wndow.
Alternativery, right-crick 0n the
seismi, ruri0, and serect
Create interpretation window.
2.
3.
96 o Seismic
lnre,pret"r,ofi[ffi,
Choose an l-line/X-line from a

3D cube or a ZD line from a
survey folder. lt displays in-the
lnterpretation
window.
&
Select the View mode

to ,ou. seismic data or zoom in/
out using the mouse wheel. Right-clicking
opens a menu with
different options.
r:
Seismic nterpretation Preparatisr'r. 97
4.
From the process toolbal select between
,..,
.to display
the prevrously displayed seismc secti0n.

The top secton 0f the Interpretaton window displays the
intersecting lines. SP and CDP can also be displayed.
&
#
4
4
#
&
4
#
5. Flip the seismic line by using

6.
on the player bar'
Change the color display of a seismic sectlon from the

lnterpretation toolbar.
J!)!:'
L rj:'r-:i
.
L
-,
!1-.wi.*,,w{w-*+'**"-***i*
----- .-'-.'t-i'it'{l
rtt
Click Llr on the Seismic interpretati0n t0olbar to toggle the

wiggle and bitmap display 0n or off
To display the next cross-ltne or in-line, press etther Page Up or
.
Page Down 0n your keyboard. Jump to a particular Iine by

specifying the line numller in the General rntersection player.
Specify the increment that you wish to use t0 jump to the next
cross-line or in-line.
=
)'
*
-:
nr!*..:..
.,.,...,....rr.r:.........r..r.:.:...,rri
i#*.*@@#,#,!.
*. l. I&tisr':d*:'t*:ll
i;,. -"
:-:i
,,
/ tFIl
l,-t
L
I---.
I--.-r
1_
r-_
i-t)
l
I
:,.."1
I
,..,,|
i
l
----
.,]
I
I
rl
.
aa:r1
t..o,l
i
I
-..)
I
'..1
Petrel Geophysics
Seismic lnterpretatl0n Preparatlon
99
>
lnterpretation Window Data Posting

To post wellbores and picks, select the check boxes for the wells that
you wish to post inthe Wells folder and the propertres and tops in the
WellTops folder. A time-depth relationshrp for the well must
be
avarlable before the data can be displayed.

To adjust the
well path appearance, use the Settings dialog box for the
Wellsf older.
To adjust
well posting parameters, use the Settings dialog box for the
ts
respectrve attri butes in lhe We I I attr i b ute s f older.

You can display other objects (such as interpretations, faults, and
surfaces) in the lnterpretation window. Choose them in the Input
pane"
Procedure
1
Posting Data in an Interpretation Window
Display objects from the lnput or Models pane: Horizon

interpretation, Faults, Wellbores (needs a time/depth
relationship), Logs, Well Tops, and 3D grid data (propertres,
-b,
edges).
>
->
>:
Change the display on the Style tab in the Settings dialog box
for each object.

a
J.
ln the Settings dialog box on the Style tab,
lnput settings
subtab for the displayed seismic line, set a distance limit; part
100. Seismlc lnterpretati0f
Preparati0n
Petrei Geophysics
4.
of the wellbore and well tops beyond the llmit are n0t posted.
ln the 3D grid settings subtab, set the display style of the 3D
grrd data.
Settings
t*
for'Xline 580'
3 intersecti*n pl,rne
r,nFy
:.]
Co[*r
Wid$rjsize
_1
Surfaces:
'sS
ir'Jetis:
ffi Seismic:
.(; Palygons:
l-_j epth ntrset
As s-rt*ce
A.s +.,tll
Linost nmn
Style Settings Applied to All Similar Obiects

r']r-l
Clicking ':Q: on the Style tab applies the settrngs to all objects of the
same type that are attached to the same pr0perty template.
Se smic Interpretatlon
Preparatl0n.
t0l
Wiggle Trace
When you display seismrc rntersections in an lnterpretation window,
you have the option to display wiggle traces. You can access this option
on the Seismrc rnterpretation toolbar or from the Style tab in the
Settings dialog box for the seismic interpretation when an
lnterpretation window is actrve.
ffi
$ettins {*r'flnig'
r-t:*
li
ll*
ii
li li':
lilLl
I
It
htrplatl0fl
'n*thrd
ruqn r, Bilin*ar ':':
li
il,
il
I .r:l
Brati,
BilflrBF
,J
=+w
'!q'igglsE -.
r'
----
Bhavr
Fril p0tslnv
h r{r
EBqalJr'
lntr'r ll
iJt
h'lanuai ainr
E.
l,Viggls *nty di*play

102. Seisnrlc lnterpretation
Preparation
Petrel Geophys cs
Lr--{
Laf
L"
La{
rLr1:
-.__1
f-ra
ln the Settings dialog box, you have options to fillthe negative 0r

p0srtive side of the traces, increase the gain (X scale) of the wiggles,
and determine the number 0f traces shown.
Wiggle traces are available 0nly in the lnterpretation, Intersection,

and Well secton windows (synthetic seismograms). Toggle off the
Show bitmap check box t0 remove the voxel display backdrop.
lnterpolation Methods
There are three available interpolation methods.
rJ
r.--a
None: Renders voxels as original values for the bitmap. The

wiggle trace has linear interpolation.
Bilinear. Benders voxels by bilinear interpolation for the
bitmap, honoring the original values. The wiggle trace has
linear interpolation.
Smooth: Benders voxels by squared distance weighting for the
bitmap, smoothing the original values. The wiggle trace is
interpolated by a sync function.
f--
1:
r--
1:
r--
Seismic Display Scale for an lnterpretation Window

Most interpreters want to set a fixed scale for the seismic display
during seismic interpretation. You can select the desired scale in the
Settings dialog box for the lnterpretation window.
1_
r-r
L"
E
l_
r
a--f
t_
L-<
Petre Geophysics
Se
s-
c'^re.preiario^ Drepraro.. 103
Procedure
a Seismic Display Scale for an
- Setting
lnterpretation
Window
This procedure sh.ws you how to have the same display scale
for all
seismic lines in the lnterpretation window.
1.
ln the Windows pane, right-click on the interpretation and

select Show settings.
iffi,n"qr.,..
.ffiat:ffiee
ffi
3D wir,don "
lArr] j
, ,
:c1..
se::
rL.ts
l:+::
I :'
2.
I
'
Seismlc Time I _ ]tine ,!XI
[Tyy T] - mg
>
!.+x
i,T/ Eirhll
hi
r rr- : tnterpreta:ian *inday I
,.
t+
ts
rlcii:ss+ i.-.5.,6:
'i ..::ail r a-..s ,.

.'!.1: rr= ali
'.
=-
Choose the appropriate Xy and Z scale for the trace display.
ffi
Settinqs fsr'lnterprctarlon
I X i'
1'
=
L
=
l'l
,
=
Ymin: .;J.:i..
Tmax: ! :
Unit of
Fight
marorns
r
+
-i
:..
r. 1. L
ri.at l1tii1
104 o Sersmic lnterpretati0n preparation
Petre Geophysics
_l
--r
This frgure shows examples of different display scales for the same
section.
:::-=
!e:phvs cs
Seismic lnterpretat 0f Preparat 0n.105
Procedure
Displaying Seismic Data in a 3D Window
1. From-the Window menu, select 3D window.

2. CIick on the seismic data to be displayed; it is displayed
in the
3D window as a base/location map.

1{.?E: -
ti
il
:li *'
l;l
::tl
r&l
:
.a:
i
I
-;;i."'
L:
rii
ss6ir awse*s
>
I
1 t:r:re, qnrr,t
I
'? ii]er; itr5rrr
l,,r,ir-.n.+ure*;.r,.
h.1r
:!r !1*!
I
'ei..&
i:.:
:
:,4:;d
*.:;erhnltill,rfrltlr
'.,i **
h::1_k'.-;;' .: q-*
:t..&.o*..
" ,l
*I
'':;
>
<G;,
,'"'ir*l.-,,t
trace data, make sure that lnline/Xline is

selected. For a2D line, expand the window and click on the
seismic 2D line"
To display the
_--
106.
Sersmic Interpretati0n Preparation
Petrei Geophysrcs
rL
-r
L
1_
L
=+L;ga-.ir:
I'dl
r--
a--
f-ra
1=;F@;
Lr--
L--I
f
f
-'.l
-LJ
u
l---J
time slrces, right-click on the

3D cube and select the appropriate command from the menu'
To add in-lrnes, cr0ss-lines, and
# Ii:ert inlirtr ir:ter:eiticn

e Ir*rit rr*:llir,* iirt*rreitilr,
S Irrlert tir',e -ilise inttr:**i;'r,
& fi*',, irt*rle*ti!'r Blsnr
f
J'
l-_---J
-J
Se's"r'l c
trle-p etatior o-epa-dti01
'
107
Click
View mode to rotate the view and Z scale to change the
display scale in a 3D window. The seismic color display also

can be changed in a 3D window from the Sersmic
r
nterpretation toolbar.
&iq, ! tt {rSt*
, :,
k*-^.p,"6n.i u*r
'n;, :.' 1-.,...-..,,r,'
=
r.?ft:
::
::r*eA&i
t :r
ll,rr::ri
,.
1t.i:j,J!1.1
>_
108 o Se smic
lfterpretat 0n Preparatl0n
Petrel Geophysics
rL
F
--l
rt
Lr--t
L
f
1_
f
L
f
f
General lntersection Toolbar
rr:
General intersection toolbar is actlvated in a 3D wlndow that has a

3l cube and in-lines and cross-lines displayed. This toolbar provides
::ions to select and manipulate seismic lines'
-ire toolbar also is available for a 2D window with different optrons.

.lse the Clip plane optlons t0 remove posted objects ln front of or
:a.'"0
---l
,r'3u
seismrc drsplays.
als0 can ghosf objects by adjusting the clip offset parameter in the
Settings dialog
r-J
box.
-Jjust the lrne type in the Style tab > Plane settings subtab For
:rample, if you set the clip offset to 50, the objects within 50 project
-r ts (feet
II-J
or meters) of the seismic line are displayed'
tr
r-J
:* *ee#*.&1ff,1
tr
---J
---
1-
Step through volume

PIay through volume
-.--r
Set step/play increment
l,_
->'!
Clip plane
-l
Snap plane position

Select plane position
L---{
---
Selsmic lfterpretat on Preparatl0n
'
109
Displaying Seismic Data in a 2D Window

Window menu, select 2D window and click on a
2D lines survey folder in the lnput pane.
Procedure
1.
2.
-rj
peirel 201:.1 {fi-bi1: alph! -
JNe!r'
From the
0pen a 2D seismrc line from a 2D window by clickng ,'18 in

the process toolbar or (K) and click on the 2D Ilne to be opened
The seismic line appears in the lnterpretation window.
project - Ssmi( lQrultiol
?D
e/i*de
tAny;
':.
i3,
r..
i:
t:
t;
lL
;lj
i:
L
l:r
l"
t.'
1r
l'
i=
i
t;
ir
t_
l'l
t+.
i +..
1...
E
t;
seismic line from a 2D wrndow, click on your 3D

(make
sure that cube is bold).
cube
To open a 3D
4.
ln the toolbal these icons are activated
ffim Click one of
them. A dotted lrne appears on the survey outline.
5.
Double-clrck the dotted line to open the sersmic line in the
lnterpretation window. You also can right-clrck 0n the dotted

line and select Create interpretation window.
110.
Selsm c lnterpretation Preparatlon
Pelre Geo:'
-------_---4
i-
Se,s*
'rLe p,e,a io- P
ep.,.tio-.
lll
Base Maps
Seismic rnterpreters frequently navigate through base maps during an
rnterpretation. ln Petrel, you can use 2D , 3D and Map wrndows to
create and display base maps.
Base Map Annotation in a 2D Window

You can turn on in-line and cross-line annotations for3D volumes in a
Draw everlt n'h inline, every n'h

crossline option on the Style tab in the Settings dialog box, a base
map grid with rn-lines and cross-lines is displayed with the increment
2D wlndow. lf you select Ihe
that you specify.
Ihe kxt evetlt n't' nlne, everl) n't'crosslire option displays the
in-line and cross-line numbers. Change the size of the text with the
Font size option.

Make and display base maps with seismic, well, and culture data in 20,
30, and IVap wrndows. New seismic acquisition plans can be displayed
in the base map as culture data.
tlt drlq
ia'irl
L-
b-
L-
L.-
112.
Seism c
lnterpretati0f Preparat 0n
Petrel Geophysics
rL
l.
r.-J
L'
L'
af-
Procedure
Creating a Base Map

0pen the Settings dialog box of the selsmic survey.
1
2
0n the Style tab, choose the base map annotation parameters

that you wish to display. The Style tab is active in 2D and 3D
windows.
--_
eitings
f*r'IG
:'J,: Shew
lines
ti'dth:
rrsmes
hrpe: !' li:

.jt end:
--ci:rt
iines'
AJ
--
-.--J
ljne
5h,:r
,
:
v trc.
J !ho:r number Tlpe
Shrr tikmrk !ie:
l-nrBvery
---
-.
tri
r:-
:i
Hide lhels mr*nrJing {ont
:
:
5P
:
.i
si:*:
i
i
I I
,li
irl
3[i sei:n'i+
lirr:tti*r
Col+r;
5rer,ifie-.:
i*r'dih:
I
iP [fiP
-1
*!i-
Bsse m,:p nnttisn
t' Drou elreni ill' j TsJl,:\rery '!*11 F,nt ric
iline, E'/E+'
inline. ever
':rosslin*
rr**sline
ilirce,ttin:
Crl*r:
fu sulj*ct
Iilfn
-
Se smic
lterpretat cn Preparat 0n.113
r-G:
Base Map Annotation in a 3D Window

You can display a base map view of 2D seismic lines in
a 3D window.
The 2D lines can be a coror based on the seismic survey

0r vintage. you
also can set the depth of the display (for example, to -1000
ms). setting
the depth is useful for displaying the intersecting 2D seismic line
directly in the 3D window.
You can postthe 2D line names at both ends ofthe intersection
and
show number annotations as trace, Sp or CDp numbers.
There are similar options for posting 3D seismic in 3D windows.
C0iGr:
F!t size:
Shsvrlins
il,
show rumes
Forerery r
i
i'l
l.
't
V..r$hl
Ln
ii.i
SpsciiieC
{pe:
Al ed:
qlid
Sld
L
l!: ,...?
] hownumber
hcwnckmark
tiaie:
Type:
iail
lze:
L-
ilid+ labels exeediag {ont size

L
ts
114. Seisr ..'^terpretoti0..t Prepararior
Petrel Geophysics
b-
---
Selsm
c nterpretati0r
Pre!aratl0n
115
Procedure
Window
1.
2.
Displaying Seismic Line Annotations in a 3D
Display seismlc data in aZD or 3D window.

Open the Settings dialog box and open the Annotation
subtab on the style tab
I
i--
^
+
.L-
3.
ffi
Choose the preferred optons for the annotatons.

Seaing fcr'?D lneC
-L
..,:,1,t:.:-rlili.r:iiii
,L
th
=
Ftrnt se:
Shrw lines
llridrh:
fi
Shov+ names
Al md:
Line
ff
Shawnumb*r
F1 howtirkm*
116.
Seism c Interpretation Preparati0n
pkels
t-
-_
pe
E
rorevery luJ
l-j
tEE:
Tvpe:
Si=e:
Hide label*emeedingfsnt
size
Petrel Geophysics
lr--
The annotations appear in the 3D window
Selsm c
lnterpretatl0f Preparatl0.. 117
<
Lesson 3
-Seismic
you
ln this lesson,
.L*
lntersections
will learn howto create and use differenttypes of
intersections in Petrel. These intersections can be random lines,

polyline intersection, composite lines, and jump tie lines.
---L-
ly
Random lntersections in Petrel
Handom lines and polyline intersections in petrer are any vertical lines
that do notfollowthe full length of an in-line or cross-line. composite
intersections are similal but they can combine various 2D and 3D
seismic data.
_-H
.&._
--<
L.r
.L-
You can convert any intersection or line coming from a seismic cube
(in-line, cross-line, random, composite) into a stand-alone 2D seismic

line by right-clicking the object in the !nput pane and selecting Convert
.-:<
I..
.L-
<
to 2D seismic.
--
.L.
.1r
l,:i'j**
irei
'i:==:rii
Procedure
1.
Working with Random Seismic Lines

Activate a 3D seismic volume in the lnput pane and a Seismic
interpretation in fhe Geophysics folder of the processes
pane.
r #r nrB,
& m tntinE 638
nput
m Xline +H]
i; m =-]?5r
tratigmphy
Gecphysics
ruffi
randomly.
,ffiI.m,Fj lr'6C
hffixrp
rlcl survel
3.
18 o Seismic Interpretation Preparat0n
.-1
-<
_.1
Right-click the seismic volume and select New lntersection
&La z
-z
L-
_l-
lL.E
plane. A vertical intersection is created that you can align
WE
-z
ts
,<l
l--t-
nEert inline !1rrE.iiEn
lneeri rroEsline iniererticn

nsert tinre siice nterEecii*n
f.JErr
inlerserli*n
plane
.<
l-E
.t-
l@W,&]
Click one of these ron,

lro atign it vertrcaily,
north to south, east to west, or horizontally.
Petrel GeophVsics
)-<
-.>.
_--1
l-
>-
Click Maniputate plane Ia , in tne process toolbar and drag

it to a new position. To rotate, press Shift while dragging.
Procedure
Window
Rotating a Random Line in an lnterpretation
You can rotate random lines in an
lnterpretation window. Botating
lines is usefulfor aligning them with well paths.
1. Bight-click
the volume of interest and select prefetch to
cache. This command gives you a smoother rotation.
2. Display the random line in an lnterpretation window.

3. ln the Processes pane under Geophysics, activate the
Seis mic
4.
5.
Click
the
interpretation
process.
#j iron in the process toolbar"
ln the lnterpretation window, click the reft mouse button and

drag the mouse horizontally on the random Iine to rotate it.
Petrel Geophysics
Seismic lnterpretation Preparati0n.
llg
Polyline lntersection
data in a 3D window, you must have an object that is used to
supply X, Y, andZ reference points (for example, TWT). When entering
points for the seismic aligned polyline, the movement of the
cursor is
restricted to either the in-line or cross-line direction. For the arbitrary
polyline, random directions can be digitized.
To create
t,-..-..-.i You can rename

these general intersections
to something more
descriptive.
Polyline intersections are composed of two parts: the polygon trace and
the vertical seismic intersect0n. The polygon trace is stored under the
General intersection object in the lnput pane under the appropriate
seismic volume.
Procedure
1.
Creating a Polyline lntersection
Activate a seismic volume in the lnput pane.
.'/Pro..o"=
iI Lo,:
Strabsraphr
I a Geophysrcs
I }{if:l-.;:r:=:=
2.
i&'.ig
h-: j=[il::1iI "
!..
is,
Display a time slice in a 3D or 2D window and click
or
to create an arbitrary polyline intersection (digitized in

random directions), a seismic aligned polyline intersectlon
(in-line or cross-line directions), or a combination of both.
120. Seismic nterpretati0n preparation
-.-----ilfFn--
Petrel Geophysrcs
Digitize points along a time slice.
Double-click to end. The intersection appears and is stored in

the !nput pane with a polygon describing the path.
.# 7
mislRedizedl
@ fi
[{
@
l_.-- a-
lv:
1
To
tntine 635
XUne 47*
=-
---
, ry m Gemral nter*dior
Fl i-*j rttr*r
tFrbitray polygronl
FGlysDr*
edit the polygon, activate/bold the arbitrary p0lygon
in
lnput pane and the Make/edit polygons process under

Utilities.
J.-l
L-
Click the show points in Polygon
anO
Polygon editing
in the process toolbar.
f
l
Ir---
r---
I.--
Drag and re-draw the orientation 0f the line. The arbitrary

seismic intersectron is updated accordingly.
Selsmlc lnterpretati0n Preparric
121
Procedure
Gombining an Arbitrary Polyline with
Seismically Aligned Segments
1.
2.
Activate he Seismic interpretatiol? process.

If you are using a 3D window, post an object (for example,
trme slice). This is not required in a 2D
3.
4.
5.
window.
\<ll
Click Greate arbitrary polyline intersection

Draw the polygon using the left mouse button. To snap to an
in-line or cross-line direction, hold down the Ctrl key while
.
moving the mouse. The segment is restlcted to the seismic

cube alrgnment.
Double-click when you are finished drawing the polygon.
---,.
The seismic data displays automatically.
Composite Lines
Composite Iines display seismic data where multiple lines (in-lines or
F
J
interpretation.
.EI
)
>-l
^-_l
Procedure
- Building Composite lntersections lrom a 2D
Base Map Window
,l
cross-lines from a 3D cube or 2D lines) are displayed togetherto aid
_l
There are several ways t0 build composite lines. This procedure

describes how to build composite intersections from a 2D base map
window.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
r-#..
tl
6.
:i
t.---...,..-.i
Activate the Seismic interpretation process.

0pen a new 2D window and display all relevant data (for
.Ll
)
-
example, 2D sersmic Iines).
From the function list on the right side of the window, choose
Select composite section
t0] ..
Start clicking in the display window on the various seismlc

sections that you wish to keep in your composition.
To change the selection, press Delete repeatedly to go back
step-by-step.
Double-click the last input to close the selection.
Composite selections
are marked in white.
122. Seismic Interpretati0n Preparation
Petrel Geophysics
"%.-*--h.
Double-click to end the composite.

The component is displayed in the Composite folder in the
lnput
pane.
Corrposie folder
i, i f-l
. $ fliC-p-:ip_-;_i
l-
Composite line'!
line-::
il iE Campasite line 3
u EgrErelrqtste4rylrybi!Iypslysq{{rysl
t!,tsll
Seismic lnterpretatlon Preparatl0n
.,.e--
123
_iia-.-_5t!!l!
:lr:Jri
ii!
ilLrlna! (t:
Eli
4:
rt.4r
---,_?-L-_,,.,,1-._.F-
!i,
5{l
i!:
.w
h::it irr
il3
01
t.?.
j
::j
li,fri
I
:l
:ri,lr-ir:
ol .i, ,l,l',
l:
i
rrll,ie I i!jgii
ti!-]
:lli
itil
124.Se:(-
l,
e p e.a. or o epa o-0.
Petrel Geophysics
Procedure
Building Composite lntersections from an
This procedure describes how to build composite intersections from

an
!nterpretation window
1.
2.
Activate fhe Seismic interpretatior? process.

Open a new lnterpretation window and activate a relevant
2D Iine inside it
l ti,l Corilposie
**ne
Y-, Xl-ne 5e* [mig]

Seismic ?D tine [slb6]
l g
right side of the
Se,'^ L ^ "'p'"r
io
Dpp. io, .l2E
\<
I
-=<
I
<
,L
-a
_-L-
--L-
Where there are rntersecting lines (potenttal compositton

parts), the cursor appears with a black vertical marker line.
lf you are using Compose with crossline (Shift+l) , you can
compose only 2D data with intersecting 3D cross-lines.
To compose wlth valous parts of the crossing line (the part
.L
extendrng away from you or against you), a comblnation of

keyboard inputs is required. To see the full list of available
combrnations, go to the Petrel Help and enter composite lines
on the Search tab. Various clip and extend composite section
possibilities also are described in the Petrel Help.
126. Seismic lnterpretatlon
Preparation
Petr e1 Geophys
rs
I--
a-
f
f
I--
--l
Jumper Composite Section

Ihe Jumper composite section enables you t0 open 2D seismic lines
that are not rntersecting each other. I\4aking a jump correlation is
particularly useful when interpreting for regional evaluations.
r.--
l_"
Procedure
arr--
af
f
L'
1.
f
E
f
f
IL--r
Creating a Jumper Composite Section
Display your 2D seismic lines in a 2D window.
aa*t
Ir---
I-_-j
r--
r-#l
Click Select composite section
urO click on a 2D line
that you wish to include in the jump tie.
-'-
----a
'-.--l
r--
Selsm c
lnterpretati0 Preparation. 127
_.
E-J
.^l
)
--!.
3. Draw Jumper composte section &
is activated. Click
the icon. Thrs gives y0u an option to select either the entlre or
part of the first non-intersecting 2D line.
-',]
-J
-l
-L
,)
--
4.
Select some part of the 2D line by dragging the cursor on it.
>-
.L
.L
i-
-L-
-t-
.L
r-
5.
Click on this line and jump to another non-intersecting line to

whrch you wish to tie the first.
>
128.S";
r L^-rpp-dliot oep"aiol
Petre Geophys cs
Seismlc lnterpretation Preparati0f ''129
=J
Seismic Data Visualization and

Manipulation
Lesson 4
=<
ln this lesson, you will learn about different ways t0 visualize seismic
data and the tools that you can use to make visualization and
manipulation of data easier and more effective.
-J
Windows Tiling
Tiling 30, 2D, and lnterpretation windows is a powerful tool for

interpreting seismic data. You can see the data and rnterpretation
srmultaneously and interactively in all windows. lf the same seismic
line is selected in all windows, line manipulation is interactively
updated in allwindows. You can resize the windows as you wish.
,
--.d
r--J
.L
A cursortracker is available for each window. When the

selected for multiple windows, the cursor location in one window is
dynamically displayed in the other windows. Note that this can have an
rmpact on performance. Seismic lines are automatically linked; you also
cursor is
can link other posted objects.
--
.L
+-_)
-Li
E
Li
@
B
ffi
@
ffi
@
ffi
]E
g
?l *irlev,,
:! r!r,lo*
!r,.ai cq
L--J
LI
!rlac,1
rils:oqram,arrdcrt
::EipiE;aa:cs d;Llcti
l-J
.:-
in:arseciicn lrnrlen,
i/ap*indn
lle: rtrdor
5:e"ecrer,rir.lci.,
thartirq taindcn
WEli se.iir hiNilr,' ..
liy,!:fdr: irlcl ldfr.lc8
lffil
l:n11Crett-;1-
ilrrlisplay aii data
El
,e
!l
-.:t
!j
clrr*t'r:.,1!-l:1
!-'
nt_:o:ai
,e,:.-a
.ts
_-_/
h,
:l
a,-l
lIlJ rsa.!e
I
: il rliidEr,,1 iircLp::"] :.{Jl

I :ir t;irdox:,,.cup:1l ayl
: j.:erpie:a:rc *irc1cr, I lGrtup:l] illtr' - iq
J
- lisrrr.
-iirrE
1-
I:ie 4;
_-l
130. Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparation
Petre Geophyslcs
Dual Screens
lf you have two monitors, you can resize the petrel main window so
that it can be displayed in both monitors, which allows additional
screen space to display data. For details about the recommended
hardware for using Petrel on dual screen setups, contact local support
through the Schlumberger Support Portal at support.slb.com.
Windows to Visual Groups Linking

The option to link windows to visual gr0ups is very useful during
interpretation. lt allows a simultaneous similar display of the data in
different windows.
when objects are posted in one window, they are displayed in the other
linked windows. when you change the display of objects in the active
window the other linked windows are affected.
0bjects posted in multiple windows can have parameters specific to
each window. For example, you can post wellbores in a 3D window
using a pipe and post the same wellbores in a 2D window using a
dashed line. Petrel manages each object in each window
independently.
Petrel Geophysrcs
Seismic Interpretati0n Preparation.
l3l
Procedure
'l-.-.'j
Visual Groups
Linking Windows to
-Windows
pane, open the Settings dialog box for each
1.
ln the
2.
displayed wlndow and select Linlred to visual grolry

Choose Flrst from the drop-down list.
ffi
Settlfis
f*r
'3D !.*fido, 1 aAyl
i-;:::
l{6 r*o .!i:.

i:iU
9::i5.1-=
3D ind6$Name: 3Di
Cclor:
I
Af
*ndo*
ffi
Visual group
'd:
Linkedt0 Ysal gruF
Sssnd
Thnd
FGUrth
Activate 0ne wndow and select an 0bJect in the lnput pane. lt

L
:L
l-
Click
Cursor tracking to
see the cursor position in all
wrndows.
1.,:lr..,
132.
Se smic Interpretatl0n Preparati0
rlr
-4x
,
r,
Petre Geophysics
When objects are posted in one window, they display in the other
lrnked wrndows. A change in the display of objects in the active
wrndow effects the other linked windows.
0bjects posted in multiple windows can have parameters specific to the
wrndow. For example, y0u can post well bores in a 3D wlndow using a
pipe and post the same well bores in a 2D window with a dashed line.
Petrel manages each object in each window independently.
Windows to Coordinate Groups Linking

You can link two 0r more 3D or
lnterpretation windows with a camera
so thatwhen you 200m, pan, and squeeze the objects in one window,
the action is synchronized in the llnked windows. You can display
different objects in each window.

When you click the Camera icon, the names of all of the windows that
are linked together are updated.
Petre Geophysics
Selsmic Interpretation Preparation o 133
lir:**"*:ri
II
'*:r:
I -*i
Procedure
[inking Windows to Coordinate Groups

1. ln the Windows pane,".a-gtivate the window to link.
2. Click Gamera linking tH (0ru or 0FF) in rhe menu bar.
3. Bepeat steps 1 and Z or other windows of the same type.
4.
Activate one window and pan, zoom, and squeeze its seismic
content. 0bserve the other windows
xli
-S
a$!i4*
IL
HL
{i,tw
i@,
-.-..LF**,,._..j:,r.;..
.
+lts
-iJ
-*
4*,
5n$
IL
94.1
JNL
"
$*
ir''e-e
".L?,:, q3,iif,
*
)
L-l
_-J
-j
_]
!
Synchronized Camera Position for 3D Windows

To synchronize
the camera position for several3D windows, y.u must

link the windows by using the camera linking tool. use
this tool to
link two 0r more 3D windows together so that ny mov.m.nts
or
rotations are mirrored in all linked windows. you can display

different
objects in each window.
_l
-J
_l
LJ
134.
Sersmic lf
terpretatlof preparation
Petrel Geophystcs
{h
E-J
Procedure
Windows
1.
Synchronizing a Gamera Position for 3D
ln the toolbar click the Gamera Iinking tool

that the 3D window is active.
.ffij
Make sure
The text (Camera link) appears after the name of the 3D
window.
2.
Actrvate the next 3D window and click Gamera linking.

The windows are now linked and any movement, such as
rotations, is reflected in both windows, simultaneously.
Petre Geophys cs
Seismic lterpretatl0n Preparatl0f
135
E-L
Seismic Ghost Gurve

Use the ghost curve to create a small bitmap of reflectors 0n a seismic
line. You can move the ghost curve area to other parts 0fthe same
sesmic line or other seismrc lines to compare signal patterns and
identify the same horizons across a fault.

When you create a ghost, it is stored inhe lnterpretation window
folder in the Windows pane. The seismic data and the ghost in the
lnterpretation window share the window display.
L
i:
L-.-
-ito,
can have as
many ghosts as you wish,
but it is recommended that

you periodica ly clean up the
ghosts.
L.
lf you click the ghost in the lnterpretation window, the ghost is

activated in the Windows pane. lf you click the seismic data displayed
in the lnterpretation window, lnterpretation 1 under the
I nte rp retati o n wi n d ow f older is activated.
ln practice, this means that you can have different settings for the ghost
and the seismic data in the lnterpretation window. For example, you
can display the ghost with wiggles 0r another attribute while displaying
the seismic data in a conventional mode.

From the Windows pane, you can toggle the ghost on or off, delete the
ghost, and access the settings. When the ghost is bold/activated, you
L-
L-
lL
L
can change the display options for it.
lL
l*
E
b-
F
L
136. Seismlc lnterpretation Preparati0n
Petrei Geophysics
*--
.".
,.
illFF
_*
*-
ar-.
I.
Procedure
1. 0n the
I-..-.-
r_r_-
Greating a Seismic Ghost" Curve

toolbar ctick Seismic Ghost
f}
,-}
.
...:
I--<
1LL--
2.
Draw a rectangle over the seismic line
l3
I\love the mouse

inside the ghost area jn the
-_-
interpretatron window and

click with the right button
The rmage inside the ghost is
updated with the seismic
r.-
I'
beneath it.
f
f
f
--_-
-,__-
r-_-
a.
I---r
--,-
L.
L.
L.
3. Drag the Ghost to the part of the line you wish to correlate.
4. To stretch and squeeze, position the cursor on the edge, then
5.
click and drag.

To rotate, press Ctrl + Shift.
II-
-1
Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparat cn
lntersection Style Settings
r-l:
ii
i.-----l
Working with ZGY

data in Petrel can enhance
visualization and
performance.
The lntersection subtab is similar for SEG-Y and ZGY data; however,
s0me settings are n0t actve for both formats.
These setting are avarlable on the Style tab, lntersection subtab in the
Settings dialog box for the seismic data.
lnterpolation method: Displays the seismic section with

sub-sample appearance. Smooth is the default selection, but
y0u can display intersections without interpolation (to see
seismic sections wrth original sampling interval, blocky display,
l-
or bilinear interpolation).
Enhance intersection resolution: Active for SEG-Y data only.
This option is purely an interpolation of the seismic data set.
There is no added data, but the result gives a smoother looktng

seismic display. Note that texture memory increases, on
low-end computers, this can slow down visualization.

Enable zone and segment fllters for intersections: Works for
seismic volumes that are attached to a 3D grid. This optton
>
allows you t0 use segment/zone filters on the intersection.

Enable bump mapping: Gives an artificial display of the seismic
sections where light and shadows enhance the events so that
lL._
they appear as bumps on intersections.
]L
)>
E
L
]*
r
LL---
138. Seismic lfterpretatl0n
Preparation
Petrel Geoph,
I-
rf
---
Setti*gs far'mig'
f
L-
{r
J-,-t
Styl
:,*'BsEp'annotson
Tl{
a--l
Stnngs re in"eriEd om psrentlotder
--t
Visuslia!in
iilers lqr tntasEciifi
lfl
MBx
EneblE ksparen) for intrssition
rsolution , Full
P erfo rm anc
i.?-.1
ns
hladiunr
Ftsst sssn mpuemeht
DBeimBoh whrle dregging

TimE tD
wsitfor data
']JTI '
Pefe
Geoph\/sics
50jl
Selsmlc lnterpretation Preparation. 139
Settings Dialog Box for 3D Seismic Data in a 3D Window

3D seismic
These optrons are available in the settings dialog box for
data ln a 3D window.
Enable transparency for lntersections: works in conlunctron
the opacity curve found on the Colors tab Typically' the
-d
_!-
i-
with
crossover, 0r zero values, are made (partly) transparent'
.Maxresolution:Controlsthemaximumresolutionusedfor
display.lfmediumresolutionisselected,thehighresolution
seismicdatawillnotdisplay.WhenusedwiththePreJetchto
cacheopfion,amedtumsettrngmeansthatnolevelofdetail
t-.-
atlevel0(highresolution)willdisplay.However,ifthevolume
is used to compute a new one, for example with the Seismic
al
calculatorortheVolumeattributedialogboxes,thenthe
full resolution is used.
smooth
Enable compressed textures: Shows a slightly less
the
seismic display at the lntersection This option compresses
Is
seismic data before lt is sent to the graphics card The
compressionisnotlosslessandshouldnotbeusedfordetalled
many 2D
work. This optron is especially useful when displaylng
L-'
lineslnthe3Dwlndowbecausetheoptronreducesthetexture
[-
memory usage.
you move a
Decimate when dragging intersection: When
on the factor
based
slice
selsmic
the
seismrc slice, decimates
you
browse
lets
factor
that you select. A high decimation
through large volumes by looking at a less mem0ry intensive
!.
level of detall.
when you
Fast scene movement: Maximizes the performance
l>
rotatethescenewhiledisplayingseismicdata-Thisoption
acttvates lhe Time to wait.fbr data conlrol'
Time to wait for data: Controls the time the seismic
->
intersectionisallowedtowaitfordatabeforemovlng0nt0a
L.
new Position.
L_
t*
f40
Petrel Gecp"
.:
Se smic lnterpretation Preparation
-._----.-d
--
ra
l...ir-i
Sttngs are rnhe.iled liom pBrentfoidei
,f^lone
'
i r Eilirar
,6 Smooth
ErihoreiIiertecl4nr5.rilriia]n
Verticat: f -i.
.J
Horiontsl:
li
V,su 3lizarion
Enabl zdne :ind segn*i lritEr:1 i.r{ .rl!:.:iiinr:f

Eneble !rump mappinE
BumF seEle
:t'.
Fast scene movement
De.imatisn while draEging

Time to h'aitfor dat
i.i
0
Seismic nterpreta 0n PreDarat 0n.141
Meta Data Tab and Geometry Tab

The Meta data tab contains the processing details of the seismic
survey in the project" You can specify the details manually.
The Geometry tab displays the geometry parameters of the survey. you
can assign geometry to the survey from another survey using the
Get
from Selected button.
Refer to the Petrel Help for details on the these 0pti0ns.
ffi
Settings far'mlg'
;-'-- --:
:t.-:t
'-:
t::ta:::
i* . ltvF- i&- t"rq
l-*
SEG.Y*lhns
-l-r'
sclr+q.
caro*
operarffi
o_q,",**
-Epuiryl'Ouot,ty'ur|o,to
L O99_r"u, tr.taOuta ,p*iry I Q@trtyilab'xs lercpfe-.,
e*pf*
:Ll
;.,J
il Acquisition aate, lliz:+srji *ur"*ou,

pl'.."j
;FrY::l .
*;;:-"
ir
li
srr"r.
a.trii"
.._..
t/pe
Ful,
qqte ldeoreesl
Stack
. -.- -
iE,
3e" iE
i..i
--ilil
:-
ii
:
[deg.ees]:
'-----.*Steps
Azjmuth
Processins detaits
lr
',
,.
I
I
l:
I
I
il',
L'' l*..
[.oo"i
11
,ll
Srac corected
[!-l'11
l. stu,
lll:.Stdcked
D[.o corcred
l.| _,or,rr
.
NMo.otecied
1\M(
,
l.li i sour
lr
il
li
il
,
i
too
li: qa,
ilil
lr
ii__.,_.*I
E-
I42.
Seismic lnterpretation preparati0n

Petre Geophysics
L
I--r
SEG-Y Settings
l-
L-
f
f
0n the SEG-Y settngs tab for a seismic object, there is a list of the
loading parameters as well as binary and ASCII (EBCDIC) headers for
the file. You cannot edit any 0fthe c0ntent on this tab, buty0u can see
the header of the seismic data that y0u are w0rking on.
-,
&
li&*.@
se*B.r* ri*'
asrl@'.&l*
.@gft*
hI.B
:*'
!s 4a{
r0! rir!
r-. -,t'i, . i..-,!-:sl.ic**ny i **r*uu* ip*u*

i
.*a &r1 ft{is:rtc

rsr
(!6 *flt
rr*!-{ n@wr4Pr[5iE{t
{ *}L{ rr& fr511tn( rf
-,
f
t_
f
l
h3pM
*i
4l
1i
I-
lgy
I--d
shp
$*r sqh&]e
k. h&i
.ry .k
Pds e8t !bt,
r.effidrdturer
3S 4*si ilrrk tude,
ASp&i I idra&
x.ed&* Ydabmd
8)pdn
co#r4d
ndrl@
F*r
Fd'
fru*
&ar6
i
:
Fd*5
u1
{&#lib9{'
!blre{i,i!i,
r
r
:li
c:n
w: !si'r 3!3re p:
",",."-* clfle !i
ElLrprji!
st *ri.r nilra::
r3l sr*
rk !.{e,
i:
l
L--
t*-
If
-=-
II-
L
--1
L
l-
Survey Manager
Use the Survey manager to sort and manage seismc data in Petrel.
You can controlthe parameters for 2D lines as well as 3D volumes,
including the number 0f traces, vintage, file path, and storage type, and
sort and move data into folders.
suruey manager
-1
Mis-tb set 1 28
li
You also can use the Survey manager to visualize data.
Petre Geophys cs
'- a
L.I prto :0, D opo
d .113
laE
jLli s
trE@E
tr
tr
Lryl Lal
t_-__
r_a.J
iH Fi i-rl lld
tr
tr
rin riEl G] l:
trmEn
Ei :.;
ftEi
Show setting dialog for selected seismic

Search for Seismic rn the Survey M
Turn on
/ off the selected
seismic in current window
Toggle visibility of the selected seismic in the current window
Delete the selected seismlc
Clear filter setting
Move selected seismic to another sub-folder

Real ize selected seismic
Vertically shift selected seismic

Set vintage on selected selsmlc
Set template (color table) selected seismic
I
Scan or set mrn and max amplitude on selected seismic
Vertically crop and declmate traces of selected 2D Seismic
Settings for the Survey Manager

Sort by double-clicking on the column name. You can make the columns
wider or narrower by dragging the column boundaries. Click on the top
left corner of the spreadsheet t0 select the entire spreadsheet for
copying.
L.
l-
tt144. Selsmic lnterpretatiof
Preparation
Petrel Geophvs
r:
fl
f
f
I--r
Procedure
Using the Survey Manager to Sort and
Manage Seismic Data
2.
Right-click Seismic main folder and select Survey manager

Click the Select columns to display in Survey manager icon
to control the appearance of the spreadsheet.
J-,4
r_r_-
, id f"!lj
iry;t
i,iil.trl$ iBii$l
i.&l i!{,1 il
Oo@ar fme
lrmpbt
--
rrJ
---
I
1
a
1
---
II=-
-_-
i2a
.Ii-' '*'--'----
i2t
1zz
"ita
i?3
sii
r*;;:x"
"r*:a
;rA
j5
l:i
a,2?
II-
L"
fI-a
1.
#
T
r-
'-,
Gecphysics
Si
.lerflre"'' o"p"":or
o145
Choose columns to display.
Colurn* sefetian
Visible
Nam
I sumev
j
&
..
\linraae
ub folder
Dsmain
TYPe
Template
I Direclion
, #l rnes
# Traces
# amples
ample interual
i Firsi P
i-t
t::i
il
I lt: .l
LasiSP
Fi.sl CDF
Last CDP
lt ".1 X min
r,;-l
lll
,l
il-l xmax
il:' lYmin
,i , Yma
Z min
Zmx
Frmai
File size
Storas
Min amplilude
l"ilax amplifude
traqe lype
Fi palh
l-
Aibute
1i 'lempl'le lk
0risinai CS
esric line idsntier
emeEy line nae

i GEftetry linE
idedilt
r.
t
146. Seismic Interpretation Preparatlon
Petrel Geophysics
If--J
Procedure
Manager
Searching for Seismic Data in the Survey
1. Click Search tool for seismic in the Survey manager to

display the search engine.
2
Enter the complete name 0r a part of a name in the Find what

field. The search engine starts at the top of the Survey
manager and searches for files that match your search

criteria.
Use these options to narrow the search:
o
o
.
o
o
4.
Match case: Takes into account both upper- and lower_

case letters and searches for files that match the case of
your search criteria.
...t..
lli".*-,,ft
t -ff:j
1..,:..'j
;*r
-,
,lL
-- -i
lhe search is valid
only for the items visualized

in the Survey manager.
Therefore, if you apply the
folder filter, then only the

sersmic data within the
visualized folder is included
in the search.
Match whole name. Searches for the full name of the file.
Search up: Starts the search from the bottom of the
Survey manager and searches
up.
Find next: Highlights the next name in the Survey

manager Ist that matches the search criteria.
Select all: Selects all names in the Survey manager that

match the search criteria.
Click Close to close the dialog box.
Data Selection in the Survey Manager

You must select data in the
delete it, 0r move
itto
survey manager before you can display it,
a folder. There are severalways to select ata
for these tasks

To
select only one seismic data file, click on the corresponding
row/line in the Survey manager.

To select several seismic
files simultaneously, select one line

and press Shift, then select another line. All seismic data
between the selections are highlighted.
To select specific files, select one line and press Ctrl, then
select another line. Both selections are highlighted.
To select
all files, click on one of the header columns.
Pe,'el Geophysics
Seisrnrc lnterpretation Preparati0n
147
Realizing Selected Seismic Data in the

Procedure
Survey Manager
1.
Select the seismic data t0 be realized in the Survey
managef
2.
3.
Clrck Realize
seismic data
-
:=
_/
-
_l
._1
Choose the preferred amplitude range and realization
quality in the dialog box that opens. Petrel realizes the

selection rnto a specified folder.
-
.-
_-
Seismic Data Visualization using the Survey Manager

You can select and vlsualize seismic data from the Survey
manager. The sortrng mechanlsms rn the Survey manager make it
,,'-
easier to frnd the relative data and visualize it.
i {"-l
i.f{,:Turn on the selected seismic in the current

window to visualize the selected seismic data in the
Click
active window. Keep rn mlnd that vrsualizrng a large

number of 2D lrnes in the 3D window mrght stress the
-1
graphics card.
Click Turn off the selected seismic in the current
window t0 remove the visualization of the selected
-a
sersmic files in the active window.
':'-
-1
.. j Toggle visible
of the selected seismic in

the current window to lnvert the view for the selected
Click
sersmic data.
Data into Folders
Moving Seismic
and manage seismic data efficiently, you can create and
Procedure
To organrze
move data into subfolders from the Survey manager.
tJ
1. 0pen the Survey manager.

2. Select seismic data an-d.9!_ick Move selected seismic to
You can create
iH,:
subfolders in the survey

folders by right-clicking on
the Surveyfolder and
selecting lnsert new
another sub-folder i--':l
folder. You can drag

seismlc data from lnput
3.
Data into the folders.
148. Seismrc nterpretation
fr*-'
Preparation
,-
E-
.i
A new dialog box opens where you can select a folder to

move the data into. lf no subfolder exists, y0u can create a
new subfolder rn this dialog box.
If a subfolder already exists, click in the parent field for the
Peel Geophts.!
1aL-
selected line in the Surveyfolder t0 select the data io
--
move tnto a Predefined folder.
rr.___-J
---
I*
r_--
a-
Changing the Template for Multiple

Procedure
Entries in the Survey Manager
managef
f
f
f
Click L9$i Set template (color table) on selected
seismic.
Select the appropriate template from the dialog box that
0pens.
4.
Display the seismic data with the new colors.
Color Manipulation
f-r
Most objects in Petrel are tied to a template. A template ts a

comm0n object consrsting of an icon and a color table. This sectl0n
focuses on color manipulation related mainly to seismlc data.
ft
I-.-
,r,-
iV*t
--j
1. Select the objects and drag them lnto the Survey
3.
f
L
When you attach multrple seismic objects to a new template, all

selected objects are updated.
2.
rL-
iilri
All seismic objects in a prolect are attached to color templates that

you can change rn the Settings dialog box for each of the objects.
-l-
I---..
*:1i
ii i:1 it:!
tit
Color Palettes
The defautt color template used for selsmic data in Petrel is the
Sersmrc default template. Positive amplrtudes are displayed rn red
and negattve amplitudes are displayed in blue. By default, Petrel
estrmates the mlnimum and maximum amplitudes for the visualized
se rsmic.
You can modify the colors for the seismic object easily in the Colors
tab rn the Settings dialog box. You also can change the color
templates
rn
Peirel l:eophysics
the Templates Pane.
Seisrnlc nterpretat 0n Preparali0
'
149
\J
_F.
Greating a New Golor Template
Procedure
1. Go to-the Templates pane and expand the Seismic color

fables f older.
ffi
: ffi
1#'rp#y'f[-c.8n-es.1--
y_-
Teun*aeo/;cr
El L:l ri+?i
,t'*,ite &/iie
I il #dr,ffiiri'e I{,re fiers/

I {:-l als,qsrrcl,l.1,i1ib
@[ ease
ffili'-i
Fase&snd
Frsq{re/rcl.
ta,seredsesJ
El
@n
jr
-,',
o,'
@ |1 x*mr*n
&l
il
im
ir
ffi
,M
rM
!M
!M
tM
I ffi
rffi
rM
.. &
i, M
M
)M
l. M
:, ffi
! &
, fil
t, il:
i, ffi
-.1
L.d
{e--qj
Serb*lri ca/!b&/es
srsr?rbfde&ir{J
He.*teae
El n
El l:
J
_F
lr
"4*sraeaa
!-J ,4rrlrac*rg
csltrbde
GerrP.fbslfrrF/a,ss
=-/
Y
{,-e*p*ysrbe/ternplates
Fe&oprlysrba/ter*Pla/es
Fu/fprFeryfFj?lP/ete
l/s/r?e fe,.rrp/EtF
Hre/i tro6te*rp/etEs
LJ
,!
.3&/sgfrrp/sfes
&rbcreti* lrc#logrlenrgJafes
Corapfe$ol:sttsrrP/ele-s
FraslufbrFrrEnlsls
ricrerbprqPedYrP/sts
tar$iolsiacr+propedyfempy'afes
[]icrefafacrtnepreperfyfi-'rlP/'3ies
{r-esrl?ecr?ie felqp/afss
FetsrJelnrsys*rnslbnip/als
l--
ilprSrsffseslprll*rplafps
rbrrerts o#erflelrrplafes
Safrrns
$,fe//see*bnlP"mpdafes
Fepoternpy'atefrlder
E-
E-
r
150.
Sersmic Interpretati0n Preparati0n
Petre Geophysics
L-
2.
Copy and paste the Seismic (default) template. A new

template is added with the name Copy of Seismic (default).
Ses*zir xolartables
Errffi
Resrrt*e**re
;
@;
El I*i
Rean*i,rae{acx,8.o,n
wfiire
blse
"
xe{*ttebtue{ta*s}
l;
J #farf greyr,,vfitre
@; r*ase
'""*'"'
f,j',,.'.
ll .-1 rregeficy
i-; fsrarce{sersj
Eli:
,p
@ Jl lr?Jr
@ fi ,4rerua*bn
&
11 ,4rrrracrllg
El
!:
i:
Srfeez a#r:buE
q"jy siqsEryEi:{cf"y!{.
lmport and Export of Color Templates

To import color templates, right-click the Sersmic color tables
folder in the Templates pane and select lmport (on selection).
Export color templates in the same way as any object and select the
correct format.
Color lnterpolation Models

The continuous color table in Petrel has different settings for color
interpolation of the color scale. ln general, the HSV(Max)
interpolation setting gives a color scale with a maximum number of

colors. The HSV(Min) and BGB settings give two slightly different
color scales with a minimum number of colors between the
maximum and minimum colors that you select.
For more information, refer to the
Petrel
Help.
Seismic interpretat on Preparat 0n
151
-_i-
io**G
rc
Procedure
Editing Color Palettes
1. From-the Templates pane, double-click
the template Copy
of Seismic (default)and g0 to lnfo tab in Settings dialog

box to edit the palette name.
tt
-*
_
ar
Settings for 'Copy of Seismic {defult}'
-:to the Golors tab to edit the colors.
Go
Click
J.
flf
fL
and drag it to change the balance of the palette
Semngs tcr'Btack Yeilcrs Red":'!,,:.
I
I
^
-<
L-
--.
Max
ffi
ll
-r-'-'r
LI]14]
mi
l
tH)t
LE]I
HSv{Max}
f,::l
L.I
i-: Hsvluin
,l nce
L]
i_ii
l"il
Lnrphssrze
lfi
llr;li
olor interpolaiion:
,*
---r
l''i(
Hon linear gradient
- '-" -
Mi
ffil
:t:
-L-
L-
LI-]i
\,!--
:::jl
,{rr Irllil
in
E-
i{
0paci 4
152 o Seismic Interpretation Preparation
rz
l-
_l-
l"li
ftl
Irlil
t{,...'...'.,'}
_L-
f{-,ieqsJ
t_.
ttH
l*l:le..'.,j
Petrel Geophysics
t-
L
r_---
Go
to lnfo tab in the seismic cube Settings dialog box to
change the template.
r_-.
L'
r_-
L-
L
I--.
dJ
Eleletiengener8l
GEnetsltime
-Thickoss depth
Tvf :re vettcal thickess
TsT -rre sttEttgrsphtc thEkness
rhrknessltnle
I-_-
l-
j
zI
r_-
a_-
f
f
I.
lhrrkness ?en+rsl
Brownwhiteblu
Red uhrle biu-. ltransl
Elsrk qy wh ie
Phase
PhEs frr8rsl
Il
:I
L_......
J+ riequflfil
Varisnce {seis}
I
ll
Aimlrh
AttEnL,tlcn
31
AntirsckinE
I__
Lt_
3l
g
up
SuBrenttribut
Jii.it i;al il;t !!r!-;li;

DJ lessuC,iepth
Drstnce
I-
f
f
L.
f
df
. i:r:irlra aai;it liiit!

lI Seisnric fCelsutri
tl Reawhitsniue
3I Recwhrtebtack
-1
--,--
--1
--,-
f.
aa-l
--1
Color Tables
You can apply the color manipulation from the settings
of a2D
seismic line to other lines. choose 0ne 0f three levels of

c0lor tables
in the Colors tab.
o
.
Local: changes are appried 0nry t0 the specific seismic rine.

Survey and vintage: Changes are applied to all objects
that
belong to the assigned vintage and use the same template.
Other objects that use the same template but are assigned
to other vintages are not affected.

Petrel Geophysics
Seismic lnterpretati0n Prefrarat
0n.
,l53
-J
l,-J
I-l
^
Global: Changes affect all objects that use the same

template regardless of the vintage.
Change Local and Vintage tables on the Colors tab; change the
Global table on the lnfo tab.
LJ
_l
-J
h*
:l
i* #!"r"r*t
L.
:J
t
:J
L.,.r
:l^l
Y-a
t--J
Golors Tabs
To specify
the color settings for a specific object, toggle on the
Override global property template check box on the Colors tab

forthe object. lfthis check box is toggled off, the settings are
inherited from the global property template.
:J
t-r
_^-l
.d
0n the Colors tab, you can modify the colors, the scale, and the
opacity level curve. When you click Apply, the 0pacity tab and the
displayed windows are updated accordingly.
The color interpolation methods are described in the Petrel Help.
^J
l--J
l-.J
J
154.
Se smic InterpreLat 0n Prepa,al 0n
P..t*l
G.".hr*
1--d
-l
-l
I--J
f-
E
-{3
7rF
r--J
f
I_f
f
:s 789;6
-r -,li ir;l-
-L-J
6n&
5S&-
n
E
f,
d0fr
*3,rF
!r*J
--___r
f
f
f
Ir,__r
--J
-----)
Add/remove colors
Change color interpolation
method.
Update (min, max) values.
Make discrete intervals.
Define opacity level curve
=
=
=
Se sm c lnterpretatt0n
Preparati0f.'155
f
I
I
..
0pacity Tab
Any change that you make in the Opacity tab is immediately
applied in the displayed window and in the Golors tab. You do not
need to click Apply.
:.J
lL-
:J
:l-J
5.,
L.
^l
i--
L.-)
lr'J
-)
t-a
^l
t.
^-l
L-f
:-l
l-J
_l
k-+ry-..l lff[...--.] faqr,l'q',-l
Er
_l
t
156. Seismic lfterpretati0n
I
i
ff-.,..-
Preparation
Petrel Geophysics
_
F.r
L.
Visualization Tools
r this lesson, you will learn about the visualization tools that
Lesson 5
you
can use to display seismic data in Petrel.
Volume Rendering
Volume rendering is a srmultaneous display of all data withrn the
seismic volume. Making the volume partly opaque and partly
rransparent allows you to identify hidden structural and depositional
f eatures. Depending on the size of the seismic cube and the
tiii
computer BAN/, it is a good idea to use a cropped volume forthrs
data.
:.
---..--i Volume renderinq is
possible only for ZGY data
format cubes. This format

allows you to render large
TOCESS.
Select the Volume render check box to activate the volume

renderrng feature and toggle on the volume in the Input pane.
Ilte View aligned s/ices
optton gives the best results wtth large
data, because of rssues with oraphics cards.
reire
Geophys cs
Seisrn
fterpretatr0n Preparat of .157
fr,*-i
if: S
ii;
i.,::,,irt:l,i
Using Volume Rendering
Procedure
1. 0pen-a 3D window and select the realized 3D cube in the

lnput
pane.
!:f
2.
ffi . i mis {Realieed}
ln the cube Settings dialog box 0n the Golors or Opacty
tab, draw the oPacitY curve.
Colrr itrpolaD:
a I Hsvihaxl
.' HSv ir,finl
, RG
i-t
i N0n lnear sradiilr
l_s_l
rJ
H
la
_l
tca
lFl
r;I
l-/ I
m
,8
1:I
F.
r-:l
l:E
iltl-'l
lLli
,;1'r#*'j
158. \e s-,1 ,..e p
t-
prr 0't Preoarati0r
aG*i
,-l
Petrel Geophystr:
1aaa"
----1
Setings 1*:'miq ea1.fld1
t'
-^---1
-.--------
-.-----{
r_r_-'----
-*-.
E--
-,-;
0n the Style tab, Volume visuallzatlon subtab, select

Volume render to drsplay amplitudes specified in the
opacity curve.
Petrel GeophVslcs
Seismlc nterpretali0n Precaratio. 159
;
r. !nt+me*tien
it't
lffi
Yalumevisualizeti+n
ry,lsi
Volume walls
:, I Nsrmal
(,lnsrdP
.'jd l Enable transpar*ncy for
r*ralls
j#; Vclume rend*r
' D"t
1*
align*d slices
i',,
\iEw aligned sliss
Ii
l,lunrber of slic*s for entir+ seismic rolume
I Hide franre,ianntali*n in vierting
;
-1
^,-
mlde
:.
)
-l
--
]
>_J
F-
-l
]
t-.
Volume Wall 0ptions

0n the Volume visualization tab, y.u have these two .pti.ns
f,r
displaying the volume walls:
o
o
Normal. Displays the walls of the cube in a seismlc

box.
lnside: Displays the walls with a view of the volume
from
the inside.
You can use transparency f0r v0lume walls by toggling
on the
Enable transparency.for walls check box and editig the opacity

160. Seismic lnterpretati0n preparati0n
ryry1ofl@jg!j{
pa c
ity
ta bs
Petrel Geophysirs
]
!*_a
I
_l
I
t-{
t--a
t_-l
.I-l
a
a
a
Procedure
',
Displaying Votume Walls

Open the 3D window and toggle on the
realized
in the
--
--l
a'
lnput
ZGy cube
pane.
i*
X ffi
mis {Beetie.di
ln 3D Seismic Volume Settings dialog

box, on the Style
tab, Volume visualization subtab, toggle on
Volume
walls and set the method to Normal or Inside
--
rr'-*
aa"
ffi
Volume walls
-,---J
rj
I---t
l.,lormal
',.-i
lnsde
Eneble tmnspareneyfor xalls
lrate *iigned s!i+e*
Ualume render
I.-.1
E--
!i*lq lii*d *ijt*t

,--
lfl
I tlul,*r
r,t -l:*-+
ftr r:iire s*ismic v*l;:l*
Hidefnme.,,annntatinn in riemno mode
r_-
E
--
T
T
T
-=
Seismic lnterpretatt0n preparation.
i6l
.:J
^*.
Light Tool
Visualization of structural and stratigraphic information is one of the
key elements in an interpretation workflow. Visualizati0n allows you
to identify 0nly what you are capable of distinguishing.
This is particularly true for geophysical interpretation that relles on
illumination and reflectance. Seismic data can reveal such structural
orientations by employing shaded relief techniques that can help to
enhance geologtc understanding.
Shading or better illumination is controlled by lighting p0sition, the
illumination model, and the surface reflectance that acts as a
directional filter. Features that are illuminated perpendicular to the

light source vector will be enhanced, whereas features that are
parallel to it would be illuminated minimally.
Noise removal using structurally oriented light sources creates
volume that can be interpreted more consistently because an
interpreter can focus on particular feature orientations while
suppressing the response found in displays that use only one

headlight.
The Lighttool has an easy-to-use dialog boxthat is available in 2D
and 3D windows and in lmmersion mode. lt allows you to add and
manipulate light sources to enhance geological features.

These light s0urces can have different colors and y0u can move
them by varying the elevations and the azimuth, which allows the
interpreter to illuminate and focus on particular structural or

stratigraphic elements of interest.
You can use the Light tool in many scenarios including:
.
.
o
o
-ar]
-J
:.J
i.--J
_l
_l
_l
t--J
-J
L..J
-l
t---J
_t
l----
:l
-l
I*-
t-J
seismic amplitudes
volume attributes applied on seismic data
gridded surfaces
geobodies.
_t
i-
_l
F_J
152. Seismic lnterpretation
Preparat on
Petrei Geophvsics
-l
-J
a---
---.
Petrel Geophysics
Seismic lterpretarr0n Preparatiof
163
l
:ll
.-J
Applications of the Light Tool

You can insert directional lights into a 2D or 3D canvas wrth varable
colors. You can move these lrght sources byvarying the elevation as
well as the azimuth. This frgure shows the main controls of the
Light tool.
Angle
tra.k
--
{G30 degreesl
L-J
-l
-J
h,J
>-
-l
E--
Tcggle
burnp
mapplng
oggle
Add
rsht
Rergr'e
ltsftt
The diagram in the figure depicts the way the light sources are
added into the display" Assume that the seismic intersection (the
r
.)
i--
subject that is exposed to rlluminatron) is at the center of a sphere

and a light source is at p0int B which can be expressed ln either
Euclidran (x,y,z) or polar (,0) c00rdinates.
t--J
=l
-l
l--{
-_l
l:t
l*J
l'--J
-l
=-.
164. qe smi.
lr lprpretdl o1 Prepardl
0r
Petrel Geophysics
_t
-l
Procedure
- Using the light Tool

1. Click Show lighuoot.
A floating dialog box opens in the 2D or 3D window.

Use these controls to change the lighting effects:
Toggle Bump Mapping. Enables and disables bump

mapping on the 2D seismic data.
Toggle Headlight: Enables and dlsables the headlight,
which is the initial lighting source 0n the seismic
.
.
image.
Add/Hemove light source. Adds up to seven light

sources to the window.
Collapse/Expand light tool: Minimizes rhe display of the
light tool by hiding settngs and displaying only the
angle and elevation tracks.
Petrel Geophysics
Seismic lnterpretation Preparatl0n
. l65
--..l
+]
Light Tool Examples

This figure illustrates the directional behavior of the two light
sources in vector form. The elevation and azlmuth are defined in
polar coordinates; the saturation and intensrty are editable after
adding the source to the window and are used to define the sources
J
-)
:-.,1
in the scene.
_-.]
_l
_j
b..J
>-
.EJ
--.,1
1
i---J
_l
t--.
--l
lt-J
-_l
i"--
_l
:
E-J
__l
=-
166. Selsmic Interpretatlon
Preparation
Petre Geophysics
-_l
Immersion Mode
lmmersion mode allows interpreters to experience the feeling of
rvorking virtually inside the data, delivering high visualquality in a
ful l-screen environment.
Using lmmersion mode, you can create 3D reconnaissance
workflows of seismic data. lnteractive tools for seismic

interpretation and attributes display in real{ime. You also can use
the Flyer tool to navigate through and understand the seismic
volume with functionalities customized for the interpreters.
Petre Geophysrcs
Se smic Interpretation
Preparation. 167
---
_l
bJ
_t
-l
l:l
:l
>
-l
-l
f--l
lj
the lmmersion Mode
Starting
1. Activate a 3D window and display a setsmic cube'
2. ln the lnput pane, right-click on the seismic cube and
I .--. :,i
..1
!:lli:ij
Procedure
.'::
select lmmersion.
3. The flrst time that you access the lmmersion
mode' you are
prompted t0 enter the lmmersron activation code' for

set
example, morpheus. Enter this code and' optionally'
the SLB-PETREL-l MMEBSI 0 N-PASSWORD environment
4.
variable 0n y0ur c0mputer. The activation dialog box will

n0t appear when thls variable is set to the correct code'
ln the active 3D window, display the seismic cube
,
LI
)
t-J
=
4
E-
-E
elements(in-line,cross-line,tnterpretation)tobevisualized
5.
in lmmersion mode.
Click Exit to end the lmmersion mode session'
=E
Petrel GeoPhYstcs
168. Seismic lnterpretation
Preparati0n
al
al
a
a:
r-{
lmmersion Mode Available Tools

You can access these tools in lmmersion Mode.
---{
E--{
-r
E
E
tr m
tr K
tr m
Adds a new seismic horizon
lnteractive change of template
Efficient navigation through the

volume
nteractive seismic attributes
list for the activated volume
Horizon Autotrack interpretation
in lmmersion mode
Petre Geophvsics
Seismic lnterpretation Preparation. 169
r--o
<l
Exercises
r-J
Visualizing Seismic Data
wiil get hands-on experience with using the

visualization tools discussed in this module.
Exercise Workflow
.
.
.
.
.
o
o
Manipulate colors f rom the Seismic interpretation toolbar.

Manipulate selsmic lines in an lnterpretation window.
Explore the settings of an Interpretation window.
Modify the seismic data display (wiggle display).
Set the display scale for the lnterpretation window
Manipulate seismic lines in 2D and 3D windows.
Display a base map and annotations in 3D and 2D
windows.
Create random intersections.
Create composite lines in 3D and lnterpretation windows.

Create a Jump tie section.
Display multiple seismic views on the same screen.

Link
Interpretation
or 3D windows to coordinate gr0ups
(optiona l).
a
Use a seismic ghost curve.
Modify the seismrc data display.

Use the Survey manager.
Edit and create color palettes.
lmport and export color palettes.
Bender a seismic volume.
Display volume walls.
y-
_-.r'
_.-
--
L.l
r-.ra
..]
,-t
,,--.
-_l
--
.]
Manipulating Golors from the Seismic lnterpretation

Toolbar
r=J
-]
ln this exercise, you learn how to manipulate the seismic color
display from the Seismic interpretation toolbar. You can complete

this exercise in either a 3D or an lnterpretation window.
1
2.
Display or activate a seismic line (in-line, cross-line, or 2D

line) in a 3D or lnterpretation window. Notice that the
interface has been updated with a qulck access to the
_J
-J
Seismic interpretation toolbar.
0pen or reopen the toolbar. Go to the View menu and
_t
F-
select Seismic interpretation toolbar.

170. Seismic lnterpretatlon Preparatl0n
_..
_t
Petre Geophysics
!.
Move the handles on the color slider bar and see the effect
The color table is compressed
4.
5.
6.
7
symmetrically
Right-click the color table. The opacity curve opens.
Modify the opacity curve in the same way as if you were
using the 0pacity tab in the Settings dralog box.
Click Reset color table to go back to the default settings.
Change the color palette. Click the small arrow next to the
color palette name and select Black grey white and other
q_ol gl...g-pll
e d ro p-d own m e n u
J,h
9!
a+-
{gq.
J I Seismic (de'auh)
B.
lnsert a new fault and horizon from the toolbar. They

a
ppea r in
fhe I nte r p retati o n f older.
9. Take few minutes to familiarize yourself with the other

functionalities of the Seismic interpretation toolbar.
Manipulating Seismic Lines in an lnterpretation

Window
lnterpretation window in Petrel to display the seismic
section and interpret it. Although y0u can display and interpret the
seismic data in a 3D window, the lnterpretation window is mainly
Use the
where most of the horizon picking and fault interpretation work is

done.
The goal of this exercise is to famlliarize you with displaying and
manipulating seismic data in the lnterpretation window.
1.
Use one of these methods t0 open an
lnterpretation
window:
Select New interpretation
window
under
Window
in the main menu and select a seismic line to be
displayed in the window.

Right-click on a seismic line and select Greate
interpretation window.
Seismlc lnterpretation Preparati0n. 171
ffi^%.
Jt--
-l
-..J
L.J
r S iil
@
mig fRealkedl
i-l
lntine S?2
Hvtff,ffi
k Z=-1440 i_!, Sn.'rv seri"gs .
LJ
3. l"renl:+;:inqs...
lxporl,,.
gii
{:tri+
Edit iocat crior taLrle, .
L.r
( eie{e...
!-1,,:lt1:::::
Assrgn n'retcn
-)
L.J
-l
CrEsig hlerpf EtatiD! wrnlqw
Creae intersec:isn Bitlo\s
acnuert in :D erternal SEGI
I
L.
Press Shift + Ctrl and left-click to z00m in on the seismic
line. Moving y0ur m0use in this position allows different

horizontal and vertical scales for seismic display.
Left-click to pan. Use the scr0ll bars 0n the right side and
0n the bottom of the window t0 200m, pan, and stretch/
squeeze the data.
Pan the data. Press and hold the white area 0f the scroll
bar in the Iower part 0r 0n the right side of your window.
Drag the window by right-clicking (cursor becomes a hand
L-
--J
L-
1l-a
--L
\\\\
sYmbol
-/
,Yt
).
Zoom in on the seismic section.
a.
Click Magnify (Z)
ia,
on the process t00lbar t0 z00m
_-
in on the seismic section.
b.
when zooming.
c.
Take a moment t0 try the other display icons:
View all in
vewport & , ft viewport to width ffi , ft viewport

to height ffi , and Pan viewport to c:,lt-el ffi
B
L.r
Left-click and hold the left m0use button on the seismic

data and drag the mouse. The square indicates the
area t0 z00m n 0n.
Press Shift + Z to unzoom.
Use the mouse wheel t0 target z00m and unzoom. Hold the
mouse Over the area that you wish to zoom in or out and
scroll the wheel. The cursor positi0n is the center point
Traverse a line by using the
player
or the PgUp and PgDn keys. Select;"-19
Fa
I
L-
- : as Plane step
E-
increment.
172. Seismic lnterpretation Preparati0n
Petrel Geophysics
PgUp and pgDn keys, the window

and the seismic
line must be active (bold).
To use
9.
Display a previous
section 0r move back and forth

between
the section and the data that y0u
are viewing by using
Redisplay previous intersection
intersection .ffi-ffi
or.
i in
Oirf try
rr*,
the process actios toolbar.

The location of any crossing lines,
incf uOing 20, 3D, and
any arbitrary Iines, are indicated
with a triJngle directly
above the seismic line_ The names
of tfre ciossing lines are
displayed above the triangle(s)
at the top ot1f.,. *nUo*.
slb6
IL
6S
XL
47
618
470
827
4r0
l*line 632
636
47CI
lnline 651
045
47S
654
47
-1il
Display an in-line in the tnterpretation

window.
Drag the triangle (representing
tne crossinl iine) to another
location.
12
13
Click the triangle to visualize the

crossing line.
Note that both the tnterpretation
windo"w and the lnput
pane, as well as any other
active windows, are updated
with the new lines.
Flip the disptayed line 180 degrees
b-y,clicking
Atign
camera with plane/flip window

-E_ in the status
bar.
Exploring the settings of the rnterpretation

window
1. ln the Windows pane, identify t'he active lnterpretation
2.
window displayed in bold text. For

example, tnterpretation
window l.
Expand the active lnterpretation
window and the
subfolder I nterpretation l.
Petrel Geophysics
g 5mi6 rgpa,i6"
r,*"o0, .173
L<
3. Toggle on different options. For example.

a. 0pen the Settings dralog box for Grid lines and go to
L.J
the Style tab.

Change the appearance of the lines. Use size 1 0 black
crosses and modify the other parameters.
0bserve how the grid lines are displayed in the
b.
lnterpretation
=!-
wi ndow.
ultuxom
---'-:;;;*,
Lr
"ffiififfi
, ffi L* ltrFrtisn I
I
L..
i.-l .****c,q'*e*g
i itl d
'"3
i5 -j dsbe
i&:-.: s*xer
::iiJ r-: $e*e ur
, m ,,i{ }* **ndc* t prry}

:,
-<
L
j }Bur"d*.*r 1 [kryi
Modifying the Seismic Data Display (Wiggle Display)
You can alter the display of seismic data in various ways, depending
on which display window y0u are using. ln this exerclse, you will
display the wiggle data in the lnterpretation window.
1. Use the active lnterpretation

2.
Senrngs tor'mig lRealizedl
ir':'l. None ,
l!a.l illnesr
Bilinear
.-.'-
Brtmp
l:-,
and open
tab.
the
'1
,;',1
r.
-.:
snrootl
snom
u
!;E
lj
11
Show
Wiggles
--
"
iil
srow
!]
Filtpositve
l-l
Fill neqaiive
lnteryali
B-i Manual gain
174. Seismic lnterpretation Preparation
I
-L
window with a seismic Iine
from mig [Realized] 1 activated and displayed"

0pen the Settings dialog box for mig IRealized]
L-a
L
Petre GeophVScs
3.
For
the Wiggles 0pti0n, toggle on Show and click Apply to
see the changes.
4. Change lnterval to 2 in the drop-down list.

5. Under Bitmap, toggle off Show and click Apply
6. Under Wiggles, toggle on Manual gain, enfer s
de,
and
click Apply.
1.
Under Bitmap, toggle on Show.
Under Wiggles, toggle off Show.
Click Apply.
10
1l
Cllck several times on .ffi in the Seismic interpretatlon

toolbar and observe that it alternates between displays in
the lnterpretation window.
Try the different interpolation meth0ds with and without
wiggles dlsplayed.
12. 0pen a 3D window.
1.)
tJ. Display an in-line and cross-line from the seismic volume
mig [Realized]
14
1.
0pen the Settings dialog box for the volume (lf lt has been
closed).
15
Observe that the Style tab has changed, accordrng to the
actrve window.
Setting a Display Scale for the lnterpretation Window

ln this exercise, y0u set up a display scale for the seismic section ln
the lnterpretation window. This is required mostly when you wish

to focus on particular geological features during interpretation and
have a uniform seismic display scale.
'1.
2.
Display a seismic line from mig [Realized] 1.

ln the Windows pane, expand the active lnterpretation
window.
3.
Bight-click on lnterpretation 1 and select Show settings.
Petrel Geophysrcs
Seismic nterpretation Preparati0n. 175
r-
4.
L.
0n the Settings tab:
a.
b.
Select XY scale from the drop-down list or enter the

scale value that you wish to display. Do the same for
Z-scale.
Toggle onlhe Fixed check box if you want to lock the
display setting. ln this case, all subsequent lines will
be displayed 0n your specified scale. Otherwise, the
scale will be changed when you zoom in and out on the
seismic data manually.
:lJ
Settings for'lnterpretit0n 1.
L.
- -
:l
:l
:)L.
h-
CoordinaEs
fi x*in, li:l:l-..-_. t v*i", i':r*.ii- ., r

illxmar li#rti.,. .l [1 v*o l*ri]ri --
:)hY
:-)
-l
-l
L
LI
Manipulating Seismic Lines in 2D and 3D Windows

The goal of this exercise is to demonstrate how you can manipulate
and display seismic data in 2D and 3D windows.
1. Open a new window from the Window menu 0r actvate
2.
3.
one from the
Windows
lnput pane, toggle
slb2,
and
176 o Seismic lnterpretatl0n Preparation
on the check boxes for s/b1,
slb7.
, in front of it.
a.
Expand
b.
Toggle off the Seismic 2D line check box.
# i:
slbl
c.
by clicking
lr.J
Display the position of a 2D line:
:J
LJ
tb1
S ll
4.
pane.
ln the
v
v.J
Seismic 2D line
Alternatively, toggle on lhe 2D /rnes folder.
Toggle on mig [Realized] 1 to display the outline of the

Petrel GeophVsics
:lr-
.-
Lr
se,srntc v0lume
a
3.
--J
I.._.-
a:
-.--l
aa'aI-_f
L..
!=
Click the outline to display the default in_line,

cr0ss_line,
and time slice for the 3D cube.
Display a random line by right-clicking mig

IBealized] 1 in
ihe lnput pane and selecting New inlersection

plane.
Bepeat this step to insert multiple random
Iines.
,*"ffi,
'&
"
'
*.
f, *,
---l
---l
7---t
Click Manipulate
in the process t0olbar t0
and use the player bar to move the active in_line.
to 15,
&J*e*&*gttr:l
plane
Activate Manipulate
and the 3D window.
Use the PgUp and pgDn keys to move the
active in_line.
Notice that the in-line numbering under mig
[Realized] 1 in
the lnput pane changes.
1 1. Activate the random line.
12 Set the Plane step increment for the specified line. (For
10
--
--r
IL--
---/
plane
poston in the 3D window.

Toggle on an in-line (select it in the petrelexpl0rerso
the
name becomes bold), set the plane step increment
m.ve any in-lines, cr.ss_lnes, 0r rand.m lines to

an.ther
I---...l
E
I
lnlne 632 f :.s*.r.-rr:n,n:a,5cr:.rfa

Xline4TB $S lr,s*-i .rs,:iin* i:*rser:irn
z='144 .$ :nser:,,-*,i.*,r;;,".
h ruauo i;rtemreiinn pian*,
13.
example, enter B).

Use the player t0 move the random line.
15.
Activate Maniputate ptane

Click the random line in the 3D window to
drag it to
another location.
r4
16.
Press and hold Shift or Ctrland the left

m0use button to
rotate the random Iine in the 3D window. Helease
the
key
before repositioning the line again.
17.
Use
Manipulate
another location.
18. Display line
plane
to drag the time slice to
or time annotations by selecting options

in the
Style tab > Annotation subtab in the Settings

dialog box
of your cube.
1
9.
0pen a 2D window and repeat Step 2 to

Step
the same process works in a 2D window.
to see how
-elrel Geophysics
Se.. c "'",o,eta o,
orapo.,o, o777
74:
-
20. Toggle on the Timeslice
(make the name bold in the
lnput
pane) and use the player to move through the data.
Displaying Base Maps and Annotations in 3D Windows

Base maps are integral parts of any seismic interpretation project.
Effectrve base map display and annotatrons help y0u t0 efficrently

navigate the seismic data and effectively present your work.
ln this exercise, you
will display and annotate the sersmic
base
.<
maps in 3D windows
1. 0pen a new 3D window from the Window menu.

2. ln the Input pane, double-click the 2D lines folder to
,-.J
access the Settings dialog box.
3.
0n the Style tab > 2D line annotation subtab, make sure

lhe Basemap sQle and Z level check boxes are toggled
0n.
4.
5.
6.
1
700 . 0 and click 0K.

ln the lnput pane, toggle on 2D lines to display the 2D
ln the Z levelfield, enter
lines in the active 3D window.

Display the outline of the 3D sersmic volume
mig IRealized] 1.
Check the depth of the 2D Iines compared to the 3D volume
mig
Activate and deactivate the display of 2D lines in the 3D

window:
Activate he Seismic interpretation process under
Geophysics in the Processes pane.
a.
b.
Click Select line to display in current or last 3D/
!nterpretation window:G from the Function toolbar
c.
1
!-
<
and click one of the 2D seismic lines.

Click again to deactiva[e.
Double-click |he 3D seismic folder to access the Settings
__
dialog box.
10. Go to the Style tab. Note that the 3D seismic annotation
subtab is active.
rl
11
,l
Change options to draw every 50 in-lrnes and annotate
with the same interval of in-lines.

Clrck Apply.
_l
Display the time values in the 3D window:
178. Seismic nterpretati0n
Preparatl0n
Petrel Geophyslcs
-.]
-l
ag
aaaaE--{
--l
rr--J
f
f
f
I-d
T-
ff
f
a--r
*r-
Click
Apply
ln this exercise, you willdisplay and annotate the seismic base

maps in 2D windows.
Open a new 2D window from the Window menu. The

other windows are now in the background. you can access
them again in the Window menu or in the Windows
pane.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I--
--.
C.
Displaying Base Maps and Annotations in 2D Windows
-.-_J
-.-.
Double-click mig IRealized]1.

0n the Style tab > Annotation subtab, toggle on
Show and select f rom the annotate 0ptions.
6
.
Toggle on the check box in front of the 3D seismic volume

mig" The survey outline is displayed in the 2D window.
Toggle on Ihe 2D /rnesfolder. The 2D Iines are now
displayed in the 2D window.
Double-click fhe 2D linesfolder to open the Settings
dialog box.
0n the Style tab, toggle 0N these check boxes:
Show lines
.
.
.
o
Show names
Show number (Type: CDp)

Show tickmark (Size: 10).
Click 0K
From the
lnput pane, select the wells to display
in your 2D
window.
B.
9.
Double-click fhe Wellsfolder.
0n the Style tab > Symbol subtab, change the annotation

d isp
lay.
Greating Random !ntersections

The option to display seismic intersections along any generated
polygon can be very usefulfor performing tasks such as making
tailor-made sections between wells. ln addition, you can disply a

random line that is aligned to the in-line and cross-line directions. ln
this exercise, you will learn to use both options.
Petrel Geophysics
Seismic lnterpretatlon Preparat
0n.
179
_l
.a--
)
L,--
1.
'l
Display an existrng time slice for mig [Realized] in a 3D
2.
3.
4.
window or insert a new one.

Expand the wlndow to use the full screen'
Clear any other seismlc llnes.
Make sure the Seisruic interpretatior process and mig
5.
IRealized] 1 volume are both active.

ln the process toolbar, click Greate arbitrary polyline
6.
7
-i
iniersection (C) 'J
LJ
_-/
-I
t-
Draw a polygon by left-clicking in the window to design the

path.
Double-click t0 stop the polygon line. A seismic random
lrne rs generatecj automatically and stored under fhe mig
[Realized] I folder.
-:-
=-a
-
.-*.
-
:=
4
-.I
-<
:Y
-:180.
.t
Se smic lnterpretat on Preparation
Petre GeophVsics
aar_ar_aaL'
f
f
---ra
--
, ffi ,*, n.nq f*il,adj
I_-J
@ 'tr:
i:.&
B.
--
9.
I__J
Edit the random line. 0pen fhe General intersection

folder and display and toggle on Arbitrarv polygon.
ln the Processes pane under lJtilities, activate fhe Make/
edit polygons process.

10. 0n the Function toolbat click Show points in the
L----t
polygons
;
E
13
IVake sure Arbitrary

polyoon is activated (bold)
while editing the polygon
. Note that all of the points in the polygon
are displayed
I---
11. Click Polygon edting
:., fne cursor style changes
,oE
r,_.-.,i
12.
Drag and re-draw the orientation of the Iine. The
intersectron is updated automatically.
13. Delete points by selecting them and clicking Delete
E*
,* or
pressing the Delete key.

14. When you are satisfied, right-click Generalintersection
in the lnput pane and select Convert to 2D externat
SEGY. A new object is created and stored in another
f
I.
S e i s m i c S u rvey f older (2D I i n e s f oldel.

15. Activate a (new) 3D window and toggle on the mig
IRealized] I folder and one in-line, cross-line, and random
rIr-.i
line from this cube. The survey outline and the seismic
lines are displayed.
16. Activate he Seismic interpretatior? process and mig

[Realized] l.
17. CIick Create seismic aligned polyline intersection
f
f
1--.-
(Shift+C):J
tne Function toolbar.

in the displaywindow. Click
once t0 change direction and double-click to stop the
polygon lrne. A seismic random line is generated
automatically and is stored under the mig IBealized] l
folder
n
18. Drawa polygon by left-clicking
--,--,-
J-,
Xl-j* fc
"-1gg
,il
Crlcrd ir*erB*diri t*btrare,*6i
h,.tt
"
# o, *A*.*yfdfeort
I-J
.+i
lt*rre S**
re:re
Geophysics
c. sr:,
lr
lprpr"
Pr"p.ot O r o 181
l-.-rd
_l
--J
19. Display the seismic aligned polyline intersection that
you
just created in a 3D window.

You are encouraged to perform this task in the 2D wrndow
a
lso.
-J
t--J
_l
r--J
-i
)
t-
r-.1
l--d
-j
-/
:]L..J
-)
t-J)
**
20.
Edit the created line. 0pen fhe General intersection

folder and display and activate the Arbitrary polygon.
Bepeating step B-10 to edit and modify the intersection
changes the rntersection t0 a polyline intersectron.
_<
Composite Lines
Composite lines are frequently used by seismic interpreters because
they help them to better understand sub-surface geology and aid in
interpretatron. Composite lines also can be considered as pathways
between drfferent seismic surveys.
Traditionally, it is important that your sersmic lines connect to each
other at some point to create a composite section. However, Petrel
now offers functionality t0 create a composite section for nonintersecting 2D lines. These sections are referred lo as jump ties in
these exercises.
182. Seismic nterpretati0n Preparati0f
Petrel Geophys cs
,1
rr
EE-J
f
L'
af
f
f
f
f
---
!r.--l
Creating Composite Lines in 3D Windows
1. 0pen a new 3D window.

2. Activate Ihe Seismic interpretatior process.
3. Display a cross-line from mig lRealizedl 1 and all 2D lines
in your project"
4.
Position the seismic data so that you can differentiate

between the lrnes (select View from above in the
toolbar).
qt$T*n"K
-.--
L_
---
f
L'
f
f
I--
a--
---z
----z
---4
l_
ri .i -.,r., ;s:i,".r
F,.
! .!'-ir'a
,"9:
G
v
E)
-!'
fr. ! ," -i,*, :{ rr:'l

L _H
_.
ilu l'.1 1':-, c':-
.*
-.r
I-
::1
ll[]
L!+l
---
5.
"'=*,
'.,*,
Click Select composite section
(0)l*
and left-click the
cross-lrne in the window. lts outline changes to whrte.
6.
1.
B.
Move the cursor to a 2D line and observe that it turns

partly white.
Move the cursor t0 the other side of the 2D line and
left-click to select it"

Continue to select parts 0f 2D lines for the composite
secti on.
9. After you select four to five 2D lines, repeatedly

Delete key to clear the sections.
10. Wrth Select composite section (0)
1
1.
press the
,*
still active, take

another path through the 2D lines.
When satisfied, double-click t0 generate the composite
r
ntersecti on.
'12. Find Composite folder / in the lnput pane

and expand
line
Composite
1. All sections of the selected composite
are listed.
, G Itj C*nrposl&e tader
,isii-:ffi
i" +
XLrne 47S [mig [Realiz*d] "il
i-4
,,
tQ
y,: Seismic 2D line lslbSl
&
Seismir 2D line [slb8]
iyr Sesnic 2D lin* [slbl]

Seismlc nterpretati0n Preparation. 183
t3
'l
Create a new composite. Make sure that mig IRealized] is
the actrve survey (bold text) because the composrte is
based on it.
14
your selectrons.
jk
Itr
and
I .1.
Click Draw arbitrary composite sections (W
click anywhere on the trme slice. Move the cursor and
observe the white frame.
tb Click on the 3D volume time slice a few tlmes, then change
the selectron to Draw aligned composite sections
1l
t0 construct your composite.

0bserve the alignment to in-lines and cross-lines.
Finalize the composrte. Use Select composite section
(O)
anO continue
i&
to rnclude some 2D lines before double-clicking.

The new Composite line 2 appears under Composite
folder I
in the
lnput
pane.
Creating Gomposite Lines in an lnterpretation Window

The approach to constructing composrte intersections in
lnterpretation windows is different from 2D and 3D windows and
uses a different set of rcons and shortcuts.
1.
2.
3.
lnterpretation window and display a crossthe

lnput pane.
lrne from
CIick Gompose with intersecting line (0)1ffi to
c0mp0se with any crossing 2D line. 0bserve that only
Open a new
existing lines (such as 2D, in-lines, cross-lines, and random

lrnes) are selectable and appear as black lines across the
ln the window, left-click where a black llne appears.
0ne side of the crossing line is selected and displayed. lt is
stored in lhe Composirefolder and named Composite line
3
4.
ln the 3D window, controlwhich side of the line has been
selected. To compose with the opposite side of the line,

use other keyboard combinations while clicking the line.
The possible selection shortcuts are illustrated in
Step 5 through Step 7.
,l84.
Selsmlc lnterpretation Preparati0r'r
ln a 3D window, display a trme slice from mig [Bealized] 1

together with a few 2D lines. lt might be easier to observe
(Shift+W) i[L
Petre Geoph\/slcs
f
f
----
-L-.{
c{
La.LLf
Press Shift and left-click on an in-line p0siton to include
one paft of the in-line.

1
or Gompose
--{
T,
---4
intersecting line away from you.

Left-click + Ctrl: Compose to the left and use the
rntersecting line away from you.
Left-click + Shift: Compose to the rrght and use the
intersecting line towards you.
Left-clrck and Shift + Ctrl: Compose to the left and use
the intersecting line toward you.
Click Glip and extend composite (0)iffi and left-click
somewhere along your line. Any part of the composrte line
to the right of where you click is removed and the line is
extended from that point on.
Press Shift + Ctrl and left-click somewhere further to the
left on your remaining composite lrne. Everything to the left
of that point is removed and no extension of the seismic
rL{
with crossline (Shift+l)1ffi, these shortcuts
determlne which part of the line ls selected.

Let-click: Compose to the right and use the
F--r
-d
with crossline (Shift+l)iffi to extend the
composite line, a fourth rcon is added for editing compostte

lines created in the lnterpretation windows.
For any of these three options, Compose with
intersecting line (0):ffi , Compose with inline (l)rffi ,
If.
I-_an
r_--
Click Compose
composite intersection in combination with the other two

optrons. Because the selections are added instantly to the
r--J
--J
Click Compose
r.--l
f
f
with inline (l)
line is done.
When you use the Clip and extend composite (0) ffi
icon, these shortcuts determine how the clipping is done:
Left-click: Clip the composed line to the right and
extend it from that point on.
Left-click + Ctrl: Clip the composed line to the left and
extend it from that point on.
Left click + Shift: Clip the composed line to the right

and end it at that point.
Left click + Shift + Ctrl: Clip the composed line to the
left and end rt at that point.
Seismic lnterpretatlon Preparati0n
185
I
I
)
'}
i-
Creating a JumP Tie Section

Jumper tie lines allow you to display two or more non-intersecting
2D seismic lines. This is usefulwhen carryrng out regionalseismrc
interpretation with old vintage 2D data.
l--
1. 0pen a 2D window and display all objects inyour 2D

seismic /rnes folder.
2.
0n the-process toolbar, click Select composite section
3.
Click on the first 2D line from which you want t0 start

making your iump tie composite section Notice that the
(0)i*
Draw iumper composite section (Shift+O)i&
Click Draw iumper composite section
(Shift+O)i&"
5.Clickonthesecondseismiclinethatyouwishtoincludein
6.
your iumPer comPosite.

Double-cllck to end your composition You can display the
jump composlte section rn the Interpretation or 3D
window and activate it from the Composite 1 folderinthe
lnput
some polnt in same sectlon, if that is required'
Displaying Multiple Seismic Views on the Same Screen

ln this exercise, you will visualize the same seismic llnes
simultaneously in 2D (base map),30, and lnterpretation windows'
ln the
Windows pane, check that the project has three
2.
windows open in the background (one 3D wlndow, one

lnterpretation window, and one 2D window). lf it does
not, close 0r open windows by toggling them on or off '
Go to the Window menu and select Tile vertical to align
3.
all three windows side-bY-side.

Go to the Windows pane and for each window, take these
stePs.
a. 0pen the Settings dialog box.

b. 0n the lnfo tab, toggle on fhe Linked to visual groLtp
check box.
186 o Selsmrc Interpretation Preparatl0n
-_
pane.
This procedure also allows you to draw a jump composite

that contalns 2D lines that are not lntersectlng' You can,
however, also include Iines that are tred to each other at
'
L-r
icon
now is actlvated.
4.
Petrel
Geophvs.:
c.
From the drop-down list, select the same visual group

for all windows
S"ttlngs for'lntrFretation
$ ri: S*tupryFl
E
Name
uindow
j,rterEretaron wrqdo\i,
f [WT]
- mig
...
--
-,-'rl
'l
-i
:Type
li
lnterprststionwindow
Visual g.oup
lr
r'
t rnKd tc uisual
--l
group
t*l
--.:l
"-"--"--'-'t
_t
a-l)l
Serc
ffi
f-i
t.+-,i
L-:tt -i
i
I
:".
After allwindows are Iinked to the same visual group,

highlight the first window and togole on the Cursor
tracking check box. Hepeat this step for all windows.
From the lnput pane, select a cross-line from mig
IRealized] 1. The cross-line is displayed in all three
windows simultaneously.
Go to the Window menu and tile all windows vertically if
they are not already.
Align your cross-line in the 3D window so that you can see
the cross section.
Go to the ln_t-e-.rpretation window and click Select / pick
mode (P)
ih
and drag the cursor over your seismic data.

0bserve that when you are dragging the cursor in the
Interpretation window, you can see it tracking in the 3D
and 2D windows simultaneously.
Make sure the
Cursor tracking check box

is selected for the three
windows in the Windows
pane.
Display only one window by closing or minimizing the other

two windows. To display them again, go to the Windows
pane or Window menu respectively.
Se smic Interpretation
Preparatl0n. 187
r--
L-r
J
Linking lnterpretation or 3D Windows to Coordinate

0ptional
Groups
lf more
than one lnterpretation window is used, y0u can link them
together in a coordinate gr0up. Any rescaling or repositionlng in one

window is mirrored in the other windows. A similar linking of 3D
l-rr
L
/
L.r
-l
fd
windows also is available.
1. From the Window menu, open two lnterpretation

windows.
2.
3.
4.
Dlsplay an in-line in one window and a cross-line ln the

other window.
Actlvate both lnterpretation windows and cllck Camera
linking ,lB in the toolbar for both of them.
Go to the Windows pane and expand the two
lnterpretation
5.
Open the Settings dialog box for
lnterpretation I under
0n the Settings tab, note that the information is updated'

The same group is selected from the Linked to
coordinate group drop-down list for both windows'
ffi
Lt
_-
Lj
5
wi ndows.
both windows.
6.
st
Settingsfor'lnterpretatin
-
t-.
.z
&LJ
1'
-a
d
--L-
Linkedto coordinate
: Linkeo to v,sual
group: ;;ih
group
..
E
.1
.-
ir
Scal e
XY-scale: i
l: 2580
i,(.1
-r
Unit of
Right
'.
margins:
5r
i;$
. Frenlge
lEr
188
Selsmic Interpretatl0n Preparatiof
Pefel Geophysics
f
f
I--
L'
I-J
aL'
aE.--
---l
,--_)
l_-
Windows pane, make sure 0nly the two

lnterpretation wi ndows are se lected (displayed).
From the Window menu, select Tile vertical.
ln the
---
Activate one window and pan, zoom, stretch, and squeeze

the intersection. 0bserve the other wlndow.
10. 0pen two different 3D windows.
'1
1 . Display an in-line from the cropped and realized volume,
mig 1 [Realrzed] 1, in one window and a cross-line from the
origrnal imported volume, mig, in the other window.
12. ln the Windows pane, make sure only these two windows
are selected (displayed).
13.
From the
Window menu select Tile vertical.
Activate both windows by clicking Camera linking ffi in

the toolbar for both wlndow.
15. Pan or zoom in on one 3D window. 0bserve the effect in
the other window.
14
---
Seismic lfterpretat 0n Preparat 0n.189
iL--
:l-J
:l
I-l
I-_l
tb
Using a Seismic Ghost Curve

the interpreter in picking the right seismic event across the
fault block, use a seismic ghost curve to drag a picture of the
seismic data from one side of the fault to the other.
To aid
1.
ln an lnterpretation window, identify an area that you

want to correlate across a fault block.
2.
3.
4.
Click on lnsert seismic ghost
5.
6.
{*..
B.
PIace the mouse pointer inside the seismic ghost area and
move it to the desired Position.

ldentify the correspondtng events.
tL.J
Display the interpretation inside the ghost by clicking the

horizon interpretations from the lnput pane (while the
Left-click the seismic line outslde of the ghost area.
Observe that the frame of the ghost turns black (ls
inactive).
9.
Use the scrollwheelt0 z00m out 0n the seismic line.
10. 0bserve how the seismic ghost follows the zooming.
11.
CIrck lnside the seismlc ghost and the frame turns blue (is
active).
12. Update the ghost to lts current position by right-clicking

13.
inside the active ghost curve frame.

Stretch and squeeze the ghost curve.
a.
b.
by pressing Ctrl + Shift while
clicking inslde the ghost area.

The cursor changes to a rotation symbol.
15.
L-.-
-l
L--
,.-a
^-l
-t
L-
Position the cursor on the blue frame.

The frame appears as a double arrow.
Click and drag or push the ghost to the desrred shape.
14. Rotate the ghost curve
-.-
\--{
Drag a rectangle over the zone of interest.
ghost is active).
1
t.--
-l
:l
-.J
-l
Remove the sersmic ghost

ln the Windows pane, find and expand the active
a.
lnterpretation
b.
wi ndow.
:_l
Right-click and delete Ghost l.
:]
:
190. Seismic lnterpretation Preparatlon
Petrel Geophysics
I_-
a"
---J
f=
f
----
Modifying the Seismic Data Display

' , - :an alter the display of seismic data ln different
:=:.icrng on which display window ls used.
'
2
ways,
0pen a new 3D window.

Display an in-line and cross-llne from the selsmic volume
mig IBealized]
1.
lume.
----M'
----- seingirr'mi-o!*"u,,"*oi. =,''- S,"'". ,,*,,,nr;J Cos tl ouratcre-*.t,y:*""**-l
''r- - o
r----J
.a'Easemap'anndtatin
Seq:
-tl e rrhelrti.l
L--j
from Farenlfoldr
; int*-'.i,.n .A_-,rrrr;:i.*fl.q,*- iry,,iuri**

lnlerpalatif
tl",to
.'Nqne ]rBrlrnes' Sralh
ri:tie irii.r!iii.f i:+irl!ti.,r'
- Hononltsl. :r -l
1.emci .
,
:
i
i '
,
Vlsu3lizalion
fji!:. lrr air.j !i'{t..tJili!::
a.,a orr
Bu"ro ,c e
"'r"o,
.;
il:EnablElanspsrencyforLntrscli.ns
Ful
'-.,
l,ledrm :. Lau
'::'l1l::-.--..--.,
lJlFals(eneoremenl
LcLmonhLPd,q6o,n0
Trn =lriri,r rld
r
i*iaool
I|
lr---,_-_-_,_
4.
']
l!,laxresolLlin :&i'
Ji,I
.i
jj i
,i
.i
i(r ilii.rrr.rtini5
l.
I ii
rl
i
iii
'c3
i;;;;il- i i;:_-:-:
:,
.'i
l"x
c"n""r
Change the lnterpolation method from Smooth to None and
observe the effect.
5.
Set it back to Smooth and click Apply
6 Click Enttble btrmp mapping.

7. 0bserve the effect by rotating the selsmic data in 3D.
B. Click to clear the rotation
Set IVax resoluti0n to Low and observe the effect.

'10. Change it back to Full
1
Set fhe Decimation while dragging optlon t0 4.
Petre Geoph\/s cs
Seismlc nterpretation Preparation
191
-<a
(MlS and observe the behavior

when you drag an rntersection from the realized volume.
12. Click Manipulate plane
Using the Survey Manager
parameters such as CDB SB Trace number, and line name. You also
can use it to search and sort data, move data into folders, and
visualize data in display windows.
<
L..
<
The Survey manager is a useful tool for sorting and managing

seismic data in Petrel. You can use the Survey manager to control
L.
-.
L-.
L"
-<
Bight-click the 2D /rnes folder and select Survey
manager.
2. View the active 2D window while selecting or clearing any

of the check boxes in fhe Eye
column. This column
E
-.L-
turns the line display on and off.
3.
Click the left mouse button and drag the mouse potnter
over several rows in the numbered column to select the
L-
lines.
boo{*t f}
t*.*t
tW!
6.ig!l c*
lL
b
h
1
Click Turn on the
selected seismic in the current
window @ to view the lines.

Click Turn off the selected seismic in the current
window rffi. to hide the lines.
Sort the lines by double-clicking the seismic column Name
th
-
\
-
Double-click again to reverse the sorting.
Click the Ieft mouse button and drag the mouse pointer
over the number of several rows t0 select them.

Click Move selected seismic to another
sub-folder
I
_I._
192. Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparati0n
&
Petrel Geophysics
I-_=-J
L"
I"
Laa-
the Move selected items to folder dialog box, use the

default Create new folder and click 0K.
In
I-_-J
$
]
Mcve seiected tems to flder
Select fotdsr to move th+ items t
I._-J
I-_.J
Enter an appr0priate name for the new folder or use the

default name
10
I--J
If
[l
tnt",
new {older nanre
Enter name of newiolder
--:)
----J
Ir._=_
t_-_J
T
=
=
=
11
Find the new folder under the

pane
12
ln the Survey manager, click Search
2D linesfolder
in the
lnput
for seismic in the
survey manager . The search engine opens.

13
Enter part of a line name, for example
sf b2,
and click
Find next.
Find iems iil rabte
l-nd
what
slD4
:-.-r Match case
i - i Matcir whole name
f'
; Searcir up
rmd
ne{
lf none of the check boxes in the Find items in table

dialog box is selected, the search engine will search for the
words containing the characters that you entered in the
Find what field. The search starts from the top of the
Survey manager.
The Survey manager works for the survey folder from
=
---/
=
--
Petre Geophysics
Selsmic lnterpretati0f Preparatl0n
193
.twhich itwas started. To easily manage allof the 2D lines in

a project, keep all surveys at the r00t level and start the
Survey manager f rom the Seismic main folder. Sort the
different surveys into subfolders at several Ievels if needed.
14. Multi-2D lines can be realized f rom the Survey manager.
Select the lines of interest and click Realize selected
<
Li
<
L,.
f-..
seismic ,,&,.
Lr
Editing and Greating Color Palettes

The industry standard color palettes are included in the Templates
pane. The default colortemplate used for selsmic data ln Petrel is
red (positive amplitudes), light gray (zerolcrossover amplitudes) and
blue (negative amplitudes). You can change or edit the color
template for seismic data easily and create new templates.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1
Lt
folder.
-<
L.r
D
Select the Seismic (default) palette, copy (Ctrl + C) and

paste (Ctrl + V) to make an identlcal copy.
0pen the Settings dialog box for Copy of Seismic (default).
./
-
ln the Templates pane, expand the Seismic
0n the lnfo tab, change the name to
template
5.
6.
<
L.
My
color tables
training
f:l
0n the Golors tab, click [' I to reverse the color table.

Click on the middle color handle (gray) and change it to
white.
f^
L-
\L
-r-
tL-
r
194.
Sersmic lnterpretati0n Preparation
Petrel Geophvsics
--
Setting: for '{opy of Seismic (default}'
;-j-'rj-l$jl: il;;
U
a-
[1ax
1'1_1
r.--J
I_"
l[]--i{
;-l-r
I 1-l
Clar intarpolalin:
,', HVihJri
, : HSViMini
aI.-J
,..9r
Non linear gradent
r_r--J
-.__J
il
'_-a,l
tl
ii,i
ru]
[ ]1.f
T---'
LT.]
i-rj
,'^.1
r--J
L-
:tdj
-+t
,...:)
i--,*j
rLiJ
Min
---J
I----
r;'
T=1
i
-:. I
RcB
Fri,L;dr!
i]]
r--t
iirj
-,--l
-,---)
tf
*1
a-,
J.
B.
9.
1
0.
Click and drag the other handles into new positions.
lnsert new handles by clicking between the two color

handles. Change colors.
When you are satisfied with the new color template, click
0K.
ln the lnput pane, t0 0pen the Settings dialog box for
mig"
11
0n the lnfo tab, use lhe kruplate drop-down list to attach

the My training template color template.
12.
Click
13
0n the Colors tab, toggle on fhe Override

Proqer\') temPlate check box.
Apply and observe the seismic data in a 3D window.
global
Seismic lnterpretat 0n Preparat
on.
195
14
Click Use automatic min and max in the color table

r-#.1
htS. Minimum and maximum are now given as changeable
amplitude values.
15
Click and drag the handles before applying the change.

0bserve the result in a 3D window.
the lnfo tab, change back to the Seismic (default)

template and click Apply.
16. 0n
lmporting and Exporting Color Palettes
1.
Go
2.
3.
Right-click that folder and select lmport (on selection).

ln the lmport file dialog box, select File of type (.alut)and
to the Templates pane and find the Seismic color
tablesfolder.
open the color table named
rn
Seismic-Course.alutlocated
s/ f older
Click 0K in the lmport
o.
Use the imported color palette when displaying an in-line.
1.
0n the Templates pane, under the Seismic color tables

folder right-click Seismic (default) and select Export.
ln the Export as dialog box, save the exported file to the
Sfudenf folder and name it My nxported Color-
o
()
im p o
rt/C
o Io
L-
L.-
:l
:l--l
:l
:l
L.-
L.L.
L-
L,-
ata
CIick 0pen.
in fhe
f-J
file dialog box.
Palette.
:l'l
V
L.-
:l^l
L.
-_l
-l
tif
,I."
_l
:t
r-J
196. Seismic Interpretali0n
Preparati0n
Petre Geophysics
--.]
t.a
I
r-_{
a:
aa:
arI.-J
Rendering a Seismic Volume

By rendering a seismic volume, making it partly opaque (high
amplitude) and partly transparent (crossover amplitudes), y0u can
identify hidden structural or depositional features during your
Lnterpretation. You can render only realized volumes.

1
---{
2.
3.
---f
Display the survey outline of realized seismic volume mig 1

IRealized] 1 in a 3D Window (toggle on in the lnput pane).
Open the Settings dialog box for this volume.
0n the Style tab > Volume visualization subtab, toggle

on Volume render (toggle off Volume walls if enabled).
Click Apply and observe the effect in the 3D window.
se$ings for'miq [Realizedj 1'
Setings are inherited fr6m psrentfoider
_t*
|"}:!_{ffi
.;
voumevisslstsn
#*lf'Llt..i
Volume watls
t;,;,tJrr*al
os,ie
'.1
I Eilbe irrlipatiilsy fo. *ll
:y'. Volunre reader

t- : Iiata aliged slices
,
ll
,'
Viewaligoed slices
; Number of slicestorenre seisnric volunre
Hide frame/annoi,etion in yiewins mode
Seismic interpretat 0n Preparation
197
5.
-_l
r.-a
:_l
0n the Colors tab:
a.
b.
Toggle on Override global
properlt template.
c.
Adjust the 0pacity curve.

Click somewhere on the curve to insert a new point.
Adjust the position and insert more points f0r
e.
adjustment (see the figure).

Click Apply. 0ften, the purpose for changing colors is
to make cr0ssover values (grayish colors with low
d.
negative and posrtive amplitude values) transparent.
!-/
El
fh-
L-J
ts
fh
E
E-
f--1
3
l=E
L.
198 o Seismic lnterpretat on Preparation
Petre Geophysics
I-
-__-__-{
r--=J
a''
a"
a"
a"
0n the 0pacity tab.
Set Full opacity tFl by cticking lm

Select the histogram and drag it onto the 0pacity tab
to set the opacity level (as shown in the figure in Step 6
of the next exercise).
0bserve that the changes take place interactively in the 3D
I._J
b.
r-___.J
I-_-j
window.
$
,e?l;ii
settinqs
rt{
100i:
- --se,r
o
L"i-r
"'
iar*:-T
o.
0n the Style tab, toggle off Volume render.
0n the 0pacity tab, ser Fuil opacity tFl by clicking l.l

Click 0K to accept the changes.
10
Selsmlc lnterpretati0n Preparation
,l99
L--
Displaying Volume Walls

You can display the limits of a seismic v0lume as walls.
1.
Toggle on mig [Realized] 1 to display the wire frame of the

VOIUMC.
2.
3.
Right-click mig [Realized] 1 and select Settings.

0n the Style tab > Volume visualization subtab, toggle
4.
5.
6.
on Volume walls and NormalClick Apply to see the effect in a 3D window.

Try the Inside optlon and click Apply to see the changes'
Toggle off Volume walls and apply the change.
:l
:l
lE-
f.--
_t
-l
L--
\--a
-_l
-l
5--a
L..J
lLl
)
l-
L-
L-.r
s
=
=
200. Seismic lnterpretati0n
Preparati0n
Petrel Geophysics
Il_-'
---J
I-
Review 0uestions
l_'
l_'
a composite intersection?
ls it possible to rotate a random line in an lnterpretation

window?
You want to edit an arbitrary polygon to redefine your
arbitrary polyline intersection. You have selected the
-I--
Make/edit polygon,s process, but it is not working. What
L-
could be the reason?

You want to render your seismic volume. From the
!r--
Settings dialog box of your 3D cube, you g0 to Volume

visualization, but it is grayed out. ls it because you do not
l_-
U
U
f
L'
U
,L--
a
a
-,--
u
T
u
T
J-.-
1-4'
have a Petrel license for Volume Rendering or you have

missed a step?
Can you display wiggle traces in a 3D window?
How can you display time value in a 3D window for 3D
seismic data?
----
-E--
What is the difference between a polyline intersection and
Summary
.
.
o
o
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
using the seismic interface and toolbar

displaying 2D and 3D seismic data
setting up a seismic display scale

making and annotating seismic base maps
making and displaying composrte and jump tie lines
using and linking multiple windows
using color template and palette optimization
using the Survey manager
using the visualization tools
rendering volumes in 3D windows
using the Light tool
using the lmmersion mode.
Petrel Geophysics
_._r
=
Selsmic lnterpretati0 Preparatiof
201
f'
r-{
aa
aaaf
L'
r.-
Module 3
Fault
lnterpretation
-l
r-{
Tnis module introduces you to the fault interpretation workflow and

:echniques in Petrel.
I-_t
---_J
-..1
Learning objectives
Ater completing this module, you will know how to.
o
.
.
.
o
interpret faults in Petrel

use the fault interpretation function bar and fault settings
manually pick faults
manipulate and edlt faults

track faults.
-E-I
-.-
f
J_f
f
!=
f
ff--l
c{
i--I
---4
r----"r
I---|
203
Jl'.
I-l
L-.a
ln
in Petrel
the Function t00lbar
this lesson, y0u will learn how to
Lesson
use
and the
L--a
"J
&
-_l
lnterpretation manager to interpret faults in Petrel'
, =
:'
iraiasraphy
.d
'
Geophysics
'
Hffi
-l
l.-J
Function Toolbar
t,
aF
}6
i;
-Ln
Use the Function toolbar to perform these tasks:
.
.
.
.
.
.
ft-{
f'l
cut, loin, and add points t0 a segment

move, add, or delete individual p0nts
move or delete entire segments
cOpy 0r move segments from one fault to another
lL..J
,l
t .-
_l
rx,
L-r
-Ll
',1s.{
copy 0r move segments to new faults

edit faults in 3D or lnterpretation windows'
I i{
, J:
i *L.
t?
lr*'/
L
'[i
.r,
isti
]-J
_l-
,.
_.;
s.!
eY
a
&
:'#,
i&
l-
tr
t-
il*
l"r
'.l}
tr
.b-
1
2
3
4
204.
Activate fault [Shift+S]
Join selected Points Ul
Selection paintbrush [Shrft
Cut segments [T]
Bounding box select [B]
Select single Point
Eraser [X]
lnterpret faults
IF]
B]
Petre Geopr
i-
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
I-=-J
G-T
I--J
-=-{f
I.-J
nterpretation Manager
-^= lnterpretation manager is an interactive tool that gives you
-:. l's
,
and
IO arrange anO nariOte your seismtc
fault interpretations lt
interpreters'
-,rr, or prolect administrators' seismic
to fllter and sort
and all other
Petrel users lt includes several options
and off
-.:'pretations, create new objects' and turn interpretations on
-a
r,lsible windows.
and
is useful particularly for arranging
on
working
you
are
when
-araging y0ur lnterpretatin (horizons/faults)
--e lnterpretation manager
a cetatled interpretation proiect'
're
-a s
allow you to perform these

tools in the lnterpretation manager
ks:
-==-.
.
o
--*J
.
.
tn current or all visrble

select and clear interpretation objects
windows
selected interpretatlons
show the Settngs dialog box for
in the active
insert new seismic horizons or faults
lnterPretation folder
lnterpretation manager
search for hortzons or faults rn the
lnterpretation folder'
move interpretation objects t0 another
-_*
--_.
r---a
Fault lterl:]retat
of
'
205
J'r--,
liir;iiil
!: .-"
r:t:
il
liii:q+*
E}
-l
-l
L--J
the lnterpretation Manager

- 0pening
Bight-cllck fhe lnterpretationfolder and select
lnterpretation manager.
Procedure
1.
t-
-_t
,ffi;:ffi
I@
I iii]
I ffil
, i$
Shot" se::ings
5pnr1 all
,.
t--J
;o Srurli*
.l
*,eiri*r'e l ir*rYr tudo

ubse ';*e
trrpatt i*i, sei*ciicrr
L--.
^_J
irrl
l=B tlpcr:,,,
iX ilr*let*..,
illeie r*ntnt,
t$ fftt
:.,::tiff
L.-J
'
-_J
-J
Lclp5 i.i:urrr?J
a.
-_l
r.recLrrSl'iei
tiip,SITd
S"rrt i:y nar-.*rer
E-a
Ser-: bY Z-ualr.r*r
' Autc c*lcr all

& Liic rame ali
ffi Fauh iiarEv.r*rk ehile interprcting
* f *r1"*rt i* in;rpr*'i:it!'i
fi Ccnoert tc interpreia:ion i*ptir1riz*d
T ln:erpr*rarion manager , .
ft nsert seisrric lrerin
S. insen far;lt
f insert in1*rpr'*:atien f*irler
,
--]
f-i
Ll
v
)
i*r ?l
F
^-
206. Fault Inlerpretation
Petrel Geophyslcs
I__-
-.-4
I-_E---I
af
ar-{
----t
a.
I_I'
E
L'
f
---.1
---r
Irr.-J
Fault Interpretaton in Petrel

'rterpreting faults is 0ne 0f the key tasks rn any seismic interpretation
,',orkflow. ln your routine workflow, faults and horizons are picked and
:rte rpreted simultaneously. For learning purposes, you will learn how to
irterpretfaults in Petrelfirstand in the next module, you

'row to interpret horizons.
will
learn
W Visually grouping t
lnterpretation and 3D
windows together is helpl

in
fault rnterpretation.
n this training, the focus is on manualfault interpretation. Petret
rffers powerful automatic fault extraction using seismlc attributes.

Automatic fault extraction is discussed inlhe PetrelGeophysics:
S e i s m i c I nte
rp
retati o n Wo r kf I ow Iools
cou rse.
Manual Fault Picking

When the Seismic
interpretation
process is actlve, you can
interpret faults manually on in-lines, cross-lines, tlme slices, random

ines, or arbitrary lines in 3D and lnterpretation windows.
---.
---.
E
t--l
Fau
nterpretat 0n.207
LJ
Faults Manually
- Picking
Seismlc interpretation ln the Processes pane.
. Activate
2. Display the selsmic section in the lnterpretation window or
Procedure
1
3D wrndow.
3.
Bight-click lnterpretation folder / and select lnsert fault.

Alternatively, insert a new fault from the Seismic
interpretation
tool bar.
The new fault displays in the same folder and is stored in the
aclive lnterpretation folder in the lnput pane.
-i&G* *
r&&#,m.rr
A).
iii::a:.i:il:!iiri:lrllt:i.,iirii'
},'iii!dss 1{Ar1}}:
,L
& ';,-l Seismic horin

, v Juvolume
r ffi
r?r mig
@ E lnline635
[&
r--t]
xline 4
-r Srruey
, # r'j
srbi
"H
.rh?
m
ffi
.tr
t'5prrstb2
srlo::r.:*,1n9:.t:: .
,":E
S.eirile ali
5ub5(fiile
rLt
i*
tX
5ed ali te Srudic
jf,c S;udic
[mF6.i ic 5e!Ec.ilon] .
ixpcn
,,
elE:e , ,
Crl.
D:l*l:.:!n.*n::
Ccilairse (rE(u5i!e:
ffi f avoriles
! idPr1 (recur:Jei
Auic cclcr rii
iault rameucri( $rilE iriire.ig
!* Cor,o"- :" ie.eIi;c
* fr"e.: ac 'iep.elaiien icplimiled ibr il
ffi fatergreiaiicn inaller ' ,
fr : ,=". : L-'r -c'?c
It( :ns-'dLl:
l)
us
ffi' :"e-,'r.:er+re:a::o -c'de'
L*.i
5&
t"lf
lS
lmpod dat
Siragraphy
Geophysics
e-smic
Volume attribltes
iy-i
J i*fi*ry rr/+s i*n ftte rs

Fault interpretatinn
j(tt Fi Fault interpretation 2

ril
i"r Fault inierpretation 3
L!i
i-t
Surface attribules
.f.ji Automatic fauh extraction
JV1 Make velocily model
: GEriralt:Flir.i,rr!ti:r,li
m GEobody interpretati0n
rj Sirta.il ,lr.:ll f)+
& tdlake restoration 2D model
208
Fault Inter pretatlon
Petrel Geophysics
C rc<
lnterpret faults
in the Function bar or oress the
F key.
5.
lnterpret fault on the seismic line elther in the Interpretation

wrndow or 3D window. Double-click or press N to break the
fault stick
6.
ln the General
intersection plaver, set the increment.
M@
Clicl<
t0 move to the next or the previous seismic
section or press Page Up or Page Down on the keyboard.
Petrel Geophysics
Fauil lnterpretation . 209
qtr"
:t
>--
Procedure
'1.
!.d :.:
f ir 'U',li
6.*i.re
!:1.6r
Editing a Fault Segment -
activate the Fault segment, click " on the Function bar

or press Shit + S before clicking on the fault stlck to activate
it. The color of the fault is highlighted when it is active.
To
_t
rra
I
I
i'.:rii'::iti'
,.1:,: * l;l r'

L
.:
fil
_1
L
ffi
ii
ii,
,n tt . Function bar or press

Io edrt a fault segment, cllck
E. The points on the fault can now be moved 0r new points can
be added to the fault segment to accurately mark the fault
geometry.
:
:
210
Fault lnterpr ettlon
Petrel Geophls cs
0r press
deiete a part or whole fault segment click
potnts
on
Cllck on the active fault to delete two adjoining
To
seg
ment
erre Gecphys cs
Procedure
1.
Moving a Fault-Segment
Actlvate the fault, click I h ., then click on a single cligitized

point (node) on fault stick. Part of the fault segment turns
yellow.
Clrck between any two digitized points (nodes) on the
remaining fault segment to make whole segment yellow..
_=-
212
Fault lnterpretatiof
P.tr-J
Gr.lrhy*;
E
a-1
1.
ar_aE
f
rI-J
--{
E--/l
--.
f
--/l
E
-_
T
a,_
_.
'lt
Click
and click on a single digitized point (node) and drag
it to move the while segment to a new location on the seismic
section.
J-,-
-l
LJ
--J
Move Faults laterally 0ption

0ften, when an interpreter is handed reprocessed data, the faults
picked on earlier versions of the data do not fit the new version. This
sometrmes is the case when the field-processed data version is
different from the final, or more intensive and detailed, processing
versions. To avoid re-picking the fault model, y0u can use the
faults laterally
Move
...
-,
_F
opti0n in Petrel.
I..J
'':
i.'.*--r*
l:1 .-
E -e=E
E'e
F,5::rH
-E==
Procedure
rJ
Moving Faults Laterally
- to Settings > }perations tab > Seismic

1. Navrgate
operations > Move faults laterally.
ffi
Setf*ry tor'Fautrtlnterpretaliun 1'
L.r
f.r
H-M eismlc op*rations
,ir-l$@l
"ffi
S
),-a
L
en*mlfunctions
M Arqhfunrti*ns
o ffi R*plar*wt*re
Elirinst*$hre
l M Lkmrn8t*$rrE.re
I
,l
tochasticfun*isns
it M
C*mmonopemt.rsre
ffi
Surfac* cpamtrons
ffi
f;rnverf pir*sJplygonsjswfac*
.a
l-d
l-r
___.
t-ffi Velcci, ccnversian

tt ffi kmenconv*mion
f-a
_t
lplhe strike
af $'re approximafedfaultplane.
_<
td
--JL
.r<
_\.{
-F
"-
Set the Distance value.

214. Fault lnterpretaton
Petrel Geophyslcs
_1
u
-,r
L-
L_-_-__-
Click Bun and the actrve fault is moved laterally east 0rwest
depending on whether the drstance is set in positive or
I'
LL'
LI'
I----t
negative value.
I----
I-.J
r__-l
I_-_r
I---i
L-
U
U
L_=.r
r=__,,i
J=--
L.
r_.
l_
l_
u
l_
I
-4,__J
-l
---l
------J
rr---J
_::-:
.:-.-r:1l,rS
CS
Fa!
terpretatlof . 215
-l
-l
L-.J
.1'i,s
= t
H'.. ;
Procedure
Displaying and Annotating Faults
This procedure shows you how to change the display settings of the
fault in the lnterpretation and 2D or 3D windows.
ln the settings for a 2D or 3D window,fhe
Surface option also
is
available.
1.
Right-click on the fault inlhe lnterpretation folder and open
2.
the Settings dialog box.

0n the Style tab, change one 0r more of these options for the
l,-
:-J
r-l
.t
-
l-J
fault display settings.
f-J
Points
Displays points for the fault stick. You also

can change the color and size of the points.
:!
Lines
Allows you to change the color, width, and

style of the Fault stlck.
line
Dlsplays the projected location of the same

fault on the previous section. You also can
change the color, width, and style of the lines
-4
projections
Name
Allows you t0 annotate and display the name

of the fault rn the lnterpretation window.
Surface
wlndows, displays the surface

for the co-related fault.
l,-
L-.J
L-4
-,!
.J
\.J
For 2D and 3D
-=-+
l-r
=i
.<
\-r
<t
td
:+
<l
d
-+L-
216
Petrel Geophys cs
'-'
Seiting:ior'Fuitinterpretaiion
l.
ffi
=",5;L*l
Points
./
Shsvr
;
I
:
urface
sho*
Llolor;
Specifi+d
Tran:paren*y
Material:
Plastic
Ltr't-i lr* -_l b rl.l_l
lau t llerpretation .217
L-l
_:r
l-J
-l
Clean Faults
Performing fault interpretation in both strike and dip directions causes
the fault sticks to be lntersected, increasing the amount of work to be
done during fhe
Fault modeling and Pillar gridding
L..d
processes.
-dl
f.d
It is hlghly recommended that you use the Create clean fault operation
to clean the fault sticks prror to modeling them. Running this operation
ensures one directlonal sticks based on dip and azlmuth.
fr
riri
LJi:in tr.ii
<l
Faults
Gleaning
1. ln the- Fault interpretation Settings > 0perations tab,
Procedure
i:l il
\d
expand Convert points/polygons/surfaces.

J
<,
\
<
"!d
l--,J
-_-L
.J
_
I
..l
Select Create clean fault.

218.
Fau
t lnterpretation
Petre Geophysics
Click Run
Fault Autotrackng
lf the fault ge0metry is not too complex, Fault autotracking rs a useful
tool that you can use to get a quick view of a fault system or to
interpret faults in more detail.

The Fault autotracking meth0d uses existing fault sticks as seeds to
extend the interpretatron throughout a selsmic cube based on how the
autotracking parameters are set. You set these parameters on the
Autotracking tab
in the Settings dialog box of the interpretation fault
Method
lf you are working with conventional selsmic cubes, use the Voxel
corre atron meth0d. lf you are working with Enhance edge detection or
Ant volumes, use the Maximum value method. Lower values will
restrict the autotracking.
Fau
nterpretation .219
tL
Search
The Search area has these options.
o
.
lncrement: lnterval between two segments to tracl(, taken in

the horizontal tracking direction.
Range: Number of voxels in which to search for the best
position.
Elasticity
L<
Ld
lf you select fhe (Jse elasticiQ check box, the faults can change
shape at the top, the bottom, or both but the other parts of the fault
L--
remain fixed.
lf you do not select Ihe (Jse elasticity check box, segments are
tracked by keeping the faults the same shape as the seed segments.
Tracking
Ld
I
lf you select lhe Between seeds only check box, segments are
tracked between seed segments only rather than throughout the entire
_\-
seismic cube. When the fault is tracked, fhe Fault interpretationfolder

in the lnput pane will have a new attribute named Tracked. Use this
attribute to drstingursh between tracked and seed segments.
-L
You can undo the autotracking by clicking the Undo icon in the Function
toolbar.
-t-
220.
Fault Interpretation
Petrel Geophysics
Procedure
1
Tracking Faults
i.1'-'--':.1
Create a new fault interpretatron and interpret it manually on
ii.,l
r:*
t-r:n:S-g+rin:3i
one or two seismic lines.
2. Adjust settings on the Autotracking tab.

3. With a seismic cube active, either:
a. Right-click the fault in !nput pane 0r in the 3D wlndow and
select Track faults.
El
:f-
ersmrc
$:.* l+nrages
B q: f*ferp surv*y mclssb flfe-rs
, S ,-f-,i lnterpretationfolder
, tk i-t: Jl?nrlerydrc/{/sri:n ftP.rs
,' & i:l Seismic horion-i
" *; : Seismic horizon 2
.-.
ilil:ffi.,
.' ault interpretatton 2 L-ti
1
..
' Fault interpretatton 3 m

Fault interpretation a
il;
ffi
{lr , cuiaed Horizon
l:", lVlanual lnterpretatro L4
\;! . Fsultinterpretetions k
{+.t Faull interpretation E
:' : Fault nterpretation I ^
,[i
. Faultrnterpretation 3
Fault interpretation 1
.b-i
i-l Fauli interpretation 1l : r*

' Fault interpretation T '-'
Jt il faun inerprettion !i fl/
"i:
Jttt i--J Fault interpretation Sf
ett Copy of Fault nterpr l=
l1tt .. CopyofFaultnterpr y*.
Jrtt
'.
f nnr; nf trr
Petrel Geophysics
rlt
Cr,py aulri irr,ler*rtatisil {data oniyl
intornr 9
f avEi-t t.} prnis

{cnve-: tc pclygcns
Track:
fults
tniErprPtst;0n Elnqe!' .,,

lnsr ;n-erpre:ricn a::riru:e
Fault
lnterpretatlo
221
b.
ln fault Settrngs, click Track.
"r" ;
,'., ' j ;o^ r"
stui
r--J
+
opereriore
lLlliBlilel
Ir'etl,od
l-#- Choose nethod alltomaticaly
'.:'..
1'..
n.,... ., : , ..
SearEh
...
,.
0.65:
c
s5
--
lflcrerent
Range:
g fop
'"
l0
iJi Use elasti.ity

i
-.. Tp
i
I , Bnltan
t,
End bottEm
Eeteen see,Cs anl-
-4
The fault extends along the seismic cube, as shown in the figure.
222.
Fault lf terpretatlon
Petre Geoprys
cs
r--{
r,_-
E
I--
Procedure
&
r=rE-{
F--__i
Ulitr*ties
ffi Hakefeditpolygaas
ffi rulate/*uit surfce
ffi NaUe simple grid
** Train rstimatinn mudel
a---1
ar=f
f
Digitizing a Fault on a Surface
Activate Make/edit polygons under Utilities.
:
E-
ffi
ffi
;
{
frlap-based rnlume calculatinn

't'''";t'
:ii'"
''
Ljirr:*ii;!;-i'
i;i *piimi:*ri,rri:
Ulohal grrd crarsenrng
frtateeAit annntatinns
*r
:
I
E
ffi
^;r
Display a surface in a 2D window

{'
'.:,.#
IL.T
:.:fi
{;}
The d gitrzed po ygon
can be converted rnto Fault
interpretation.
i:t
-.
-L.-
Ef-{
r=-
F
6jb
.,
-i{
r-j
,:J
.l
r.\j
,lll
ft
retfel Geophys cs
F:uI lterOretation . 223
J.
Click Start new polygon on active set of polygon*

and digitize the fault plane on the surface displayed.
3{
-T
I
a
I
4.
A new polygon displays in the lnput pane. Right-click on

the polygon, open the settings dialog, and select the
display options.
-|
.I
J
I
I
I
224.
Fau
t lnterpretation
Petrel Geophys
c.
,J
Restrict Mode
Restrict node ls useful for interpreting faults in 3D windows
and
showing the horizons and fauits only where they intersect in the
displayed selsmic sections.
.'i.
Procedure
3D
Restricting lnterpretation Displays in a
lj:i
Window
1
2.
liii,*"eE
,il
,&ii
,
i.E
ts.qii.*
Display interpretations and seismic lines in a 3D window

To view only interpretations projected along seismic lines,
click these icons in Function bar:
Click
!ff
for active interpretation.
Click
ftl
for all visible interpretations.
Petrel Geophysics
-.i
Fault Interpretation
225
JL.-
I^J
].-
Faults
lnterPreting
these exercises you will learn how to rnterpret and edit faults
Exercises
ln
in
Petrel and use the lnterpretation manager.
L-J
--J
L.
Manually lnterPreting Faults

of
Good fault interpretatlon often leads to a better understanding
the sub-surface geology. ln this exercise, you will manually interpret
faults to get hands on training in fault interpretation'
1.
Activate fhe Seismic
Processes
2.
interpretation
process in the
Pane.
Display the selsmic section in a Intetpretation window or

3D window. For this exercise, you will llmit the fault
interpretatlon on the cross-lines.
3.Bight-clicklnterpretationfolderlandselectlnsertfault.
You also can use the Seismic interpretation toolbar to
lnsert faults.
The new fault appears in the same folder' A fault is stored
in the actlve lnterpretation folder in the lnput pane'
4.
Bight-click the newly inserted fault, open the Settings

dialog box, and rename the fault cldspin-E10'
5.
6.
'
0n the Functon toolbar, click lnterpret fauhs
in
elther
470
lnterpret the Cldspin-F10 fault on cross-line
an lnterpretation window or 3D window'
B.
ffi
Double-click to break the fault stick.

lnsert at least three more faults and name them
Cldspin-F2 O, Cldspin-E3 0, and
10.
11
Cldspin-
Bepeat SteP 3 through SteP 5.

In the General intersection player, set the increment 1 5 '
the seismic volume and interpret the faults

across the survey. You will use these faults later in the
. Work across
trainlng.
jt,,
J-/
-y
-y
ts
;!<
tE
Petrel Geophystcs
-,
E4 0.
9.
:.J
L.J
Editing and Manipulating Faults using the Function

Toolbar
S=
^
s-lc
interpreters often have to edit and manipulate their fault

ln this exercise, you wrll edit the faults.
-=':r:ration.
0pen an lnterpretation wind and display a few

interpreted faults from the lnput pane.
0n the Function toolbar, click Activate faullhorizon
';l
(Shift+S)
'%
to actrvate the Fault segment.
Click on the fault stick to be activated. The color of the

fault is highlighted when it is active.
0n the Function t00lbar, click Select and add/edit point
;H-
(E).'t+ to edit the
Fault segment. You now can move the

points on the fault or add new points to the fault segment
to mark the fault ge0metry accurately.
Delete a part.of
I
q-r
the entire Fault segment by clicking
r"r
(X),#
Delete
on the Function toolbar. Clicking on the
active fault deletes the two adjoining points on the
segment.
During your interpretation, identify which fault elements
belong together:
a.
b.
c.
0pen a 3D window and display an interpreted fault.

Use the Bounding box
select (B) ,", h-' tool to drag
an
area around related fault elements to select them.

For better control of the point positions, digitize points
on a time
slice.
ir,.:
Alternatively, use Select singte point i*bj, then Ctrl

+ left-click to select the fault elements (click the line
segments between the nodes, not the nodes
themselves).
7
Hight-click the active fault inside the 3D window and select
Move selection to new. A new fault object appears in

the active Fault interpretation folder with its own color.
Note that you also can use the lnterpretation window for
this process.
o
o.
Bepeat Step 6 to make a new selection and create a new
fault object.
Petrel Geophysics
Fault
Interpretation. 227
-J
!--
Editing and Manipulating Faults using the lnterpretation
Window
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Activate fhe Seismic

Open an
interpretation
f..-
process.
Interpretation wlndow.
Make a copy of a fault (in this exercise, use Cldspin-F20)

and display it in the lnterpretation window.
Step through the seismic line until the digitized points are
visualized on the fault. You might have to change the step
lnterval number to locate the points.
ln the lnput pane, make the fault active.
Alternatively, y0u can select it from the Seismic
interpretation tool bar.
0n the Function toolbat click Select and ediVadd points
.E
(E):.H
1
B.
Move a point in the lnterpretation window by clicking on

it and dragging it to another location (the point turns yellow
when it is selected).
Move more than one
point.
ffi
point I ]to
Press Ctrl and click
activate the points that you wish to move.

Clrck on the fault segment to activate all points along
Select single
that, ggment, then cllck
Select and ediVadd points
(E)r-_E
9.
-r'
ts
-/
L--
,.
)-.J
,+
ts
Left-click where you want to add points.
on.
Click Gut segments
iltr
(T)
"-!'i
=4
-v
.-/
.,..J
.
Click on the fault segment. The fault is cut into two
-J
ri.
"
segments.
L-J
4l
)
Gutting a Fault Segment

1 .
ln the lnput pane, activate the fault segment to be edited
-!i
a. Activate the fault stick,

b. Click Select and edit/add points (E)tffi
228
r.J
-l
10. Add points.
2.
3.
L.J
them. Use the Undo or Redo icons as needed.
by toggling it
:l
L..-
Press Ctrl and click on selected points or lines to clear
c.
..{
^-J
Petrel Geophysics
-l
L,,.J
Joining Two Points
1.
2.
3.
Activate the fault segmenttote edited by clicking it.

CIick
Select single pointi-$-i.
Press Ctrl and click the two line segments to be joined
0bserve that all points belonging to these two line

segments turn yellow.
4.
f;,r1
Click
Join selected points
(J)ffi
ro connect the faults.
Using the lnterpretation Manager for Handling Faults

1. ln the lnput pane, right-click your active lnterpretation
folder and select lnterpretation manager.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click lnsert new fautt
[.&j
0pen the Settings dialog box.

Double-click the first cell of the row for the newly inserted
fault.
0n the Info tab, rename the fault
EauIt rnt
Manager
and click 0K.

Highlight Fault_lnt_Manager in the lnterpretation
manager spreadsheet and click Move selected
,r=.
interpretation to another interpretation folder [t{l

ln the Move to folder dialog box, selecf lnterpretation
folder I and click 0K.
Petrel Geophystcs
Fault
lfterpretation . 229
-l
--r
L-J
Displaying and Annotating Faults

During seismic interpretation, y0u can display and annotate your
interpreted faults.
1. 0pen an lnterpretation window and display a fault.

2. ln the lnput pane, right-click on your active fault and open
3.
the Settings dialog box.

0n the Style tab, select the different options for displaying
and annotating the faults. Play with the different settings
to familiarize yourself with these options.
a$ngr far'Frull
k!*rpxls*l
_l
f.J
-_l
t--a
:_l
l--a
-_.1
lr-
v-,
v
v
--
_-
v
v-
-1
-..a
=
:!.,
t--r
230
Petrel Geophysics
-.'
-J
Review 0uestions
You have two interpretation folders in your project
under
the .Sersmrc main folder. you have just realized that some
of your key horizons and faults are residing in one

interpretation folder and some in another. you now want
t0
move allof them into one folderto be able to manage
them
properly. How will you do this in petrel?
During your fault interpretation, you want to quickly select
another fault on the seismic section. Which icon or shortcut
can you use to do this?
Summary
ln this module, you Iearned about:
o
.
o
o
.
interpreting faults in petrel

using the fault interpretation Function toolbar and fault
settings
manually picking faults
manipulating and editing faults

tracking faults.
Petrel Geophysics
Fault lnterDretation o 231
Module 4
Horizon
lnterpretation
ln this module, you will learn howto interpret horizons in Petrel.

Various horizon interpretation techniques, such as Seeded 3D and 2D
autotracking, horizon operations, and making surfaces, wlll be
discussed.
Learning 0bjectives
a
a
access and use the horizon interpretation Function toolbar

change horrzon settings and parameters
open and use the lnterpretation manager
interpret horizons using different techniques

use these interpretation tools:
.
.
.
Seeded 3D autotracking
Guided autotracking
perform manual interpretations
edit horizons and parent/child relationships

lter i nterpretations
fi
correct horizon problems using horizon operations (bulk shiftino

and smoothing)
a
a
flatten horizons
annotate horizons.
Seismic lterpretat 0n Preparat 0n
233
in Petrel
Horizon lnterpretation
ln Petrel, y0u can choose different technrques to rnterpret your seism
Lesson 1
horizons, depending on the time that you have available, accuracy

required, and, more importantly, the size and quality of your seismic
data set.
Essentially, these techniques can be classified into two major

categories. autotracking and manual interpretation. There are several
autotracking techniques, which will be dlscussed in detail later ln this
module.
ln this context, suppose y0u are working on a data set from a complex
tectonic regime where nolse, reflector contlnuity, signal strength, and
structuration are major challenges" You might constder using manual

interpretation because it allows you to draw on the seismlc event.
However, you also could use autotracking by selecting good
t-
autotracking parameters.
t-
Similarly, workrng on data sets from a less complex tectonic regime

with better reflector continuity and signal strength can significantly
enhance the autotracking results, savrng you time and effort.
ln essence, horizon interpretation is a combination of different
techniques. For example, the selsmic event that you wish to pick
depicts strong amplitude and continuity in one of the surveys; howevei'
it gradually looses its amplitude and continuity as the subsurface
geology changes over an area. ln this case, ustng autotracking in the
lL
tt
]L
high amplitude area and manual interpretation in the remaintng area

can be useful.
ln this section, the baslc workflow for horlzon interpretation is
discussed. The focus will be on baslc techniques of selsmic

rnterpretatron. Tying seismic events to well data ls not discussed
After you are familiar with the workflow, you can employ it usrng well
data to pick your selsmic horizons.
234. Seismic lnterpretation Preparati0n
1l-
Function Bar lcons for Horizon lnterpretation
.-
These icons are active when the Seismic

activated.
t7
el.*
ts
Interpretatioz process
is
x S :# I &. :1 ? H q f,#,l.* % *f:$: * *l &..r
ffi
'*
*.
re
l4;
%,
i
&
'
10
11
&
12
lnterpret grid horizons IH]

Seeded 3D autotracking [Shift+A]
Seeded 2D autotracking [A]
Guided autotracking [G]
Manual interpretation [U]

Paintbrush autotracking (resize +/-), [0]
Actve box autotracking [Shift 0]

Autotrack inside polygon
Select interpretation point
Activate Fault
Horizon [Shift+S]
Selection paintbrush (resize: +/-) [Shift + Bj

Bounding box select
Eraser (resize +/-), txl
Petrel Geophysics
Seismic interpretti0n Preparation
235
1--
Horizon lnterpretation Techniques
Petrel offers different methods to interpret your horizons.
.
o
o
.
o
o
o
,-
Guided autotrackinq
-!-
Manualnterpretation
Paintbrushautotracking
Active box autotracking
Autotrack inside polygon.
I\-
ts
-
l--
'Ll
_J
\--{
LI
EI
t-.
r-j
-l
---:,-*-
i;t,
!'<a
J
Lr
_l
236. Seismic Interpretation preparati0n

Petrel Geophysics
.-
Horizon lnterpretation Workflow

The main workflow for horizon rnterpretation is the same for all
methods.
1.
ln the Processes pane, activate the Seismic
interpretation
pr0cess.
2.
3.
4.
lnput pane, activate the
ln the
horizon.
Select the seismic line that you wish to interpret.

ln the Functron toolbal click
Interpret grid horizons
'Bi
and
select the interpretatron method (for example, Seeded 3D
5.
autotracking or Guided autotracking).

Pick the event that you wish to rnterpret.
ln areas with poor data quality or complex geology, the autotracking

technrques can be difficult to use. ln such areas, manual interpretation
can be a way to interpret the seismic data. With manual interpretation,
you click on key picks and Petrel interpolates between those picks.
You can rename both the
lnterpretation folder and the new seismic
horizons on the lnfo tab of the Settings dialog box. You can have
multiple interpretation folders and you can add subfolders if necessary.
However, it is recommended that you manage your interpretation and
rnterpretation
older caref ully, because having multrple interpretation
fo ders can be confusing later in the project.
lnterpretation windows and on

most seismic lines and displays (for example, in-line, cross-line, random
You can interpret horizons in 3D and
line, arbitrary line, and well rntersection fence).

The undo/red0 steps are limitless. These steps are saved for each
horizon, but lost when Petrel is closed.
r:ire
Geophysics
qe.mic lrlprp'erar 0r Preparal
.237
l-l:i.'i*&i:
[ii -*
F:
Procedure
1.
ei4
tri+f,:n=,!
Creating or Inserting a New Horizon

lnse
Bight-click on lnterpretation folder 1 and select
seismic horizon.
Srcr ret:'gs
ntarp
* iLi *eiemic horirca

3D
rSpjmig
q {: !n'in 3.8
@fi xliae:l7n
r i(l
SE:rd
*e!fi!*
irom iludiD
IE
Impc {ea sl*(iion'i
,,
(xi:ori, , ,
slb]
# i-"1 ,tuz
ll rtur
'#
' # lll ,tu+
nEiel8 , ,
''
Clrt.!
aclli]i {r'turgrri
*
a
BF.1::ffi**
li
Subscris
rB i-r 20
: ff rj
a: I.rdi
_*..*** *
:4nd {rciurs,}}
-4uie aoi*r ii
5aui .iafi iqrk Ehie in:e.r1in g
Cn!,e* ic interpretaiiet
Csnrer": i8 inierpfe:rtl*n {optifiied te.
;al
llterprqialiei fi itsqe., . .
-t-
lnsen se,srrc lorizon
r inrtr faul:
# irseit ;niBrprta1in
ildsr
-.L.
Alternatively, create a new horizon by clicking the Create new

horizon icon on the Seismic interpretation toolbar.
lllSeismi.
{.lsi?ultj
Ilo
hcr;zo seltrl
4,
Selgmrc
rre I
Nc restoralion 2rl mo
Activate fhe Seismic interpretatioz process and display the

seismic line you wish to interpret in an lnterpretation
window or 3D window.
t-
f*
&238
Sersmic Interpretation Preparation
PefeL Geophysics
,L
-
StigBphy
:+ Surfae sttributes
'i; Autsmti{ fault extraction
lY1 h,lake velocity model
:'-;icr3r;l,irrsl
ffi Geabady interprtairon
i'. li,iiiii. snii ila
B h,lEke restoEtjon 2D rodel
lrocaure, framesark
Comer poinl griddin

Pr0perty Eodeliac
4.
Activate Seismic honzon 1-in the lnput pane and click
tnterpret grid horizon iffiiunO then one of interpretation
5.
ron,
*3:$&&.#
in the Function toolbar.

Click on the seismic event that you wish to pick as Seismic
horizon 1.
a.
Hold down the left mouse button and move the cursor In
the directron of interpretation.
b.
c.
Either double-click or press N to break the pick.

Continue picking the seismic event across the fault on the
s
Geophysics
ecti
n.
Seismlc nterpretation Preparati0n. 239
tl
t.
_I
L.J
_l
-l
L--
-J
:E--
-l
L-
tr
tr
l--J
-_l
L-r
_l
t-rl
>l
)
F
r'
jl
--
Go
l-.r
the
to the next seismic line by either selecting from
-L
General intersection player or pressing PageUp/PageDown'

jump to the next seismic line by
Set the increment t0 use t0
nt.tlng
tH
value in the Plane Step field on the Function toolbar'
-L
i-
B.
<
(in this case' an rn-line)

Choose an intersecting sesmic line
point where Seismic horizon t has been picked
that shows the
onthecross-|inetoaidinpickingtheeventonthein-line.Build
l-
a loop across as you work on the data set'
Petrel Geophysics
_-L
+1L
f*rFearaX#rt lGry:l
fnerl -
rtt - Seit$itT:r 1-}|q.-riet35
-__:----'------rjF;:r--
'E',*c.sl;r''
:.A .
=vffi
X,_ir
4:i
k?B
ln an lnterpretation window, an active horizon displays a

sectr0n of the survey where the horizon has been interpreted
Petrel Geophyslcs
Selsm c lnterpretation Preparatl0n
'
241
J
_l
L-
-l
\--J
-J
--J
L----
-l
-l
1--J
-l
t--J
--
/ft-, L6r4 .-'
_l
t.
-)
L*
-_l
5l
_1
E
F
242. Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparation
Petrel Geophysics
Autotracking
As discussed briefly the previous lesson, autotracking is a powerful
Lesson 2
in
toolto
use for interpreting horizons, particularly in areas with good
reflector c0ntnuity, srgnal strength, and data quality. ln this Iesson, you
will learn about different types of autotracking and the parameters that
impact the autotracking results.
Guided Autotracking
With Guided autotrackrng, you choose two 0r more points and the
trackrng finds the best route between them. This option gives you a high
degree of control to determine how the interpretation will develop.
li
Procedure
1.
,i* ii!
lr,.r::li
Performing Guided Autotracking
ln Input pane, actrvate and display the seismic line for Guided
Autotracking in an lnterpretation or 3D window.

4g
2. Click
';' lnterpret Grid horizon ffi
"&
c
47
and Guided autotracking
Cllctr along a reflector to select the starting and ending
points. The interpretation follows the seismic event between

the two seed points.
Petrel Geophysics
Seismic Interpretatl0n Preparation. 243
L
519
536
446
4
)
554
4f6
)
,-
h
L----
N- ,---
&
l,-.-
Double-click 0r press the N or H key io end an tnterpretation
L-
segment to break the pick.
lL-L
L
244.
Selsm c lnterpretat on Preparat 0n
Pet el Goph , r
Seeded 2D Autotracking
,^i ith this type of autotracking, y0u choose 0ne seed p0int and the
'rorizon is tracked rn the direction 0f the displayed intersectt0n (crossne or in-line) based on the autotracking parameters. The horizon
continues tracking untrl it n0 longer meets the specifred parameters due

to a fault plan, amplitude decay, or reverse polarity.
I'
---J
I---
I_-
aaIII--
--r
II--
I_--
Procedure
Performing Seeded 2D Autotracking
1.
ln lnput pane, activate and display the seismic line for
2D Autotracl<ing in an lnterpretation or 3D window
Seeded
:@
Click
lnterpretGrid horizon
and Seeded 2D
E.
Autotracking ,+F'
Clrck once along a seismc event. The
interpretation follows the event to each side of the point

selected and stops when an abrupt change in an amplitude
value occurs.
Repeat the procedure for other segments and lines.
f
f
-f-5
If----z
I_-
f
,tu
tl_-"
--.
fr.
--
a--a
Petrel Geophysics
Seismic nterpretati0n Preparation
245
J
:
l--J
Seeded 3D Autotracking
The basic workflow for Seeded 3D autotracking is similar to other
horizon interpretation workflows. However, the real control for Seeded
3D autotracking comes from different options on the Autotracking tab
in the horizon Settings dialog box. These options allow you to pick
horizons that require minimum quality control from the interpreter.
You can choose 0ne 0r several seed points and the horizon is tracked
outward in alldirections from these seed points. When the reflectors

are of good quality, this method is a very efficientway of interpreting
through the seismic cube.
:t
-_l
--.
t--J
-_t
lsa
_l
l-..J
-_l
.$*
=s
Procedure
1.
3D Autotracking
Performing Seeded
- lnput
pane, activate and display the seismic cube to be
ln the
auto tracked. Display the seismic trace data in an
lnterpretation
Click
autotracking
i.
3D
ClrL on the seismic event to be
autotracked. The interpretation expand over the entire cube

o
J.
:l
--a
-)
or 3D window
lnterpretgld horizon iB:tf,.n Seeded
--a
Alternatively, 0pen the Settings dialog box for the horizon.

Choose between peak or troughs, give a seed point on a
seismic section, and click on 3D Track to expand the
interpretation.
1-.
--l
l.-r
LI
_l
:
l--J
L.
_J
F
l-r
t-..,a
ts
246 o Seismic Interpretation Preparation
-_"{..____
Pefrel Geophysics
* s*{** *r ':*r{
,'
je
!-ry*.
rs'affi
ffiffi
l.;..,ryqfr:.. -fry:; S..r
ry-q
rrr./ .+-d
LeC
.*tpy.-1X !rsa(!i*l
56* h:
- lurlq
il 1.5i:nal**u* a l*lr-rr*.! Ps*are4t4
le*ffi,...,@$1,-.,,...
!r*{?
ik&e !e*fi{}
? 5sd.er,*
:-*l
_jl
.*
.i
:!
Vrr.r{
ils
ij
1:
rBg*!,{i eri
9J4r.16
,i:tl
J!Ir
rGl
i.l!!
Petre Geophysics
Seismic nterpretatiOn PreparatiOn. 247
-r
_l
]---i
lu
I
-1:.
{'ii
{}il
_t
_t
]--a
_t
_l
--a
_l
f,--a
_l
F.
*i0
a--
l-
-l
]r-.t
-_l
L-a
-_l
LI
t--
Li
L;
L
Autotracking Tabs and Settings

Autotracking tab in the horizon Settings dralog box has different
options and settings that gives you good control of your autotracking.
The
There is n0 recommended set of parameters for autotracking because it

varies from horizon to horizon, depending 0n the character of the
seismic event that is autotracked. Therefore, the focus here will be on
the parameters available in Petrelto help you decide on the best
options for your autotracking.
2il8
Seismic Interpretati0n Preparation
Petrel Geoph\/slcs
h..-
Use the
a
Autotracking tab to control the way your horizons will
be
utotra cked.
ift
kttinqs ior'Seissd horizon
Seismia vol!me:
Priorityr
ffi
1'
i{-i,ry.":'r
.,.;s
Ouality:
Amplitlde & Prurnrly

i.:-.I
Pk
NQ-era cantric
Aalc
*:
.i
-;B
.,.i
or trcqhs
.q-jl
PaEfieters
Amplirde
3t
=Ji Seerl co*fdence:
i,arl+..r
9.
i1r.il
I Velue rsnge:
i.Ll*
L,,r
Dip
2.t0
=P{
lt
isysmet*cal
-;
ii
?*
l:
2 BE
Symmetrical
Optimize for dipping teffeclors
,-a* l-Jse wavelet
lracking
;orelatewilh:
SedtE
Correltslion qualily:
.t
lj]
samplete
B5
aj
Symmetricalsidows
.ij
Above: 12
samplesiSSms)
IJ
Belaq 1l
samples[48ms)
Length: :.i i sanrplesfgGs)

I
-I":1tll':::1Y-
P:trel Geophys cs
-{--l::!, - Gr
l?t*ry.:-l
Elr-.:-l hGg-r
Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparati0n. 249
fr-.
b_-.-
I p'*.t**" 1-l;-i;;*t"-'.
L--
B
l
LateraJ limits
Eoundary
I
i
i-,i
polygor:
lh
Stp aivisiblefaults
Verticallimits
Uooer t*
oo::l
i--lLou"r ,.*"
i_i
Vertical
,
rend
l-'-
rsnge:
dala.
m5
,!
ms
91":' :l
-
t
lkr
f.,in-zer
ilric
lr-:l-:
l--
L
fili
r...r 1,..sluil
tang:
ii
fisi :ri5t"
;r
L.r,ih
r:irn*r
'Seedjlocking
3D Seeds ck
Viaible points
Selected points
seedfller:.*l:
I nk filior
i*_,
,:
lr-.-.
-,
..J
._-_'.,,
-,
I--a
Ll
)
'>-
'-l
j,1 Ovenide
Itrlax
venical
l-i
rj
smDleslS
i--=:----",
I JU bnp
-l
The activated seismic cube is picked up automatically. Use the blue

arrow to change the seismic cube.
ffi
ettings far 'eisrnic hor;zan 1'

pretisn
_.,]
l.J
L-l
_J
-,
']
A*otrarking
Esic 3x3
L-'
L-
Ll
--J
250. Seisr r lrLe.prerarion Preparattor
Petrel Geophyslcs
_l
l--d
Priority regulates the priority queue of available seed points for the
expansion process.
Friori: Anrplit*de & .:n

'l*lnllll
r --An:nlitude
prsxrmitv
risignat
,i
i:
i
This figure shows the comparative tracking results 0f the three seed
priority methods.
tr
Amplitude & Proximrty

Amplitude
Proximity
Petrel Geophysics
Se smic lnterpretation Preparati0n
251
-{a
Seed Priority
Priorie option regulates the priority queue of avarlable seed

points for the expansion process. Choose one of these values:
Ihe
Amplitude: Prioritizes picks of higher extrema for early

expansion, leaving lower extrema picks to expand later.
Proximity. Prioritizes picks with the shortest expansion paths
over picks with longer expansion paths
Amplitude & Proximity: Combines the first two methods.
The default priority is Amplitude & Proximity, which offers both high
quality growth and trmely finish of points close to the seeds.
Signal Feature
fhe Signal feature opton controls the feature to be tracked. Use the
Non-zero cenfric check box to toggle between these signal features
zero
n0n-zer0 centrc (traces n0t having a mean equal to zero, for
settings tor'Seismr hriEn 1'
Seismic v0lume
. i Sisnalfeature:
l=F
i,
-i
Non-ero
_l
t-
:l
:l
lb-J
l-r
:_l
"-l
centric (for example amplitude cubes)
example impedance cubes).
ffi
_)
l--J
l-
for tracking:
.
.
:t
L-.J
LI
7-t
Ll
)
)"-r
\-
mio
centric
l*
r-
Peks
Toggle off lhe lVon-zero centric check box to get these options
o
.
.
.
o
.
.
l.r
Peaks
--<
L-
Troughs
S-crosslng
Z-crossing
Peaks or Troughs
Any Zero Crossing

None (flat).
b
-
252
Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparati0n
Petre Geophysics
--
-.
Non-zero centlic
Canstrints
Peaks
lw
l-
:nlugns
S-crcssing
Z-cr*,tsing
Peak cr tr*ughs
Any zerc crossing
::i:*
I$ne tTltt
get these optlons:

Ioggle on the lVon-zero centric check box to
o
o
o
.
o
.
Local maximum
Local mtnimum
S-increasing
Z-decreasing
Local extrema
SIZ evolutlons.
Fj
Lrcal nrxtnrun'l
Ncn-zero centnc
L*r:at mininrunl
5-increasitrg
Zdecre*sinE
a
.ta
.-!*
s
lb
Lrcl extrenrunr
s1 e-volutlns
horizon interpretation is Peaks

The default for the tracking feature of a
,ui,,i'check box toggled off)' When you make
0r Troughs \Non-zero
the pick determtnes

the firsi autotracking pick, the amplitude at
feature setting changes
the
peaks 0r trughs are tracked and
*t rtf,.,
manually'
accordingly. You also can set Peaks or Troughs
Zero Crossing and Petrel
Similarly, y0u can setthe feature to Any
when you make the first
selects -crossing 0r Z-crosslng automatically
pick.
ili *
Petrel Geoph\/S cs
i. nt.,pr.tatio
I
n Preparati
0n'
253
The illustration shows what non-zero centric means. A time-based

SEG-Y plots along the time axis. A zero crossing for this represents a
local minimum or local maximum in the non-zero centric world. A peak
Lr--
in the zero-centric seismic represents an S-increasing feature while a

trough represents a Z-increasing feature.
lnpaderce
E-
lim*
L-_
L-_
T
r-
l-
J-
254. Seisr'c lrLerp e,otior
Preporarion
Z-Crossings
S-Crossings
Petrel Geophysrcs
L-
Ouality
--= Oualin'ooion on the Autotracking
:3i$
tab controls how stringently

pcinr
sse0
is checked before it is expanded.
=ti-ngr
fc:'Seismic ho.izon 1'
r=; i # *ir
AmplrtuCe&Prrmjty Nlon-lBr0
ualil,
[Entric
Peks
Qualifr.
Fehs
Vlidat*d
-1x3.
Vrlidtr=d 5.x5
Shoose one 0f these values for Ihe
Quality
0pt0n:
Basic 3x3: Checks the eight closest points against (only) the
seed p0int. This method will expand a seed p0intto its eight
closest neighbors, valrdating each against only the seed point.
The seed point expansion s d0ne using a 3 x 3 grid cell

validation to verify the eight neighbor traces of each seed
point. All eight neighbors 0f an accepted seed p0int must pass
the validation for that seed to be flagged expandable. The

tracking then expands in all directions. The cycle repeats as
each new accepted point (child) now becomes a potential
parent for all of its eight neighboring traces.
ln this technique, all eight neighbors are compared against
only the seed point to find a valid event. lf this phase fails, the
tracker stops, marking the seed point as non-expandable.
Validated 3x3: Checks the eght closest points against the seed
pornt and each p0int's neighbors. The first phase of this
method is the Basic 3x3 technique. lf the first phase is passed,
each event on the corner neighbor traces is validated against
its adjacent neighbors. lf all validations are successful, all
eight neighbor locations are accepted as potentral seeds and
the tracking expands in all directions. lf this phase fails, the

tracker will stop, marking the seed point as non-expandable.
Validated 5x5: Checks the 24 closest points against the seed
point and each point's neighbors.
Seisn'r c lnterpretati0n Preparation o 255
_t
L-
This advanced technique for tracking involves two phases that

g0 beyond the two phases described for the Validated 3x3.
These third and fourth phases expand 0ut to track/validate the
16 neighbortraces that enc0mpass the 3 x 3 grid cell area.
'
_l
_t
I--a
l--.
t****- - {
-_l
tr
*t
:.
**.'.*a{'*
--a
]
lE-J
-l
-_l
i--
,.--{
lE-
Validated 3x3
L,
Validated 3x3
Validated 3x3
f_-
Seed Point (black)

Potential child polnts (blue)
Accepted child picks from phase
1 and 2 (green)
-J
ll-
_l
i--a
_l
II
256 o
(e. riu
lt te p Ftat 0r Pr"patdt
ol
Petrel Geophysics
_t
-l
[-
Seed Gonfidence
-^,e Seed confidence option specifies the minimum value
for the
s: smic amplitude as a percentage of the seed point. The confidence
:,e determines how much slack the tracker will apply to the seed
,a ues when determinrng whether to accept or reject expansion points.
Picking an amplitude of 120 with a confidence level of 30%
will reject
amplitude values below 36. A high value makes the tracker strictet
, ielding fewer pornts, while a low value makes the tracker less
:iscriminate, yielding more points.
When you use this option with the 3D Track button, the confidence
level rs applied to each seed point, so a potential expansion point can
be reached from a seed pointwith a high value, but could be
unreachable from a seed point with a low value.
Value range
fhe Value range opfion allows you to specify a minimum andlor

maxrmum amplitude value seismic attribute to be tracked. Picks outside
of these amplitude limits are rejected. To quickly see y0ur amplrtude

range, press P on your keyboard and trackthe event. The amplrtude
values are displayed in the 0bject information area.
Doublet
Ihe Tracking rule oplion specifies which part of a doublet the tracker
follows. A doublet rs defined by a wavelet having four 0r more inflection
points and only two zero crossrngs. Set one of these values for the
Tracking rule.
.
.
Lower: Lower peak/through of the doublet.

Upper: Upper peak/through of the doublet.
The search window for the doublet feature is in samples and is linked
to the dip given on the Geometricaltab. By default, the search has a
minimum of four samples that it searches (even if the dip samples in
the Geometrical tab are smaller). However, if the dip samples on the
Geometrical tab are set to more than four samples, this search
window is used.
?errel Geophys cs
Selsm c lnterpretati0n
Preparatlon. 257
lr.-r
ffi
:l
Setrings for 'Seis.Ei. heron 1'
l*.-{
:t
t*-J
_l
--
-_l
lL-J
:-.1
--J
:-.]
tk
ts
)
|--a
t-
l-.r
L
E
-
L-t-
Minrmum attributes
Maximum atttbutes
Amplitude/reflection strength
Accepted maximum event
Accepted minimum event
Legal event region
E
E
Z (time or depth)
258. Selsmic lnterpretati0n
Preparati0n
Petre Geophysics
E
E.
Dip
Ihe Dip option allows you to optimize the autotracking parameters for
dipping reflectors.
fhe Symmetrical
check boxes control if vertical posrtion changes in

the in-line and cross-lrne directions are allowed to be symmetrical
(toggled on) or asymmetrical (toggled off). Using these options
increases your ability to fine tune the autotracking.
You can enter a numeric value or use the scroll bar to input a value
between 0 and'10. The defaultvalue rs 2. The dragrams show

asymmetry of the cross-hairs in either or both drrections (image
representations showing three traces with the selected input).
Toggle on fhe Optintized Jbr Dipping Refiectors check box to
activate a guiding plane that goes thr0ugh the neighbors of the dipping
reflectors (as specified by expansion quality, that is 3X3 or 5X5 points)
and uses its trend when autotracking the event. Using thts option can
increase the accuracy in areas where reflectors are dipping steeply.
Wavelet
When the (Jse wayelet tracking check box is toggled on, the
autotracker tests potential expansron points using the correlation of a
seismrc trace wrndow. Choose between these correlation methods:
.
.
Seed trace. Cross-correlate with the waveform of the seed
trace.
Adjacent parent. Cross-correlate with the waveform of the

adjacent parent trace.
Selsmic Interpretatl0n Preparatl0n
259
Dip
lrline
Crossline
i*
r-3 t r*il
il
i.i
lMi
2.8
[$
i - ttt
--
2.0
l;
Fl
smple*ltrace
r--li
{{J
-J
2.*C
lm*ietrical
L
;---j Opmize fcr dipping reflectcrs
y'
Usewavelettracking
Conelaie wilh
eedtr*ce
Correlation quality.
i{]
&.5
yn.rnreirical windcws
Cross correlaen
Above. 12
samples{48 msJ
Below: 12
samplesi4S m=)
Length: t:4 I samples{m]
t-
L
l*,ant *d :'l* fraqir
E:r:sl
Correlation Ouality
Ihe Correlation quali1t opti0n sets the correlation threshold at which

tracking willfail. Identrcal neighboring traces give a value of 1.0. The
Seed trace method has a default value 0f 0.5 and a range from 0 to 1.0.
The Adjacent parent method has a default value 0f 0.95 and a range
from 0.75 to 1.0.
These methods account for the drift in the correlatng waveform
c0mpared to the waveform of the original seed trace, as the distance
between the waveform and the 0rginal seed trace increases. ln this
case, a correlation quality less than 0.5 rs considered uncorrelated and,
consequently, the lowest correlati0n quality value avarlable is 0"75.
260.
Seismic rterpretati0f Preparation
Petrei Geophysics
L.
-I=-*
r_-
f
ff
f
I--<
--.
-'-
I-I---
l_-
--=
;rricti',ritttlr.ttr.! chcck bx ccntrols rf the ivindow tracking

r; r ie 'eni ar\,e ad beiow the picked seed p0int. Toggling the
-S',
--.-:-.:
acx 0n means that the tracking is symmetrical;toggling it off

^^eans ihat the trackrng is asymmetrical.
can enterthe distance above and belowthe seed p0nt by enterrng

e Jmericalvalue or using the sllder bars. The values are gtven as the
r-l,r,ber of samples
"rcr.l
The
totalwindow length
is defrned in the grayed out area named
Length. This value also is given as the number 0f samples.

The Cross correlatr0n rmage shows the horizon, seismic, and pickrng
parameters in relation to each other.
Constraints Tab
The Constraints subtab on the Autotracking tab has optrons for
lateral limits, vertical limits, using co-volume, and seed/locking.
f
f
E--
I--
f
f
f
f
f
---
r---
----r-r--5
f
-.-5
I--
I-
Petrel Geophysics
Se sm c lnterpretatlcr Preparat
0n.261
f
)-J
:t
la--
_l
-J
lL-J
t--
:l
th-J
:t
--J
_l
-.l
lHr
L,,.-.A
_t
L-d
L
_l
_l
b-l
l-a
--J
laterial Limits
the Lateral limits area has these options:
.
.
-
L
Boundary polygon: Allows you to specify a closed polygon

beyond which the autotracking rs not permitted to expand.
Stop at visible faults: Allows y0u t0 use interpretation faults in
the fault model to stop the autotracktng.
t-.
Vertical Limits
Ihe Vertical limits area
.
262. Selsmic Interpretatl0n
Preparatlolr
has these options.
Upper. Horizon above which the autotracking is not permitted
*<
!"L-
to expand. You can apply an offset to the upper horizon.

Lower: Horizon below whrch the autotracking is not permitted
to expand" You can apply an offset to the lower horizon.
Vertical range. Controls the vertical interval for the autotracked
horizon in project units. For example, if you specify a vertical
range from -1750 to -1790 ms, the resulting autotracked
horizon is limited to this vertical interval.
Trend data. A surface or another interpreted object that Petrel
will try and match (in shape) when tracking. Using this option
is recommended when trying to interpret a dipping event. The
seed expansion will take place only where the trend is defined.
Use Co-volume
When you select the (Jse co-volume check box, the autotracking uses
two seismic inputs instead of one. This area has these options:
Signal feature: Controls the feature to be tracked for the

second volume. This volume can be either zero centric or
.
o
non-zero centric. This option functions the same as the signal

tracking feature of the primary volume.
Seismic co-volume. Specifies the second seismic volume to
USE,
Usage: Defines how to use the two volumes selected as input.
Track if co-volume is inside value range. Finds the best
pick on the primary volume and uses this pick if the value
of its location in the co-volume is inside the value range.
Track on best volume. Evaluates points on both volumes
Try seismic volume then co-volume. Tries to track on the
and chooses the best evaluation.

primary volume first. lf no acceptable candidate for the
pick is found, it will try to track on the co-volume.
Value range: Uses only values within the set range for the
co-vo lu me.
Seed/Locking
the Seed/Locking area t0 determine what to do with
the existing interpretation. Most settings apply to both 2D and 3D
seeded autotracking. The lock and override filters are valid only for 3D
interpretation data.
For 3D seeds, use
Petrel Geophysics
Seismic lnterpretatlon Preparat on
263
L-..
Er
-l
-)
This area has these options:
o
.
.
o
.
.
in the active window.
Lock/override selected points: Uses only selected interpreted

points (for example, if you use the bounding box selection) in
the active window. The selected points will be a subset of all
visible points.
Visrble points: Uses all of the visible points in the current
interpretation as seed points.
Selected points. Uses the selected points in the current
interpretation as seed points
Points satisfying filter: Uses an interpretation filter to
determine which seed points are used in auto tracking
Lock/override filter: Uses only the interpreted points that
match the selected filter. You select the filter by using the blue
arrow. The 3D interp inclusion filterfolder found under the
lnterpretation folder provides the list of fllters that you can
0verride check box: Allows you to change between overriding
and locking interpreted points.
The Max. vertical parameter: Controls how much the vertical
reflector). The default value is set t0 two vertical data units.

3D Snap:Allows you to search within the defined Max. vertical
delta window for pornts defined as 3D seeds and snaps these
points to the selected Signalfeature. This button is used only
.
264 o Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparation
b.L
L
L
lr-<
E
L-
L--
select.
The search window used is two times the Max. vertical delta
value (that is, Max. vertical delta above and below the
Lock/override visible points: Uses all vlsible interpreted points
position is allowed to change from one trace t0 the next when

autopicking along 2D lines. Picks jumping to a vertical position
above this vertical limit will be ignored dulng autotracking.
-J
Ll
on 3D seismrc data.
lnstant undo and track: Available after a 3D autotracking has

been performed. Automatically displays any changes to the
autotracking parameters in the active window. This feature
will instantly undo the last autotracking step and redo a 3D
autotracking based on the new parameter settings.
3D Track: Starts autotracking using the specified parameters in
the Settings dialog box. 0nly 3D tracking is available.
lr
L
lEL
-L
i:L
t
\
-L
L.
tr
l--
E
f
f
I.
.J
f
I-4
--.-,{
Paintbrush Autotracking in 3D Windows

click and hold the cr0pped-volume so that some seed pornts fallwtthtn
the area. Points are tracked outward from the seed points, limited by
the cursor box (cropped volume). Dragging the box enables you to track
horizons wherever the cropped volume goes wrthin the seismlc volume
This tool works in both 2D and 3D windows"
Procedure
Window
Performing Paintbrush Autotracking in a 3D
1. Crop a small volume around the seismic horizon'

-, i{r'
'i' m
L-1 F+.
& fr
@ ui
Activate and display it in a 3D window with a partly

interpreted
horizon.
J.
'etrel
lnline 571
Hlitre 447
ie.;.
rrr rn the process toolbar

Click Paintbrush autotracking
Drag the cropped volume from the top side around some
seedpoints to start the 3D paintbrush autotracking.
Geophysics
Seismic nterpretat 0n Preparation '265
5.
*
r-a
Ouality control the interpretati0n.
J.
Paintbrush Autotracking
Points are tracked outward from the seed pornts, limited by the active
box size. Dragging the cursor enables the autotracker to track a horizon
interpretation following the cursor path.
Active Box Autotracking

Drag a (rectangular)rubber band to capture seed points within its area.
Within the active box, the autotracker tracks the horizon outward from
the seed points, limited bythe active box size. This toolworks only in
the 2D window.
Autotrack lnside Polygon

Along a time slice, drawa polygon t0 capture seed points. When you
have finished drawing the polygon, double-click. The polygon area is
now tracked. This tool works in both 2D and 3D windows.
l-
\-_
\L--
{
\-
ttL
L266
'
Seismic lnterpretation Preparation
Petrel Geophysics
tL.
-L__
a'
-L_j
f
I-d
Procedure
Performing Box and Polygon Paintbrush
Autotracking
1 .
Activate a seismic v0lume in the lnput pane and display the
|:
i:i: -.
i lt#
i'i'
iti:i!{rlj
ri
partly interpreted horizon in a 2D wnrdow.
2.
Click Paintbrush
r
3.
autotracking ry
. Paint the horizon
nterpretation outwards.
Resize the parntbrush auto tracker by pressrng the + or
key.
Seismic nterpretat 0n Preparation. 267
-t
L_J
L-..
4.
Click
Active box autotracking
& . Drag an area around the
seeds.
_l
r-J
ii
't:i
al,:
:_l
:l
h.-
-_l
.-J
iEf
5.
Click
Autotrack inside polygon
double-click to track inside.
t#i
O,r*
a polygon and
i-.l
=-_l
--{
>
--/
)--i
E
E
Lesson 3
Horizon Editing and Manipulation
- --.s ,:sson, you lvill learn about editing horizons and changing the
r s3 3'( settings.
Seismic Horizon Display Styles
-r:
:
Settings dialog box for horzon interpretations changes, depending

ch disptay window is active.
^ ,', r
''ou can display 2D and 3D interpretations as points or lines. You can
sel the colot type,and size/width and dtsplay crossing points as
s'r,mbols
(2D)or lines (3D).
Annotating a Horizon in an
Procedure
- Displaying and
1. Display the horizon interpretation in the lnterpretation
window
Eeja *i$,S.*t
i
[
arl
470
Petre GeophVslcs
:s
470
57!
4?0
!
4l
E4!
5&1
l?
Seismlc lnterpretati0 Preparati0n
269
r.--J
2.
0pen the Settings dialog box for the horizon and click the
Style tab.
l--C
_l
-l
ih-J
l--{
Hf
Set the display style for 2Dl3D interpretation and crosstng
points.
..-..-.* : r.l
l-t;s
il aP
Symbal: .H
ne:
l-r
4.
30
Dia+*nat aless
-_J
l-
:l
>i
)
lt
lL-
1&
LinenPe: --":'. Stileled

2
V{idth:
-
Choose the annotation to display on the seismic line.

A,nnotatrn
Nanre
Color:
Font
; E{3
t=
t-
E:
+
270
L.
Seisrnlc lnterpretation Preparation
r=
Procedure
1.
Displaying and Annotating a Horizon in a 3D
Display the horizon in a BD window.
ff
2 Set the display style for 3D interpretation

3. Manipulate the resolution slider bar.
ft
Setrngs for'Sesmic horizon
: _ Restrict mode
.l
2D interpretatioil
Clor:
,9.i
Lines
-':
EF*.ciiiEd
Lie tvpe
width:
,:-" Poinls sunbol:
olirl
-2
.;_ ln*.r,
ie
\li
ed
r-1. .
fti,n
Mex
&ry....] L::L...,'r ,;;rr"l
-i
Sersm c
lnterpretati0f Preparatio . Z7l
b-
lnterpretation
Displaying a Neighboring
Activate and display a horizon in the lnterpretation window'
Procedure
i-
272. Seismic lnterpretation Preparatlon
L_
2.
0n the Style tab, select Previous and Next to display

neighbor sections and set their style.
settiftgs tur'eirmi{ h0zsn 1'
ilitlim&.,;
2D nd 30 i*terpreiaon
Clr:
Neishbor sestins {:D only)
r, P',,,8,'i 1.rr
.,/ Nen
Color
'
ird
Lineirpe
widfi:
Navigate to the next lines
lnterpretation Editing
ln many cases, y0u might need to manually editthe interpretation to
clean up the picture before modeling the result further.
However, because an interpretation (and an instant quality c0ntrol 0f
the result in three dimensions)is quickto do in Petrel, deleting a larger
part of the interpretation and redoing it can potentially be just as
efficient.
The undo/red0 steps are limitless and are saved for each horizon. You
t3
Always check to see

which horizon or fault is
active (bold in the lnput
pane) before using undo/
redo.
can retrieve them by activatrng the horizon. Note, howevef that they
are removed when the project is closed or saved.
Petrel Geophysics
Seismic lnterpretation Preparatlon
273
J
)
*,-dl
_i
--
J
*
-,
F
:i--
H
Undo (Ctrl +
Z)/
z/
\*...
t-
Bedo (Ctrl + Y)
)
l--r
_L.
Select by polygon and Bounding box select
Selection Paintbrush
'!.
Parent-Child Editing
The autotracking uses a trace-to-trace meth0d of verifying and
expanding the seed point. When a point or a selection of points is
accepted, it becomes a parentto other potential child points that are
prcked from neighboring traces.
selecting parent p0nts enables you to investrgate the path that the
autotracker made to reach the selected point. Similarly, selecting child
points enables you to track subsequent points that originate from a
_-
}-
-.
t-
l-
mrsrnterpreted Prck.
274. Seismlc lterpretalion Preparati0n
Petre Geophysics
t-
Editing Parent and Ghild Points in an

Procedure
lnterpretation
1
Select the misinterpreted area and click on the Select single
point rcon from function bar.
N;i;l:':ii-i!
i,
This works only for
autotracked horlzons.
2.
Click Select parent pont l:Ll and click a misinterpreted

point. The path back to rts original seed pornt turns yellow
(; C ick on the Select

single point lcon from
function bar before selecting
parent points.
Click Select
child point
{:l and click the first wrongly
tracked point along the path. All points originating from lt turn
Vellow.
Fetre Geophvsics
s",,^
"op-o.io,
D"p".iorr275
:),.J
4
Delete the selection
X. fn. yellow ponts are deleted'
-l
-l
-J
LA
L-
L..J
-_l
lL.J
-rl
v
v
lnspector Tool
informatlon about
Using the lnspector tool is a quick way t0 access
changes interactively.
objeJts in your windows and visuallze setting
in a variety of
information
detailed
ThL lnspector window displays
tables'
and
forms, such as example histograms, charts,
You can move the
lnspector window and resize it'
You also can c0py
and paste all lnspector statistics.
of objects lf
Continuous mode: Displays a constant read-out
information
object
shows
this option is cleared, the lnspector
onlY when You click the object'
Auto resize: lnstantaneously fits the height of the lnspector
Transparency. Adjusts the background opacity of the

lnspector window. Move the slider from slde-to-side to
change from transParent to oPaque'
276. Sp
.m;c lrlPrplPtar 0''l Ptepatat
or
_1
L,
I
lEd
'
tool to the viewed content'
objectsinsidethelinkedwrndow.Tolinkawindow,activate
button
th window that you wish to link and click the Link
the lnsPector window'
L;-a
lnspector tool looks with these options'
.Windowlinking:Allowsyoutolinkthelnspectoft0aSpeCifiC
to
window. This means that the lnspector will react only
|-a
l-i
Settings
You can change how the
-L.
in
tr
tr
tr
lt-
0pens the
tool settings
Displays a constant read-out of selected objects
Adjusts the background transparency of the

Links the
lnspector tool to a specific window or all windows
(optional)
Petre Geophysics
Seisrnic nteipretation Preparation. 277
,-,J
_l
1.
-l
-.J
Using the lnspector Tool

From the View menu, open the lnspector tool.
Procedure
--J,
-_J
Fanes
--]
Tinr* player lasilgar

liiglhr!
:irulal*r'libr
L..J
2.
Click an object. The lnspector window updates to display the

settings for the type of object that you select.
:-l
t-.J
ll--J
-/
t--
--l
>-)
--l
3.
w
Manrpulate the object propertres in the lnspector window
and visualize the changes immediately.
tL-
I-
-L
i;.L.
E-
L,
L278. Selsmic lnterpretati0n Preparati0n
Petrel Geoohvs,::
i=
L-
Petrel Geophyslcs
Selsmlc
Lf
terpretatr0r Preparati0n . 279
Horizon Flattening in 2D
You can flatten individual lines on an interpreted horizon in the
lnterpretation and !ntersection windows. The interpreted horizon

does not have t0 be consistent over the entire line because petrel
allows for gaps in the interpretation, such as breaks over faults. These
gaps are interpolated linearly; you can interpret on the flattened
sections
-d
ir=.
ffi
! :;i sesilic
ii:
'
,@.y-
, B iii
t'mss,
/rF.F
e7
r7
srrye,,iE/r*, tu-s
&
7e
s3
i0
fft
699
?0 47a
?1r
470
71i
qa
754
4?
nereer;m OlA. r
' B y :Oeo **,

'*:;jffiEffi?.
ss
--
.liir j Fe*ideFBEtot rti

ill i : Fa{tiaieEieEuofr Z ffi
.'
". lo
F[rfteFreof
Faunrnrepreeoor4
-;s
'&'
l&,. litie s
:
l* v
ED
Rine
B
s
13
e
x
L"
Fi-
i&lF@i---E;",
iffir*c+... .. :.]]]:]:: .:] s
"
.-1
&
rir.rr +:rc*_
'f
tq Fri.ns
'T l1:EaGiiicn ir$:gs. , ,
s :is: iie.p.::il1n foj cr:fe su.rey i:j
ry
Add,?u!diE
l-a
L.
f1
L.
-4
h-,_<t
h.-
L.-.
tL-280
Seismic Interpretation Preparation
l--
Procedure
-his
Flattening 3D Volumes
1,r,'._."1ii
:|::' :... .||
procedure shows you howto flatten 3D volumes on interpreted

"orizons There are two ways to flatten a seismic cube.
1.
2.
Usrng the
i]i
] ....
Make/edit surface process, convert the holzon
interpretation to a surface.
Flatten a seismic cube:
a.
Activate the seismic cube that you wish to flatten.

Right-click the surface and choose Flatten active
seismic volume. A vlrtual flattened seismic volume
named Flattened 1 ls created. Also, a new folder named
Flattening surfaces is created. Use this folder to track
the hrstory of flattening operations.
Right-click the seismic cube in the lnput pane and select
lnsert flattened volume. A virtual seismic volume, Flattened
2, is created (but not yet flattened).
3.
i.---1.1,?.,f,,$1,.,,
SI
"
r..,,..,iir
rrrj,,
Seisnic
rr.:i,:::r,i:,:,.:jr:,riri*:ri:
ft
rbs-es
& : f , Irrto, u tr*, nr* i,n tr! s
Fr vl lteryrebrion blde. 1
-4
E ;t ,?rs-pn/c
,#ir.ffi
..
q ..: I ii"
fay )
Xl! z) :
L
L'
&
II
\c{Lse:ii.gs...
i. !:Nr1:c
1;iriere ilcil S:!Llic
:-.R. Lr:r !Pi.ii.il .
i{rai:...
a.f!:
irsiE f r!,cai sEicr :qd
q;eb;i..ilr
:di:
:abi.
End
r,ir!!iF!ql".
:ffirarcr;e
.,
fi.u::c:
aciiese iEcLrisiJl
I ari:d tr!.q,f-1
Dr. ic cajer:
c.:5y nr!
!G
lii
tciL:E 3-.
trrrs . .
ET
fJ
d
B
-..,,, ".------.,----.-..t ii
ioP.oe* tr
; i;t;i
,
.
a:ai !:fLr:u:: li+iLC(
{ie;is irqreirir rrl.rlc!!

Sur!J'
traaql=i,,,
;r:Erp.e:stlo ranrqp..
18..irEci.r,s5,! iiie! ..
i+ tmpot aat ;i lsFfl ir,li e i.ieaseailcil
Srdisrphy
!nsei .i.ssilnE inierseciion
Geophysics 'dl
L
P Seismic i * :ns+r 1ar sll.e itE'!e(iic
ffi vokrme at i{ex,rie.5*ii.:r alBre
!5 srriace
i Autonra
lvi Llake
ffi
Geobay
i:e:le aUeE tA)Jeui

E ldak rsr
LriEii? ErJa: :.JaE 1,au:
Seismic nterpretat on Preparation
o 281
;-a
i..J
r. & l-e.l lntery surv*y indusiott llets
i. F j faterpretaticn older 1
. B i*
Seisrr,te
'#ivim
@ i-:
t--J
-J
._l
lnline 635
T..J
&
il
t@
i_j ]fi-inea7{]
lnline 635
.]
--J
4.
ln the Settings dlalog box for the new volume, open the
tab and insert a Reference surface for flatteni
l--.d
L
eJtings lor"Flattened 1'
-r
--d
-/
-/
l-t
--l
Objecis iB conyeri iniatten sPace
h-
---
I-r
L.
l--
t-
ELb,
282. Seismlc lnterpretatiotr Preparati0n
L\-
Take one of these actions to actrvate interpretation objects:
o
o
ln the
lnput pane and click
.t'-i
to insert the objects into
the table.
Activate lhe lnterpretationfolder and click New fault

-:
-
interpretation
i&
New horizon interpretation
or New grid interpretaton
-,
Click Apply. The seismic volume is flattened on the reference

su
rfa ce.
Click Re-flatten, Un-flatten, and Flatten to flatten and

unflatten the objects in the list.
r,.j
Hr{"-"- ] i;;.6r"
@lfg--j
_,;
I
7lap.,
:ai
E*-."r--.r
This figure shows the unflattened surface (left) and the

flattened surface (right).
Se sm c
lnierpretatlo Preparatl0n . 293
-)>-.4
)
t-J
Flattened 0biects
You can convert existing interpretation objects ln the flattened space.
These objects can be fault, horizon, and grid interpretations (which are
sub-objects of the horizon interpretation associated with one seismic

survey only) and surfaces or p0nts.
You can create new lnterpretati0n objects (faults, horlzons, and grtd
interpretattons) and interpret them directly in the flattened space.
A history of the flattened ob.ects ls stored on the History tab in the
_l
--J
_l
--
Settings dialog box.
*-/
_
lnterpretation Filters
You can
filterthe interpretation 0n any one of many parameters
Use
the filters to display the rnterpretation and to define points as seeds for
autotracking and locking pornts, or to select them for reinterpretation.
You also Can USe the filters with the Bounding box select opton t0
delete specific parts of an interpretation.
Fllters related to interpretations are located ln the Sersmic main folder
0r y0u can find them under each horizon rnterpretation obiect in the
lnput pane. lnfhe lnterp survey inclusion filtersfolder, you can filter
cells belonging to the different surveys.
All interpretation folders contaln 3D interp inclusion fllters. Choose one
=-
y--r'
--/
l--a
b-
_-
,-./
L
_-,/
l-r
L
of these types of ftlters.
3D autotracked: Contains all seeded 3D autotracked
2D autotracked: Contalns all 2D autotracked rnterpretations
o
.
nterpretatr ons.
(seeded 2D and guided).

Manual: Contains all manual interpretations.
lmported/converted: Contains all interpretations imported from

OpenSpirit files or pre-Petrel 2007.1 (point data sets) files
converted to the current Petrel format.
tr
tr
t-
L--
k284.
Seism c lnterpretati0n Preparatl0n
Petrel Geocr
ii
3D inerp i*c/-sr': fi?es
6i t J aufcbetA'd
-. r !L] EttlrctkPd
" Qj ,rani/s
;.h"
+i
/rnsnfed.br: rerted
Seisrnic horizon I
$1 1; 3D Cube
ln the example drsplayed in the frgure, the 3D autotracked horizon
rnterpretatron filter is cleared.
Selsm
c iterpretatio
Preparatl0f
285
J
>-J
-J
-J
--a
t-J
lnterpretation OualitY Filter

The 0utput attrrbutes are created durlng 3D horizon autotracking
lnterpretation Ouality Filter
Using the
1. From the lnput pane, under the horizon interpretation' display
Procedure
the output attributes created during autotracking'

, t& ig"1 Seisric horizsn 1
ffi
iil
3tr Cube
HM
iJ
tI i*
lI
r4r
2.
'-;-';*'::i
';-*--"-
,-
[:
r
>,,,.
Filtering tab'
ch0ose 0ne attribute to filter. The histogram updates'
""",P
l,*:------ii,ili
ilililirir
illlr'
:
T1vr
{}
F..J
>
Autotracker: llnndence
Autotracker: AmPliiude
,qr*totracker: istance
ln the horrzon Settings dialog box on the
r ^.,**,* ,. "
"*
{i
_l
',
;:*'"::l:
o4T
,F*@ r mo*q 's

k * J k - L ; r
r bd
-._:::_.':.:ok
l'
l-.a
_\=
[:
1
rlffil
,&
.
,
\
&
FL,ffi,
'ffi
df f "i-w,mffii.
re**pffia
_.1
ffii
hi
<
l-
::
lri
'.,.gt
!t
Left-click an area of the histogram to filter it away from the
tr
T-
display.
tr
286.
Se -m,c
L.--
In.erpte,at;or Prepara'ror
E--4.-d
%
Horizon 0perations: Bulk Shift
Before you interpret a horizon, you can c0rrect problems, such as the
vertical mis-positionrng of seismic data or datuming problems, by
applying a bulk shift to the interpretation that was done previously. This
horizon operation shrfts the data into the correct position.
Procedure
1.
Bulk Shifting a Horizon

- lnput
pane, 0pen the Settings dialog box for the
ln the
horizon.
lf,,.[-.1*H-i.li..i.=.:.::.:r::=,i.:**....-.4,i
.1"1"1-Hi,,r,.r,:..,,,,,:
&! v elsmlt
",
iS
@
iF
L{:sss.s
I l*te.rpsrrr*y
n-/asrbn,fla-r
t{: xnterpretaiion folder I
mJ
|k i
j nle{p
rn,:luJon lles
Sersmic horion
$l iul
.' 2D
\'lr-iff.,i
Ij
fi; '--^
i.\j
.
s',",rs::lgs...
:"-::!':'irs
,:re sersm ;
Ac-
.
i
ffi
- sen,l: !':rrli
l*UJ 1:i
',
- C,-, 51
'.ts.-'.
freale:+ lncai r
0n the Operations tab, expand lhe Arithmetic folder and

selectZ=Z+Constant.
Se smic lnterpretatl0n Preparat
of .287
Define the c0nstant value and click Run. The horizon shlfts
vertrcally.
.E
L.
t-
L.
l.
l-
L
288. Selsmic Interpretation
Preparation
Petrel
Gecp-"-.,:
tr
-&-
Petrel Geophysics
Seismic lnterpretation Preparati0n
289
J
-J
.-J
:l-J
-J
Horizon 0perations: Smoothing

There are two smoothing methods available for horizon
nterpretation:
o
.
lir**.T'
il:
Gaussian: Use this method when you need t0 set the

number of iteratlons.
Median: Use this method when you need to set the number
of iterations as well as the radius.
Procedure
Smoothing a Horizon
- the Seismic operationstolder and select

1. Expand
-* ::i
il.i!l:;$
Gaussian or Median smooth'

l
lettings fr'3S selffilc'
:l*
Creete nte.prtotian attnbte
ru
llledin
iffi
L.J
-l
1
^_l
--J
-.-
b-J
r-J
:-l
*)
l--J
sath
>-r
Ll
)
L--.d
\.
i:l
#
ii f;
Converl FeitslFlyansu.faces
V--lmrty co*r'eeior
tIl
Dsmain
&i_t-
2.
cnteien
For Median smooth, set the number of lterations and

Badius.
.J
L
LI
)
l-
L.
l-
br
'<
I-<
Jb.
l-.-
5,
290. Se,smir IntPrprelat 01 Prepatat or
E=
tt
This figure shows results from the Gaussian

smooth method
(left) and the Mediam smooth
merhod (right).
Petrel GeophVsics
Seismic lnterpretation pr.parit,on
. Zgl
_lesson 4
Horizon lnterpretation Surface
Conversion and Surface Attrbutes Generation
,a-
ln this lesson, you will learn about generating a surface, using

the
smoothing process, and calculating surface attributes.
---
Make Surfaces Process

0ften seismic interpreters wantto generate a quick map to see the
trend of c0nt.urs and their interpretation. This map also helps them
to identify area of interest so thatthey can do a more detailed
interpretation. You can create qurck maps for surfaces and display
them in 2D,3D, and Map windows. you also can customize these
maps with user-defined color schemes and contour intervals.
,=,
fhe Make surface process under the t|titities f older offers

different algorithms for the different types of input data that you
can use for surface generation. Then you can use these surfaces to
calculate surface attributes and for other processes in petrel.
ln this lesson, you
will create a surface from a horizon

interpretation, but you also can create surfaces from points, well
tops, polygons, or images. Refer to the petrel Help for more
information about other types of input data and further details on
*-1
t,,--r
fhe Mqke surface process.
Procedure
.-
Generating a Surface
utilities foldet open the Make/
1.
ln the Processes pane,
2.
edit,surface process.
From Main input, drop in the interpreted horizon that you
wish to convert into a surface.
)
t--{
L-
-]
i-,]
L-
s-
-.-
l,4ain
input:
iq *
Seisnir i.orizor
fg ii l.lanie. ,;*,i;;
Run for all main inpr:t in
F:
' i I the
same {older
UgqedsstingsfffimirEut ?
292 o Seisr
c rlp
0'eTd
io, Prepar.,io.
Petre
GeophVS cs
_l
_l
L-
L-
l:l
Click Suggest settngs from input. Petrel suggests the

gridding algorithm based on the chosen input data.
Rmult
lilarn
tnDijt
:: Elsfrlt T.il;lr
-,
tsoundry. l=),
taufi cemr : ,
lnes.Jp(1[,gof s ::L
rurfam:
i;]
ii1
.,1 lt"t*,::!,,,::li
Run fr ali main inpL:t in
t*:'il rr
I-l the ramefalder
rlq8d dttngtsm inp{n
0n the Geometry tab, specify the grid outllne and

resol ution,
ris figure shows the origrnally interpreted horizon (left) and the
surface created from the horizon interpretation (right).
:l':
i:1,.'.S
CS
Selsnr c lnterpretatlon
Preparation. 293
I
_l
:l-l
4
,- :
Smoothing a Horizon
Procedure
ln the Surfac e operations foldet select Smooth'
1 .
-".
*l
lJ
lr
rtr:T*I-r
2.
3.
-,--J
Define lterations and Filter width parameters.

Click Run.
L-J
F+ertti+ns
>
^_l
*r,*,r.sl td{*ea
i
H
ff
m
r
ffi
y-_!f
ffi
ffi
F*
fr
ffi
ffi
F
'l
,-
&rgi*'furuti*r*
I i,rr';atr; r* ts*r*til;na
F*tis.;* *4t*t*
-J
-J
t-J
Eli*,i{*n**r*
Sudar*t
udsr,,* *,*sti$rs
$ir,*",hcxtiu, fun+ti*rrs
t*n+r*r
**rstie,r*
P*ints +r.erati*n'+
Sur{at* og*ratir:re
Hrt:t+ sric
tE
^,
r*
$r,"q*-'ih
b,.J
-)
-tJrilqJte
; 1L ErtruEe.luie'+ithi L*'+r'**,t'
: B Fsiiit.ist66t
, S inir,,+tt+
: S Eirsql*
E
E!
'ffi
L.--
-"1
E.\t'Br1{
rotr
. Sll F*fir*
, :tt R*s*n:pl*
; .dL Fiir
:
l-
-]
i;i--l
I
-:i"-:!
--a
_t
l.i
tue'; t{q;
f,e'r{.:
t--,
294
. Seisric 'tle.pretat
0't Preparat o'
*-J
This figure shows the origrnal surface for smoothing (left) and the
surface after the smoothing process (right).
Seisnrlc nterpretati0n Preparation' 295
J
-J
,r--J
>.J
l:: " *-+i:
iil - :!
ir 'q i
:I::==5
Greating an Attrbute Map Based on

Procedure
Surface 0perations
1.
2.
Display an unsmoothed surface in a 3D window.

Rlght-click the surface and select Greate/Update dip
angle and azmuth.
@i-iffi
tl!
m
g
m
:)*.J
Shcr
re,r195
erd f0 -tt-Jis
Rei.ifl'e ?ros stEdio
la Erurd,,.
atrl-E
fCii glslral .alof table
Delt .,
l!,
aal.LritJ"..
Ll:l aop,
:J
>.-J
at !uJ3d rttlibute
-_l
a{pir rsgulr rBri3c: idta rr,l}i
Reserrnte
-l
2t
3.
areat !udr.e 99gE
1ft5 riEs nitribL.te
lreiElugdate dip nglr nad ailth
Expand the surface rn the
lnput
:J
-l
frests r* lo{=l cal. leg*nc
,&
:l
1-.J
---J
pane t0 drsplay new
surface attrlbutes.
,.ffifilffi
tT {-l rrur
& {"* Brp ansle

& i-i mp ax*tt
This figure shows the unsm0othed surface (left) and the
new surface attributes (right).
LI
l-
-
t-a
E-r
--a
l-:
L-
----/
L'-
t-
E296
k=
Surface Attrbutes
Ihe Surf'ace attributes process is comparable fo fhe Volurue
ctttrbute process ln the sense that attrlbutes are organized into
c Ia
,-l
You can use both
surfaces and horizon
sses.
interpretations ln the
c e attri bttte,t Pr0CeSS
You can calculate surface attributes based on a single horizon,

between two honzons, orfrom (time)depth to depth. You also can
capture specific parts of the signal ln a time window or an event.
Surfa
This sectlon offers a brlef dlscussion on the functionalrty and

procedure for generating surface attributes. Because lt ls beneficial
for your rnterpretations, you should explore the various options.
For
further details, see the Petrel Help.
Generating Surface Attrbutes
Procedure
1. 0pen-Surface attrlbutes in the Processes pane.

I
GeoPtry'tc*
sr-
lEg
Seismic interPretation
lrolume attnbutes
;@
l:ffi|
,J.
4.
Choose a surface attribute ln the library.

Choose the lnput seismic.
Choose from the optrons to create new, add, or append to
existing attrbute.
:$
Sur-face attnbr*tes
htke srrf=r:e
ttrib'ut
t_*_.*_***-
l,4ll
lnput selsmic.
liumber,:l negati\re zeto ffosslnu

llumb*r r,f Fositive Eeo Erosings
i l{umher,rf ?Erro crotsrgs
=16-,ia
Add to rurface
Standard deviation ,:f amplrtude
lr
rm
Add to nev+
surlac*
EMS Amplitude Surface
nf .nlitr-rf15----,-.----*Append to attribr"rte
:=:hislcs
Seismic lnterpretatl0n Preparat 0n
297
Define Window specification or specify from which

horizons to calculate the attrtbute.
Fepeated tndows
6.
298
Expand the surface in the lnput pane t0 display the

attribute. (The image shows the BMS surface )
# ffi HilS Amplitude surtece

, tI l'nr
:lIffi HmsAmplitude
Petrel Geophysics
Exercises
---
IE-.
lnterpreting Horizons
"'ihese exercises, you will get hands-on experience with a simple

^r'izon interpretation workflow. These exercises show you the basic
s::ps that you will have to consider or perform whenever y0u are
.ierpreting horizons in Petrel.
)uring interpretation, any interpreter will use a combination of

1,1.i:'
autotracking or manual interpretation, depending on the type of

cata available, the subsurface geology, scope of work, and
Bight-click on the
lnput pane and select

Collapse all folders
(recursive) or Expand all
folders (recursive).
accuracy/details required. However, in this case you will be taken

ihrough each procedure one-by-one to make sure that the
differences in each are highlighted, enabling you to better use these
iechniques in your workflows.
fiefer to the Appendix for a list of seismic interpretation shortcut
(eys.
Using a Simple Horizon lnterpretation Workflow
1.
2.
0n the Processes pane, activate fhe Seismic

interpretatiotx proceSS.
From the
Window menu, insert a new lnterpretation
window.
3.
4.
5.
Expand the Sersmic main folder and the seismic survey
from which you wish to display the seismic line.

Display cross-line 470 in the lnterpretation window.
From the
:l
lnsert menu, select New interpretation folder.
Try opening an
Interpretation window by
right-clicking on a seismic
line (in-line/cross-line or a
2D line) and selecting 0pen
This step is necessary only for this exercise to ensure that

you keep the work that you do separate and arranged. ln a
6
7
B.
routine workflow, this step might not be necessary.

Go to the Settings dialog box for the lnterpretation folder
that you created.
0n the lnfo tab, rename this folder S
Hori z on
imple
Workflow fofder.
Bight-click Simple Horizon Workflow folderand use the
menu to insert two new horizons.
Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparation
299
t-1J
Define Window specificati0n 0r specify from which
horizons to calculate the attrlbute.
-J
--J
E-J
--
t_l
-]
-"1
---,.
>
F.ryq-]
6.
Eqll]ry:e.]
Expand the surface in the Input pane to display the

attribute. (The image shows the RMS surface.)
I
E.
!.-
+
+
---=
l j Hl,,l Amplitude surlace

; tI * rtr'r
'flI HmsAmplitude
!--
r
\-
Exercises
f
f
I---
Ir--
---
Interpreting Horizons
will get hands-on experience with a simple
horizon interpretation workflow. These exercises show you the basic

steps that you will have to consider or perform whenever y0u are
rnterpreting horizons in Petrel.
During interpretation, any interpreter will use a combination of
autotracking or manual interpretation, depending on the type of
data available, the subsurface geology, scope of work, and
accuracy/detarls required. However, in this case you will be taken
through each procedure one-by-one to make sure that the
differences rn each are hlghlighted, enabling you to better use these
techniques in your workflows.
,lll
{l
Right-click on the
lnput pane and select

Collapse all folders
(recursive) or Expand all
folders (recursive).
Befer to the Appendix for a list of seismic interpretation shortcut

keys.
Using a Simple Horizon lnterpretation Workflow
1. 0n the Processes pane, activate fhe Seismic
2.
interpretation
From the
Process.
Window menu, insert a new lnterpretation
:,,ii
window.
Try opening an
3.
Expand the Seismic maln folder and the setsmic survey

from which you wish to display the seismic line.
Interpretation window
Display cross-line 470 in the Interpretation window.

From the lnsert menu, select New interpretation folder.
This step is necessary only for this exercise to ensure that
you keep the work that you do separate and arranged. ln a
2D llne) and selecting OPen
bY
right-clicking on a seismic
line (in-line/cross-line or a
routine workflow, this step might not be necessary.

Go to the Settings dialog box for the lnterpretation folder
7
that you created.

0n the lnfo tab, rename this folder
simple Hori
zon
Workflow folder.
Bight-click Simple Horizon Workflow folderand use the
menu to insert two new horizons.
Seismlc lnterpretation Preparation
299
.-
From the Seismic interpretation toolbat insert two more
.'
horizons. These horizons also wlll appear tn your new

folder if that folder was active/bold when you inserted the
Always ensure that

the correct process, wlndow,
and folder is activated.
new horizons.
Rename the new horizons based on the horizon
10
3D autotracked horizon
2D autotracked horrzon
>
Guided autoLracked horizon

ManualIy int.erPreted horizon'
You also can change the name 0f the horizons on the

tab in the Settings dialog box.
-d
interpretation techniques:
.
.
o
o
:i
:I
lnfo
*kr,i* lTs*dtsrfdds
t' fu ill .Is*xesp,**dx*r#*s
& i.-i :* *x*'lt***** nuttu*
# de
q'
20 aocited hotctl
'rii:
i-: *ueca**la*eltotl*n
M*x.*Jesp{Etid
>
>
hrin
I
ffi
>
*tti*gn *r'3D autotr*ckd heriz*n'
iS
I
t*.
j:::i!
ffii
,t=*",
>
Clor:
rIL
Type:
Domain:
tJ
b-l
tdet
Elerati+ntine
Er
,i:;;,:'.
+
11
ri;'
(3
You can switch
between drfferent techniques

on the same horizon at anY
time.
0n the Functi0n t00lbar, click !nterpret grid horizon (H)

iB, tn.n click one of these four icons, depending 0n h0w
you wish to interpret y0ur h0rz0n 0r at what point you wish
to combine these technrques..--
.
.
.
o
3D seeded autotracking
2D seeded autotracking i"S
Guided autotracking i.{,,.-
Manual interpretation i*Y*.

12. Go to cross-line 470 and interpret different events using
different methods based on their contlnuity and quality. To
meth
300. Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparatlon
---
h=
hon
Petrel Geophysics
\=
13. At the intersection of cross-line 470 and in-line
590,
interpret these events:
o
.
.
.
035 ms (peak)
Manually interpreted horizon at -1330 ms (peak)
3D autotracked horrzon at
-1
Make sure the
horizon you want to interpret

is bold in the lnput pane.
-1 870 ms (peak)
Guided autotracked horizon -2015 ms (peak).
2D autotracked horizon at
this exercise, use default parameters for autotracking.

You wrll work with prior specificatlons of the autotracking
parameters later in the exercises. The manual
rnterpretation allows you to virtually draw over the horizon
ln the general intersection player toolbar, enter 25 for the
increment and work across the cube to pick your horizons.
For
#*#e&#&ici;;
Press N or double-click to break your pick across the fault.
Display the faults that you have interpreted.

Use a seismic ghost curve to help you pick the same event
across the fault. To erase any pick, click the Eraser icon.
Petre (jeophVS cs
Selsm
nterpretati0n Preparatl0 .301
J--
_l
_l
\-{
_l
-,.-1
19.
the setsmic events, swltch between

different seismic templates from the Selsmic interpretation
To help you pick
toolbar.
20.
21
Change the color by sliding the color table bars.

*.,'.,;:-. l!IS*isr'i (deiaul:i
r, ilGj
Change the display scale. Press Ctrl+ Shit, hold down the
left mouse button, and drag the mouse over the area that
you wish to display.
')) View the interpretation by inserting 3D and 2D windows

from the Window menu and linking them to a visual
group, as discussed in Module 2.
Durrng horlzon picking, make composite lines in the
lnterpretation window using the icons in the

toolbal as discussed in Module
>-
the automated horizon interpretation. These parameter are

important because they are key to good results for automated
horizons. Setting and changing parameters are vitalfor allforms of
autotracking including Seeded 3D, Seeded 2D, and Guided
utotracki ng.
1.
2.
iFi:.
il
ll
i-,"""-
--.,: The
3.
Autotracking
tab has been modified for
_l
>,.-
>-a
-l
-Ll
--/
Activate lhe Seismic interpretatio? process from the
Processes pane.
lnsert a new horizon and name it
hori z on-
tracking_parameters.
Bight-click on the horizon-tracking-parameters horizon and
select Settings.
4.
r-J
-]
Function
2.
Setting up Horizon Tracking Parameters

ln this exercise, you will learn how to set tracking parameters for
b-
-)
,--
0n the Settings dialog box, open the Autotracking tab.
Petrel 2013.1
-=r
ts
!.'
302. Seismic nterpretati0n Preparation
Petrel Geophysics
L-
a-E:*
I--
eurey
*sic
&l
F's* e tesh
t_{l
se*es*xm:
,?*
il]'fh6wr9e:
.1
ri
r;
l!
,,i
i}wxwrc*
fu.&sl
-...
...te;lrr*
(h,
.t:
{r!s&
ffi
l*Il;l-l
, ttl
+Fkr
,]t
:{l pwapr* B.}*&*

I
Id
) ) ;fGC
r-r*rd"-
I **na fw &pqg dei@

Lie
rrtds
ftaiftm
srd*er$h: *uai*u
{ordemeud*y: -.. - ......--..j-}
r.J
i.,is
i.:
iJl sm*lissi*ad*
l,;
il
i&orer
at
elou: i w6m{4*m)
ffidsa.t*ru]
By default, the active seismic v0lume is selected. you

can
change the seismic volume by making the seismic
cube
bold in the !nput pane and dropping it onto the
Autotracking tab.
5. Select values or priori4t, euality, and Signal feature.

6. 0n the Parameters subtab, specfy the Seid confidence
f
percent, depending 0n how strong the

amplitude is of the
seismic event that you wsh to autotrack as your
horizon.
Petrei Geophystcs
Seismic lnterpretation p,epit
on.
30e
.I
>--
value is 100' by
implying that any
selecting 30% seed confidence, you are
in the
amplitu;e value below 30 should not be considered
For example, rf your average amplitude
autotracking.
View your amplitude value range'
a.
b.
c.
is acttve
Make sure that the lnterp.retation window
Click Select/Pick mode i h
that you wish to
Drag the curs0r over the seismic event
and time/
autotrack. lnformation such as the amplitude
0biect
depth of the event is displayed 0n the
-J
{i
_l
_l
b-J
-l
L.,-J
information bar.
v_-l
--
>-
b
lL
B. Further limit your autotracklng by specifying
9.
10
the amplitude
value range for better autotracking c0ntrol"

is a dipping
lf the seismic event that Y0u are autotracking
refiectors
'lhis
reflector, select Optimize for dippittg
optron helps to fine tune the autotracking'
Click APPIY
(Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V)'

Make opy of your horizon
pane and keep
12. Leave the copied horlzon in the lnput
to make it bold
working on the original horizon Remember
parameters
13. For betier results, further limit the autotracking
11
h<
a. Select t/se waYelet ffacking'

b. Select a value for the Correlate with field from the
c.
droP-down list.
quality'
Use the slrder to set the Correlation
Petrel GeoPh'!
rf'
I.
14.
aff-
Use different options for constraints 0n the Constraints

subtab to Iimit y0ur autotracking.
'15.
to the lnterpretaton or 3D window and display the

seismc section where you wsh to gve y0u first seed point
for autotracking.
Go
-.i
6.
Click lnterpret grid horizon (H) e, then select rhe

autotracking type.
17. lf you are dorng Seeded 3D autotracking, pick (using
manual, guided or 2D autotracking method) some cross_
1
-.-
Ir-_/1
lt is always useful to
keep a copy of your original
horizon with the initral
parameters because it can
help you compare the results
between d fferent options.

Then, you can keep the
closest match to your model
and discard the others.
lines and in-lines with a co,arse- glid over the cube, then
BD rnck
click the 3D Track button
in the Settings
i*
dialog box" This step ensures that your picks are honored
as seed points and can Iimit the time that you spend quality
checking the autotracked horizon.
18. lnsert a new horizon and name it horrzorr
autotrackinq parameters
19
20
2.
Use other parameters and autotrack the same event that

you tracked previously in this exercise.
Compare the results.
Editing Horizon lnterpretations Manually and

Automatically
When attempting t0 constrain the tracking parameters to the
extreme, the automatic interpretation often will not be performed"
Sometimes, a pragmatc approach is better when deciding
how
much effort t0 use 0n automatic interpretation vs. results
editing.
This exercise shows you howto do manualediting as wellas
a
more efficient automatic editing
Use Ctrl + C and Ctrl + V t0 copy and paste a seeded
3D
autotracked horizon from your project.
1.
2
3
5
o.
Rename the copy Hori zon edrt.

Display the horizon in a 2D window and an lnterpretation
window.
Tile the two windows and link them to the same visual
group. Do not forget to activate the cursor tracking
for both
windows.
Make Horizon_edit active.
Activate the 2D window
Per,e Geophysics
Seismic Interpretatlon Preparat
0n.
305
7.
Us-e-
--
ifi or Select by polygon
select
Bounding box
ii to Oraw a rectangular boundary around an area that

you wrsh to edrt.
B.
Delete the points by clicking
9.
Use the interactive Eraser (Shift+X)
Delete
"
iB" to delete a part

of your interpretation. You can change the eraser size by
pressrng the plus (+) and minus (-) keys"
and Redo (Gtrl+Y)

10. Use Undo (Gtrl+Z)
1
Activate or lnsert a new 3D
window.
12.
'
Display Horizon-edit ad use Bounding box
i;:ri
select 'l-h,
Select by polygon ii.th, o, Selection paintbrush
:,:E
:to
select multiple interpreted points.
Delete
the process actions bar to delete points
13
Use
14
d" to reinsert the deleted points.

Click Undo
rn
L-_
L.
L
L.-
L.
I
the autotracked horizon and rename it

Hori z on_Parent/Chi f d.
16 View the interpretation horizontally from east 0r west.
Check for areas of misinterpretation.
15. Make a copy of
17. ActivateSelectsingle
t3
r'*l
Parent/child ecliting
works only for autotracked
18.
horizons
li
Clct on the Select
single point
Patent Points 'sil
icon from the
function bar before selecting

parent points..
point
and clickSelect
ln the 3D window, select a point within the area where the
interpretatron is incorrect. All of the points on the tracking

path between the selected point and the seed point are
activated (marked yel low).
19. 0uality control the highlighted path of the interpretation
against the seismrc section to check exactly where the
autotracking process failedto follow the right reflector.
20. Click Select child points {rl and click the failure point.
All interpreted points inherited from the failed point are
L-
L,-
5r-
E
L
bL
IL
-t
activated.
21. Delete the selected points. Again y0u can undo the
22.
Saue your project.
/"-
-b
:-
l"5306.
Seismic lnlerpretatl0n Preparati0
Fetre Geira'
iL-
f'r_*
I
<
I'
aI.
E.
r,-_
-,-
ar_f
L'
1_
f
f
E
f
f
--
r-_-
Horizon 0perations: Bulk Shifting a Horizon

lnterpretation
There are more than 75 different operations that you can do on
lonzon interpretations in Petrel. This exercise gives some
:xa
ples.
1. ln the lnput pane, copy and paste 3D autotracked
2.
3.
4.
horizon
to create a copy of it.

Hename the copy Horizon
Expand Horizon_A_shifted and open the Settings dialog
box for the 3D seismic object.
0n the Operations tab, expand fhe Arithmetic
A shifted.
0perations folder and selecfZ=Z+ Constant.

Enter 5 0 in the Constant field and click Run. The horizon
interpretation is shifted 50 ms upward.
<
E.
I.
L=-
--*
rL__<
ion:tart
Frr all ilueB r the ahjal , appi,l
" Z r snstEt
--r
r-,__.4
Experiment with some of the other operatons.

Seismlc nterpretat 0n Prepafai 0n.307
F
Horizon 0perations: Smoothing a Horizon lnterpretation
1
Make a copy 0f Horizon_A_shifted and rename it
Hori zon_A_smoothed.
2
Expand Horizon_A_sm00thed and open the Settings

dialog box for the 3D seismic object.
0n the Operations tab, under the Seismic operatilns
foldel select Gaussian smooth.
.i
!<
_
L-J
-J
ts
frJ
-)-/
d
.l
-l
a--a
L.-
-J
\.-
-J
L--
4. Use the default parameters and click Run.

5. Display Horizon_A_smoothed in a 3D window.
6. Try Median smooth with the default parameters.
7. lf you are not satisfied with the result, click Undo, change
the parameters, and run it agarn (there is one undo step
ava ila b le).
-J
\-
r-d
_l
-J
L-
308. Seismic lnterpretati0n preparation
Petrel Geophys cs
--l
f=
E-
a.-
a^
r--
---l
a_
I_Ir-_rl
--_-{
Displaying and Annotating Horizons: Modifying the

Seismic Horizon Display
You can change the display style of the horizon interpretation easily
to surt your preferences.
1
2.
Open an
From the
lnterpretation foldet display a seismlc
horizon.
For example, display
the 3D seeded autotracking horizon

that you interpreted in the previous exercise.
* .$f ,q: inrpl*fl*rir+rl
WprkffoyfrHer
, &,y, sf*r**d.esi!,"#iss
..r,S1:{ffi
t&
'
li;:
t.-.; ideda:to*q**dirsr*,1
,'
f,i}i i- t
-.: e* *uisrystrd hsriton

lo1s'""rv
x:lerpr*tcd *r*rir*n
0pen the Settings dialog box"
Seismic nterpretation Preparation
309
J
V
L-
tr
0n the Style tab in the 2D and 3D interpretation area,

selecf Points and experimentwith Pointtype and Slze.
Click Apply for each new selecton and observe the effects
in your
6.
l.
-"
B.
lnterpretation wlndow.
Select lizes and experiment with Line type and Width.

Click Apply and observe the effects.
ln fhe Neighbor sections area, select fhe Previous and
y'y'exl check boxes. This functionality is another aid when
interpreting a horizon in an lnterpretation window. lt

displays the tnterpretation from the incremental
neighborrng seismic lines (controlled from the General
intersection toolbar r
9.
lfl
f"-J
_l
-l
}--
h--
-_l
\.J
+l
Select color and slze for the display and review t in the
lnterpretation
-l
wi ndow.
2D
3D
10.
ln the Crossing points area, make sure the
11.
check boxes are selected.

ln the Annotation area, select the l'{ame check box to
and
display the horizon name in the Interpretation window.

12. Click Apply and see the difference.
l--)
-
L-
4
t
4 -.d
ts
I
,-,k
<
L.D
-<
f.d
-k
-<
310. Seismic lnterpretat 0n Preparat
0n
Petre Geophys cs
^=
f
-*
Q =*-"9:a
-:C
-:l= !'.' i
b
- =:--
----
*;ea cfidE*sg
,..
---
:t.ifis
Sl,e
Lr+ t;e
S;*xl:
:r:
tidd *d!&3 i3 @tl
r'EfuW
,l ,ro
reffi.
cci*
Iteryre
}sirs
:{:
t;'
oti
*.rdh:
*-
Srbol
'{
li
ps:t
Lire
t g
a1aei cro*s
$t,pd
*fdhr
Cdafr
o.t
'13
ln the
lnterpretation window, find and select
a cr0ssing
2D line.
14
0bserve how the 3D interpretatron is projected 0nto the 2D

line.
15
Use Guided autotrackrng and interpret along the line.
Double-click when you are satisfred with the result.

17. ln the lnput pane, find and expand y0ur active horizon.
16
There are n0w two interpretation survey filters, one for the
3D volume and one for 2D lines.
1B
Clear the 3D seismic filter and 0bserve that the projected

3D interpretation is gone.
19. Select the
3D seismic filter again

Se smic
ifterpretat on Preparat
31
20
21
Display a 3D in-line or cross-lrne agarn. Make sure the

newly interpreted 2D line crosses it. The crossing 2D
interpretatron is marked with a symbol.
ln the Settings dialog box on the Style tab, activate a 3D
window. The Settings dialog box changes to reflect the
new window type.
Re*n*mode
2D
iftedisn
tir
'g;
Lircs
PonLs
Line !e:
vdidthr
Sclid
t.n'bol
i:
]D
iemetr "
Sl.,le:
L-.ll
!!lU
tBlLs
Cell
si?e:
bli
(ellheiqr'il
lildedl
Plrk
--L
lensFerency:
Resllimi
lft ltemA*e
il
::"_. .. .
..
Uilftr
-L-
.;
Display a seismic horizon from the !nput pane.

LJ. Zoom in on the interpretation.
22
0n the Style tab, under 3D, change Style to Points and

click Apply. The rnterpretation is shown as ponts.
25 Change Style to Triangle surface and click Apply
?6 Botate the 3D view and zoom in if needed.
21 Change Style to Cell box. Zoom in until separate cell boxes
24
are identified.
28. Change Cell height to 20.

312. Selsmic Interpretatl0n
Preparatl0n
Petre Geophysics
--L
<
L
I---r
L'
f
af
af
I--r
I--
I---
I-
Flattening a Horizon and Generating Flattened 3D

Volumes
l this exercise, y0u will learn how to flatten the horizon whlle
nterpreting it. Horizon flattening is very important during structural
or stratrgraphic interpretatr0n. lt also can help you quality check
vour picks.
ln this exercrse, y0u
1.
-.-
Er-<
a flattened 3D seismic volume.
Activate an lnterpretation window from the Windows

pane 0r lnsert a new lnterpretation window from the
2.
3.
I---
will create
Window
menu.
Display cross-ltne 544.

From your acliue
lnterpretatiln folder, display a horizon
that you want to flatten.

Right-click the horizon in the lnput pane and select Flatten
horizon.
. Srsle tbri:ffi ltnrldl+u
B /, ll.ni.B sr!"ir l.?.rs
iiij I 3[ aut'.tr-rked I'rai:tn
folder
::.'-:
I .:
, I ..
r::
:--
?tr alfttnike,J hsdnfi

Guided autaimcked hnrian
:+i.ns+#s=+qi:4iiEsE+]-s5-+
E'-' .l-:. "iiili+:-a:di:;ns it,

f,;
r
L'
l=
Ir.-_<
l!3
L=j
&
,r:,
iil:i a:iarii. !^,iri:rf liil
ar,lj:
aii:ri ir ilai'i!
---r
tr
lr,it]1 1'.irii:nf,'!LlE:E i:,fu
,td
iiIr!
ffi
1*C L'i!r :ifL:llfl
iriL1!la
a Itiipr:iiiir,
l
ili Eli,rl:
.
lii: : r:: ,l':::1:i:,_ f:' l:.. : i' : ll ,:i:"_ '

fiiii hfi:rf;
i!
1r,::q:i
l'\
0bserve the flattened horlzon. You can hide the pick by

toggling off the horizon in the Input pane so that you can
see the event clearly and decide whether or not you want
to refine your pick. You can reftne your pick whtle your
horlzon rs still flattened.
Unflatten the horzon by right-clicking it and cleartng
Flatten horizon
rn
the menu.
Seismlc nterpretat 0n Preparati0n '313
--l
L.J
Generating Flattened 3D Volumes
ln this exercise, you willgenerate a flattened 3D volume. You must

have a surface created from a seismic horlzon. Because you will
learn howt0 create a surface later ln this training, you can use a
surface that is already available in your project.
1.
2.
lnput pane, right-cllck the seismic cube mig [Crop]

[Realized] 1 and select lnsert flattened volume. A virtual
ln the
L-J
--J,
r..J
seismic volume named Flattened 1 is created.

ln the lnput pane, expand fhe Surfaces folder that you
imported using the Reference proiecttool in Module
3.
-
-+
and choose CARACAS.

ln the Settings dralog box for the virtual volume, go t0 the
Flattening tab and insert CARACAS using the blue arrow
in the Beference surface field.
4.
Click Apply. The seismic volume ls flattened on the
reference surface and a new folder named Flattening

surfaces is created and stored in the lnput pane.
, f- l:
ffi i*l ARAilAs+I&?
5.
Flaitening turfaces
Display the original and the flattened seismlc cubes in a 3D
window.
6.
1.
Create and activate a new lnterpretationfolder.

0n the Flattening tab rn the Settings dialog box of the
Flattened 'l volume, click lnsert interpretation horizon in
=L
active folder Lrye n new horizon is created that you can
B.
interpret directly in the flattened space.

Actrvate fhe Seismic interpretation process and interpret
the horizon at a level below CARACAS.
While interpreting, switch between un-flattened and
flattened spaces by clicking Un-flatten and FIatten. This
will convertthe objects in the table and help to c0ntrolthe
i
rc
314. Selsmic Interpretatlon
Preparatl0n
1.
fh
+
nterpretation.
10. Highlight other existing interpretations
.+
in the
lnput
pane
and click letr] rn the dialog box to add them to the table.
Click Flatten to visualize them in the flattened space.
Petre Geophysics
r_
ndFr'! oanndeB
EeeHLe su-dce
@ - ..-- .t
.--l
-crdes.ri.
Flnten!
level
I _r
Obtedst0
cove nfldil
:lRCl+
ri Arffile
lr
Blev*ion ot
'Efffine
surtEcB
r_l,t i
sFace
+- .=.; -'.
-t !k:-'-,.i,,-.
-.
L}E
tts
r-{!-l
,;:
,1
,fu
li
i
l
ll
I
i
I
Creating 2D Grid Surfaces with the Make/Edit Surface

Process
Ihe Make/edit surface process is commonly used as a quck way
to create surfaces (2D grlds) that you can use to quality check the
nterpretation, perform surface operations, and extract information
from the seismic data.
1.
2.
Display one of your interpreted horizons ln a 3D

wrndow.
ln the Processes pane, under Utilities, open the
Make/edit surface
process.
Se sm c lnterpretati0n Preparati0f
.315
J
-J
,-ra
-l
l-J
bb
-J
:l
b
-J
-_t
L
-l
y-/
y-.
L-l
_.-
L-
---
,_-a
L-a
_-!
Lr
+
a
J.
4.
Make your selected horizon bold and drop it into the

Main input field.
Toggle on fhe Name check box and enter a name f 0r
your output surface. For this exercise, enter
Sur
5.
316
Seismlc lnterpretation Preparati0n
face_hori
on 1.
CIrck,Suggest settingsfrom input and select

Seismic tines (high density) option. A method
based on the rnput type is suggested, but you can
select other methods.

0pen the Geometry tab.
Selecl Autontatic (from input data/boundary).

Petrel Geophys c:
lk
tr
L-
tr
t-r
-.
o
o.
Set a suitable grid increment (for example, 100 x 100).

Toggle on Mqke boundary.fi'om ruain input and
extend it with I J nodes and enter 1 (one grid cell
outsrde the data limit).

Click 0K to create the surface.
11. Display Surface_horizonl ln the 2D or 3D window and
compare it with the interpreted data.
4a
IL Go to the Style tab in the Settings dialog box to
10
select annotation properties for the surface display.
d; &: bdd levek
. i:t
;.:e baric
*
ii;::':*iJ
Fant:
:5
Stad:
l*ryvai;
3S{S
rai
The next step is t0 produce another surface based on

the same input, while lrmiting the output inside a
closed polygon.
13. Be-open he Make/edit surface process.

14. Click in the Besult surface fleld and press Delete.
15. Click No ln the confirmatlon dialog box.
16. 0n the Geometry tab in the Boundary section, toggle
off Make boundaryt.from main input and extend t
with []J nodes.
Petre GeophVsics
Se smic
lfterpretatlon Preparatl0n. 317
.I
a
-J
l-,
tab' drop a closed polygon

17. 0n the Make surface
the Boundary field.
\nfhe Make/edit polygons
1B il;;k. . new polygon
t
9.
Process
'Change
(use a 2D wrndow)'
the name of the polygon t0
tn
a--,
:l_J
Limited-
..r
surface'
20
Click APPIY
>--l
the 3D window'
21. Display Limited-surface in
:-l
Smoothing Surfaces
1.
2.
1
v
ox for Surface-hot)zonl
0pen the Settngs diafog
exerclse'
that you created in the prevtous
the Surface
expand
0n the 0perations tab'
oPerations folder'
3.SLlectSmoothandkeepthedefaultparameters,
-L--'
L_
=i
3l
=--s
.
s.
i,
Pettel
* i, nt.
I
tp
retati
re
p a
rati
Ge:'
)t
ffi
!*ttir,qs f*r'5urfare_-'.ari*n1'
IrFEr:ti.-,rs
l_,
r--
L
LL
r.I
L--
frrsti;:r:
l*
.;-'+
LLnAILTi lF+Eltlfs
..+ ;- -,.trttrtI3ti nIri
1 ;--.
:Ln::i-s-n::iaF+riti:r:i
, ;-^
.t ;--^rrlrMEer:ltrt
1
ilr
.Ar'le
,l
L-.
,
,
. t
:{3:f;5t!:
lLrTillai
t
L tnl,f :,E{l=11:,f 3
li
Il/\
]!n::t:,8{r=il:.rS
tsF,caiesrir
' I /fu--.
ry-ffi-F=
r'i ;l
tu
f
E,1r tF:J
H9
L.rF
jte .riilir h,:.^:;r
F:, lr.rrq-+
rrf
ulT
1_
I
t_
L
I
L
L
L
L
L
L
I":
--.4
'L-4
r:-1
4.
tr
J.
F.-
Click L$ to create a new object.

Click Run
Display Surface_horizonl: Smooth in a 3D or 2D
window
Modify the surface by changing the parameters, then

run the operation again"
I.
..;.
Petrel Geophys cs
JL-
*--
Se smic lnterpretat
0f Preparai 0n.319
-F
fr-
Review 0uestions
1. Mention four methods to digitize horizons in petrel. What
2.
3.
are their importance?

can you flatten 3D seismic cubes and horizons in petrer?
rf
yes, how?
L--
What are the available signal tracking feature options

in
horizon autotracking mode?
Does the Seed Confidence option in horizon
autotracking
specify the minimum value for the seismic amplitude
as a
L-L.-
percentage of the seed point?
L--
Summary
L.-
accessing and using the horizon interpretation function
toolbar
a
a
a
a
a
changing horizon settings and parameters

opening and using the lnterpretation manager
rnterpretrng horizons using different techniqus
using these interpretation tools
.
.
.
l.l
rL-r
Guided autotrackrng
performing manua I interpretations

editing horizons and parent/child relationships
o
o
filteringinterpretations
o
o
shifting and smoorhing)

flattening horizons
annotating horizons.
l--
"=
correcting horizon problems using horizon operations (bulk
_d
!=.
i
L.
I
I
_)
'.-J
:l
L.
322. Seismic lterpretatlon preparati0n

Petrel Geophysics
_l
f_
^l
Module 5
Seismic
Restoration 2D
this module, you will learn about seismic restoration in petreland

how to build restoration models.
Irr
Learning 0bjectives
.
.
.
f
f
f
explain why seismic restoration is useful for interpreters

use the restoration workflow
set restoration attributes.
-.<
r----..
t--
L--
Petrei Geophysics
Selsmrc Festoratton 2D
.323
J
Lr
_J
L--
Lesson 1
Seismic Restoration for 2D Horizons
--l
L-r
lnPetrel,youcanuseac0mplexfaultnetwOrkt0doseismicbalanctng
You can select and

use more than one horizon al
(one of several) t0 a
and reconstruct 0r restore seismic horizons
engine' enabling
,p..ii.O flat level. This process uses a geomechanical
interpretation from a geologically valid
b-
point of view.
L--
ylu to vatrOate the structural
the same time.
tuning' A single
The process requires very little user interacttgn,and
is
modelthat pre-populated with
click allows you to creat a restoration
rn the lnterpretaton
,tt ot rt . interpretation objects that are visible
during the process'
select
thatyou
window. You can flatten the horizons
=
!-L-Ll-
l--
tr
ir-
rL
tr
I
-
I
324. Seismlc Restoration
2D
I
,l
---_-
rl-L=_<
-,
I.
L.
f
Lf
-.
---
fhe Restoration model process automatically builds a restoraton

model that uses all objects in the scene to define the fault structural
networks and the different zones The model ls stored in a global
I.
-.
Restoration Model
Restoration models folder in the Models pane.

Restored seismic sections allow you to visualize
o
.
.
.
o
.
well tops
surfaces
virtual attnbutes
polygons
points
3D grid properties.
Restoration Workflow
The Restoration workflow ls an iterative process.
Analr/e
the
seismic
section
.;,i;'itl:!
...:
Se smic Hestoral on 2D
.325
.t
a
>.-.{
Procedure
Restoring a Seismic Section
display
opn an lnterpretation window and
1. For Restoration,
random line' or a 2D line)in

seismic sectron (inline, crossline'
time or dePth domarn'
ig tsrel2013,1(64'bib# le""t"nu1Yl
nn5l
i$1-l ' Msk rc#rdid
.H
_J
Lr
_l
-l
t--J
ddl1
l-ra
v
_-]
l.3
Lr
q! !
iriEiprE!fui
6t V!!He 4$!u1eE
uHeri tillrr1q!
'+
ii,i turr,ret: tu[ *rilo
l{ ME[erEor eder
}''f.
EibBYliie'Prattei
& 6& aE6daiE'*l

s{{lnrqt ita6Yarb
Cwar Po,.t dddg
'
PFPEd,
hodalt9
r,5(kt rBr
modErhC
l."
Wel 8ngre!{t
A MdEel!dlFlr!n
4 Mdksedilruhre
ffi frih". lE ':l
i' lr4lh EEilmdlr! mr<l
th
r-i*t'
I
. ..1 lt is important that

the horizons are ananged tn
inreasinn oeolooical aqe in
to be used by the
Display the fault and horizon(s) interpretation
restoration process'
E
D
the lnput pane.
5
Petrel GeoPhYsit:
326
Seismic Bestoration 2D
l"-
L
a
r-=-
L'
f
I_.
a-
3.
From the lnput pane, highlight the horizon(s) and select FIailen
horizon(s) using currently visible objects.
I.
---
--
--=.
Petrel Geophysics
Seismlc Bestoration 2D. 327
*)
*-Lil
h
Add or interpret new horizons in the restored space
=t
L--
-E
L.
tr-r
-=
L<
L.}.
)r
-E
Lr
_L
L'L
l-<
,-L
L-L
fr--a
L
=E
lH
__b.
1_L
328. Seismic Bestoration
2D
Petrel Geophysics
f
L'
L'
f
L'
L'
f
t_f
f
f
1_f
U
f
--_
-.-_--
I.
-.--
r--
I-{
View the Restored Seismic

.,lse
lE bl
in the
Seismic interpretation toolbar to turn on/off the
iestored seismic view
:c
I -,e ,9.....& .- Se,isr:ric Tire 1
-l# E E
reconstructed space. lf the active restoration model is not cached, this

acti0n als0 causes the model computation to be triggered.
Refresh the restoration model: Refreshes the model. This action is

used afteryou update parts of the model(e.9., horizons and faults, or
model settings)"
Active restoration 2d model: Allows selection of active restoration

model from the nterpretation tool bar.
.-
:::
:::i::ari:.i::i:-
:::::i:ir:i,::l::l::
'ffitcGt**#
r: i:=:::1:;
Ettr
::r':
i:r:i-j::; : :::
et
::'r'r..
i:j:;-il:.ii:
r:.ri:.:_:
'':..'.-:''
:
r.&
---
----
II-<
-I-_i
tesicriicn rcdel
Toggle on/off restoration mode: Moves the view from normal to
-.
--"
BE
i!l
nEsH uulu
colortable
rdults
j pj
LY] Resd
! j futve prope*l,template
|
i?l Totule $iqsle
i
i
l
l
q:
Togqle opacitf :n ll visihle reismic planer

and bitmap
fufive tautt,,terin inlrFretation

Cr*ut" ne'r.fault."honn
i i{-l Tqqle on,.'off all interpretatinn obje*ts

j
i.{i
Selected,rrrrtage
iJ
fuph. setected 'rintage to dsible seismir planes
Toggle on,,'aff restumtinn mode
lfr
Rdresh restration if needed
i{
Amive rexoraiun Id model
is
.*
-r
IEJ
rI-_-
f-.-
Se smlc Eestoraiion
2D.329
>--J
BI
lnterpretation Ouality Check in the Restored Section

The restoration prOcess enables you to work in a structurally-free and
interpretation{riendly environment. ln this environment, y0u can
remove the influence of the fault network gradually by un-faulting the
selsmic section and restoring the display to what resembles a
L.d
L,i
chronostratigraphic disPlaY.
You can spot an incorrect interpretation more easily in a restored space
than in a traditional interpretation framework.
OC
L--
-l
the lnterpretation in Restored Section
1.
You cn quickly spot a mrs-picked horizon in the restored
L.-
secti on.
\,b_L.
lE
-L
lr-L.
-L
t-
330
Seismic Restoratron 2D
Petrel Geophysit
Correct your interpretation and refresh the restoration t0 view

the corrected restored section.
b--
:J
Restoration Attributes
During the restorati0n process, different attributes of the model are
generated to be used for quality c0ntrol. These attributes enable the
user t0 immediately figure out if the model that has been build is
l
!
I
I
defined as expected.
.
o
.
o
.
Triangle mesh
_-l
l--
Zones
lmplicit Function
L-r
Dilation
Shearing
Triangle Mesh
The Triangle mesh attribute displays the triangle mesh that is used in
the restoration Process.

You can use this information to quality checkthe mesh triangles t0
ensure that they are reliable acc0rding to the input data and will not
introduce artifacts into the restorati0n process.
tlr
ts
Y
The Mesh resolUti0n parameter allows you to control the performance

and resolution of the model.
_L
(left)
The ftgure shows Triangle Mesh displayed in an unrestored section
and Trrangle Mesh dlsplayed in a restored section (right).
-L
}.-l"-
-.r
-L.E.
L-
.-
--.L
L332. Seismic Restoration
2D
Zones
The Zone attribute displays how all fault-fault and horzon-fault
connections are build automatically and allows you to quality check the
modelrng step.
The frgure shows Zones displayed in an unrestored section (left)and
Zones displayed in a restored section (rrght)"
Seism c Bestoration 2D
.333
l,--J
:J
-l
r--J
lmplicit Function
The lmplicit functron attribute provides a stratigraphic view of the sectlon
that summarizes the geological relationships in the model. Any point in this
2D space has a specrfic relationship with lts nerghbors (younget oldel or of
the same age).
The figure shows Implicit Function displayed in an unrestored section (left)
and lmplicit Function displayed in a restored section (right).
5--J
_l
L-J
-_J
L--J
_l
I-J
:t
}i-d
__l
l-J
-)
L-d
.}1
Lda
-.
_.J
ts
f
.r
[.
334. Seismic Restoration
2D
Petrel
Geophvs.:
_<
L--.L
fl
fI_aI_aaf
L.
LE
I-*l
r.-_J
Dilation
The Dilation attribute characterizes the relative change in area (in 2D)
for each triangle. This attribute helps you to determine which zones are
compressed and which are stretched to complete the restoration
pr0cess.
The figure shows Dilatation displayed in an unrestored section (left)and
Dr
atation displayed in a restored section (right).
--_-
I-J
-.
lE-
-.--l
E
--J
I,_==
--J
E
I._--
Seismic ,aesloration 7ll
.335
a
-_l
V
Shearing
The Shearing attribute indlcates how the angles of the mesh triangles
vary between the un-restored and restored stages. This attribute shows
the local strain generated by the reconstruction process.
The figure shows Shearing displayed in an unrestored section (left) and
Shearing displayed in a restored section (right).
gi
?:
,)
L-
:l
L..J
_l
_l
.-
Ll
L,.J
-_l
L.J
:l
E-a
=)
'l
--/
Fr
--
!'<l
li-
t336. Seismic Bestoratron
2D
Peirel Geophysics
r=
-3
f
aE
I--
--_
Restoration Model Settings

forthe model in the Settings dialog box. 0n
the Model tab rn the Modeling settings area, you can set these
options for the restoration model.
You change settings
Mesh resolution: Controls the total number of triangles

used to drscretize the 2D space. Choose between four
levels of resolution. The finer the resolution, the larger the

am0unt of time required for the computation. At a finer
mesh resolution, the chance of having bad triangles is
reduced.
Homogeneous mesh: Uses larger triangles in areas away

from the deformation and discontinuities. Smaller triangles
are used in nearby areas. This option allows a c0nstant
number of triangles to have an optimal space discretizatlon.
lmplicit function smoothness: Changes the way the
implicit function follows the trend given by the input data.
A smoother implicit function wlll honor the input data to a
lesser degree. This depends 0n your confidence in the
horizon picking (for example, when working with noisy
seismic data or low amplitude/ low frequency seismic
events).
Seismlc Festoration 2D
337
1.
f-J
H
Update the model in the Model settings dialog box or via
the Seismic restoration process dialog box.
Settl*4s lor'Restoraton
tnodl'
I-
,' .l.1'".,1,tt . '-'..,.
_l
fT
------
MdetlirssditEs
Flom4enw*s
a:=
i=
Nsmal
Itrlsh.*dulim
rch
I'l
-r
-,-ry: l@- -:1a9".*a]

2.
l--J
r
-J
Bight-click on the Restoration model ln Models pane and

go to the Settings dialog box.
L-
:
.r
Set*ngs for "R*toratin model'
--J
L-l
bl
.'
Er
JL
<
}-a
/
kMitilEF*il
338. Seismic Restoration
2D
Petrel Geophysics
F
tr
-.
Exercise
n
a Seismic Section
- youRestoring
will learn how t0 restore your seismic sectlon
ihis exercrse,
and interpret the horizon in the flattened space. Restoratlon enables

:ne interpreter to restore horizons to a specified flat level, quality
:ontrol the interpretation, and restore the chronostratigraphy to

better understand the sub-surface geology.
For
the sake of simplicity and time constraints, you will build
simple restoration model to demonstrate how fhe Seismic
Re.storation process is used in Petrel.
You are encouraged to
build models with more data.
1. 0pen an lnterpretation window and activate Ihe Seismic
2.
3.
interpretation
process rn Processes pane.

Display a crossline (for example, 470) from the seismic
volume mig [Bealized] 1.

Display 3D autotracked horizon or any other interpreted
seismic horizon and your interpreted faults.
NOTE: lt is important that the horizons you wish to restore
4.
5.
are in chronological order.

Display a few interpreted faults.
Right-click on 3D autotracked horizon rn the lnput pane and
select Flatten horizon(s) using currently visible
obiects. The Restoration model is created in the Models
pane.
/k
kJ
ll
ru
},il
!.ri.
ril
0bserve the structure and contents of the Restoration

model in the Models pane.
::'e
Geophysics
Se sm c Restoration 2D
339
}-
b-z
B.
l"
9.
Expand Ihe
l-r
-
Attributes folder and display different
attri b ute s.
When you have analyzed the model and its attributes,
nsert a new horizon from the lnterpretation tool bar and
name it
shallow marker.
Pick the
shallow-mlker holzon (with the trough at
L-
ts
L-
approximately -700 to -725 ms)"

10. Go to the Models pane, right-click on the restoration
model, and select Populate model with visible objects
L.<
h
in active interpretation window.

'1
1. Modify
your horizon picks lf required and click Refresh
restoration k,ton
the Seismic interpretation toolbar if
needed.
12. 0n the Seismic interpretation toolbar, click Toggle on

restoration
L
E
,F
to activate or Toggle off restoration

to deactivate the restoration in the lnterpretation
window.
13. Move t0 the next selsmic section. The restoratron model is
run for that section. Next time you display that section, it
will be run from cache.
1 4. Go to the Settings dralog box for the Zones attribute and
change the transparency for displaying it on the seismic
l,-
-/
l.a
l-
I--r
L-
section.
15.
IVlanrpulate the color display for the

Dr
Implicit
function,
lation, and Shearing attributes.
Refer to the
Petrel Help for more information about the restoration
Lt
Review 0uestions
f-.-
What are the benefits of seismic restoration?

How many restoration attributes does a restoration model
contain?
\
L-
Summary
ln thrs module, you learned about seismic restoration in Petreland
how to create a restoration model.
2D
l._
pr0cess.
o
o
340. Selsmic Bestoration
f--
Petrel Geophysics
t-
faI--tr
--l
E--
f
f-
Module 6
Depth
Conversion
--{
-.-
--Jr
l_-
r_--J
rEJ
Lf
f=
!=
f=
f
!=
r---l
--
elocity modeling and depth conversion are integral steps in seismic

rterpretati0n. ln this module, you will learn about basic velocity
,odeling and depth conversion in Petrel.
,
ln-depth toprcs are discussed in the advanced level petrel c0urse
Velocity Modeling.
Learning 0biectives
; --.***
ilq"*,'*'
.
.
.
.
.
.
o
.
.
create a velocity model and perform domain conversion

quality check time/depth relationships for wells
define velocity model intervals
create an uncorrected velocity model using well data
create a final corrected velocity model using well data
create a velocity model with uncertainty
perform a depth conversion on a 3D grid
perform a depth conversion usrng the active velocity model
perform a general depth conversion"
I-.---J
l_I--
Petrel Geophysics
Depth Cofversion.34l
h-r
Lesson 1
Basic Velocity Modeling
lb.Domain Gonversion Workflow

The domarn conversion workflow in Petrelis a two-step process. Frrst,
y0u must defrne a velocity model, then you use the velocity modelto
Li
l.-r
perform a domarn conversion on data objects.
L-:-
Complete these steps to define a velocity model:
1.
Define velocity intervals (zones, usually between time
2.
interpretation surfaces).
Define velocity functions (automatically calculated 0r user-
3.
--
defined).
Define output (for example, velocity cubes, V0, or k for quality

control purposes).
Use one of these four methods to perform a domain conversion on data
objects.
Bight-click an object and select Domain convert by active
velocity module. This method
.
.
L-EL
uses the currently active
velocity model.
Use ihe
General depth conversion process for multiple
l-i
objects.
Use a 3D grid conversion.
Perform a seismic data domain conversion.
L--
ri_
L
.-
2.
Neoth Convers on
Petre Geophvs
cs
rL..
-=
-
The velocrty model bridges the gap between Time and Depth domatns.
domain
The
Domain Conversion
process is described in the workflow
- "'! ',il-.i
2. Surface ; .i ' ..:, ::
1. COnstant
rr I
1. Constant i;-:- "
2. SurTace
3.
fl
-t;,
Horizon*
'd
4, WellTops
5. Or none
1. Calculated; Conection (Vo)
Daturn__
-_,--
rs
\\\\/^+
\ \ \vy
Vo_----t-'-Vo + k(z-20)
2. LIser defined; Constani or

3. Velocity SEGY (average)
4. 3D velocity ProPertY (
5. Horizon tied velocitY Poinis
1. Velocity
surfaces
2. Well data
points
3. Time & veloclty
logs
4.
5.
6.
based on TDR (Vo & kr

input
points
Functions
t sheet
J
:
l---J
Velocity Modeling Examples

The examples described in this module are based on time/depth
relationships in the wells that are used to build linear velocity models.
A minimum err0r estimation of the K value is obtained and used to
derive a V0 surface. Any correction built into the velocity model is
reflected in the V0 surface.
By selecting one of the velocity models, you can perform a domaln
conversion on a wide range of objects in accordance with that model.
For sensitivity purposes, you can use different velocity models to
convert the same object.
LinVel model
:l
}--a
:t
-l
:t
:t
:t
--J
--a
--
Minimum enor
estimation
vo
r-fr- I
F%
/'R
rt
lr
I
ii
F}
'"f
ffi
-r
:l
-_l
--a
-l
:
l--.
I{i asEd b} ai* rlsailj rodel
L-
:J
tr
_t
-l
I,-
--a
_l
I
^-l
L.
rat
aI--l
-E{
-.)
lnput Data Ouality Gontrol

Crossplotting the time/depth relationship data for one or allwells is an
efficient and timesaving method for finding and handling spurious data
po
nts.
ln addition to eliminating outliers and other errors in the cloud of points,

crossplotting is a good tool for identifying changes in the velocity field
that would be natural interval separators in the velocity model.

Remember that any change to a time-depth pair will influence the
calculated velocity values down to the next time-depth parr. Be sure t0
quality check every edit in the check-shot data. Check-shot data
consists of hard data points and should betrusted if there is no obvious
reason why it should not be.
Procedure
Creating a Crossplot of Well TDR Data

1. Open-a new Function window.
i:it--"*,it
irl
.,:..:.
:i!
ir.j iii.l
iirl..rr+::.
,r,ri"a"*ffiffiF
ffi
;F t,ir.1oir
H:ingEft *iE+!!
f=l
E
llt.rpretiisr' .,idi"l
E-n
rf lrieff ECi3. ;'.,ir.Cst
Find and expand the check-shot object under Global
well
logs.
. ]! mctea<*ors_m
, I!':il .ry*.*
3.
'-ll
Crossplot lnterval velocity against TWT picked (in the
Att ri b ute s
Perre GeophVsics
subf
lder).
Depth Conversion.345
r'=t
4.
Rght-click the check-shot oblect and open the Spreadsheet

:-i
mL]"
(*f
:r
*f
f,s
ill
dr
m
&
E
.f
..q
!q
[!
':f.
- - -
d)
f:
r-j (!
&
B
d q
LJ:
ci
*i
dr
is
d:
&
-l
!{f,
E'
,-i
ui
t): i1j
rF iE !
- - - -u
.t
,+
t*:
r-- (a rR
t'; ""i
f
ral
da
F.J
{ fl
UiJ
'F
t(
+f
Ftr
:r T
u_l
a!
'q
ul iF
fi
{r
r:1
-i.
r-.
ui
ial
qJ
r--
r-
ry
!
r.':l
r&
r
'l
rn
c?
a
Ei
.=
E
rJ
L:
Ll
&
[ ]]
f':.
,,.i
.i ul
"1
tfr u'!
u=a
fi
l:j
-J
flu1
rft
fl
d1
c'J
IF
+ !a
rt
l':l
E:J
el
t:l
ra +j
f'!r fl
u1 f-.
-*
E
L
0.,)
"
LF
t?
}
il
0
q:
.r*
11
IJ
4;1
ua
Depth Convers on
r! r:
u_j f
r.l
La
EJ
ra
(!
r1 , r'1
EI
t:: {-j
r r-:l E:
-J
d1
'f
*r:,
i=, ua
U
ts
r"ri
ir:
ff
ri
+r
':l
El
ffii
IL
r--
ri
1l
r
f,J
r:r I'r
Lf
Lf
L}
L:
=t
na
"J *'i
c:
r-,
L_-_;
ffi"i
J0l
s iffil --ffi"=,
:irrll
t I j] l;"=Ei
.
rfl
LTqJ
316
!1
,tr
#;
EN
nl
=i^
EI
iF|l!ql!AFrefie3i!
d
fJ
d)
t-:J
L:l
"J
j---
rt
fa
iii
",1
-j.
a-J
d1
d: q]
ui
in
.,
f.'-
r-,
a!
ii
r:i ry -,
-E
!a
iK
i,-l
* ll-,
r-r\ ru
r--
i$
di
ir
i(J
r!
r:
fr
U
ii:,
-f
l=r
l-l
l=}
raE.
]L
t\
Click Select/prck mode r h. or Select using freehancldraw
tlE
to capture one or more data pornts.
E\
I_fEt
----.1
Edit or remove the highlighted points in the spreadsheet

Arerag
:::':
Geophvs cs
rl*{ity
Interval vekcity
!4nl{ trrn
Ifrt.
vel
16ric
Depth Conversion.34T
a
..J
).,a
ModelWell Data Method

This method uses the established time/depth relationship in the
differentwells to derive V0 and K p0ints forthe specific intervals (each
a TDR gives V0/K values for each interval). These points are
gridded 0r averaged to create surfaces 0r constant values for the
wellwith
intervals that are used to create the velocity model.
-
-J
-J
)'1
t-^l
l
:l
..J
H
LI
)
Y
--l
l-r
^_l
-
.L
-r
_b-
F
-l
E{
lsert
stm poirr
dt SRD if nt csved
I-r
!
t
348
Depth Conversion
Petrel Geophysics
--/
ts
f-
-.
I_--{
f-r-4
The quality of the velocity model depends on the quality of the

source for the TDR.
The LinVel method (V=V0+K"Z)in Petrel can derlve V0 and
values using the Well TDR.

]rlllel]: Diernonil-14
Checkshot: AllCheckhots
-rl.E
-6
rl.
&
*s
TvD
[Diamon- I 4]
{nr=) f
inrsl
l,inees
Drift
TLhITC
\,q.,DRD
1:J
'll
inrsJ *
13
5rl[
Hsd.el
S=V#+lfE
$*:
l,fe,ll
TR - Surfe e
K l,riell TBF. - enste*t
Depth Converslo
349
J
:
L-J
Velocity lntervals
You can perform domain conversion from time to depth and depth to
time as wellas time to time and depth to depth (correctlon).

You choose datum based on the reference of your project. lf you use the
Time datum option, you can select Seismic Heference Datum
(SBD),
or a user-defined datum, if it is created in the Templates pane under
-l
t-<
l--J
-]
-l
the Dafums folder.
-d
SBD is offset from Mean Sea Level (MSL) in depth units for onshore
data. This offset is zero for offshore data rmplying that SRD = MSLfor
marine surveys.
Using the
L<r
Ihe Saved searches option ensures that only a selectlon of wells

that have been quality checked are used. Saved searches are defined
and stored rn subfolders under the Wellsf older.
Filters can consist of user-defined well lists, allwells that contain given
attributes, logs, and welltops, or objects thatfallwithin a boundtng
polygon. Both the estlmation and correction are affected by the filter.
Procedure
,1:11,:,;,,.r,..,
L-r
-t
:r
f\<
v S X
E--
-1
-d
1
Geneml depth conuersion
ffi * ba*f
irrt
eryretaiion
[r 5ei*mi*'*,ell tie
&
Depth Conversion
L-rd
ln the Processes pane, open the Make velocity model found
iP
Geo'Ftry*ic*
ffi Sesmi* interpretatirn
ffi l'olrme attritrutes
. Errface attribLtes
--.d
.r
Defining Velocity lntervals
under Geophysics.
350
Other option activates a user-deflned rnput selection for the
datum. You must enter a c0nstant or surface as the reference in the

from and to domains.
f,Iake rEstnratinn 2D madel
Petre Geophyslcs
--<
b_
L.
L
--
E--r
||||||tr
2.
3.
Choose the approprrate datum fg the project.

Click Append
item in table l.fjto add all the input objects.
!\
*latee
uel+ris madel
il , tlrete nr,,r,. UElacit5 m,:del
__
tdit Edstin:
Dtum
Time:
Isnn -
lZ
t..t tt'er
Depth Conversion o 351
Change the Base interval to the desired type, select it from
lnput or Models pane, click its nama and drop it into the
dialog box using the drop-in arrow [.4,_J
Specify the Correction of the velocity model.
Convert
frum: T1'.rT
r t:
ts
.-d
r-r
rr
L
\Lr
L-LJ
fL.lL.-
E
!
E-L.,
\r
,.J
}.J
I
-
l-J
,.J
352
Deoth Conversion
Petre Geophysics
))
L"-r
.b"
Velocity Modeling Using Well Data

^ trs method, the time-depth relationshrp (TDB)is used to derive V0
rntervals A llnear
a1d K p0ints for the various wells in each of the
'-rgression is used (the LinVel method) in the velocrtyidepth space'
the veloclty model'
,', ere V0 is referenced to the datum of
inputs:
Ailernatively, you can derive the velocity field from these
are
Average velocrty cube (imported SEG-Y or data that
converted to the average velocity cube with fhe Volume
attribute
.
.
.
Process)
Average velocitY ProPertY
lnterval velocity
velocity interval
Lrnear velocity ivO referenced to the top of the
with the AdLinvel method)

Horizon-tred velocity point data.
already derived' you

lf the interval velocity or linear veloclty inputs are
can enter them manuallY.
Procedure-UsingWellDatatoGreateaVelocityModel
l
Choose
tL. typ. of velocity model for each interval' When
usingtheLinvelfunctionformodeling,C0nstants/surfaces,
2.
3.
Well TDR, or corrections can be used as input'

Set V0 to Well TDR - Surface/Constant'
Set K to Well TDR - Surface/Constant'
!e:.+:i-*
E rer.r.*
SFi
==ll4r.eri,:."
&*
.
r1:ltli"
e ::'"1*'1lr
; itd&:
-.j
c"!&$
Depth Converslon
'
353
:-*,/
-
Correction and 0utput from Velocity Modeling

When you create velocity models, you can output the results in different
formats to quality check the model. 0n the Correction and output tab
in the Make
velocity model window, you can deflne the outputs to
--
generate and how they are generated.

These outputs can be defined for the entire velocity model.
Thickness: Allows you to specify depth and time tolerance.

Depth tolerance: Minimum thlckness of a zone (in
.
o
project depth units). lf the mintmum thickness falls below

this numbel the zone is not used for calculating V0 or k.
This option ensures that extreme values in thin parts of
the zone do not affect the rest of the model.
Time tolerance: Simllar to Depth tolerance, but in project
Lr
trme units.
Surfaces: Uses the specified gridding algorrthm t0 create all

l-=--.
surfaces during the VelociQ modeling process.

For better control over this gridding (for example, if you use
different methods for different zones), create the output as
points, grid them using
)-
ff,eMake/edit surface process, and
input the resulting surfaces instead of the TDB.

Gorrection: Determines how well ties are handled if
correction is used with well tops as input"

Output: Allows you to quality check outputs in the form of well
I,
v'
pornts data, logs, and functions. Ihe Make well report

optron generates a spreadsheet that summarizes the well tops
-r
L
correction.
LL
E_
L,
Lts
.-
L-
-L
354.
---3
Depth Converslon
Petre Geop
.:
ll
-L-
ra--
r----
a_
--
Creating 0utput to Ouality Gheck the

Procedure
Velocity Model
1.
2.
3.
{Effiffi
to see the controlling parameters.

Specify tolerance, gridding algorithm, and correction.
Choose outputs for the velocity model (full model 0C outputs).
Clrf
1;drMM
:. i (fl#:
fl
et('rdit: 1\'
tum
+
fn,
cr*
?a
tpfuY.
--..
. 9.!7wrl*
:t
::i
:1
ln the figure, Well points are shown on the left (from Step 2) and the
Velocity function is shown on the right (from Step 3).

.ffi)
-zry
1W
Z',lt.ne1tdual {Tn
Petrel Geophysics
ry
d*a sotrltsl
ffi
tafirtd-i 4 lTfr.1. v--+8.. "l=5M7 4027
F26F".
v:-0 7 44424'r,
Depth Conversion.3S5
t-4
L---,
Well TDR Estimation Parameters

These settings specify how the TDB estimation for the well ls derived
You enter these settrngs on the Well TDR estimation tab ln the Make
velocity modelwindow.
Based on the method that you choose for defining the velocity function
in any given interval, the lnterval velocity and Linear

subtabs are activated.
velocity
lnterval and Linear velocity parameters are the same except for two
I
rnear velocity-spectfic parameters.
Methods: Minimizes the error on elther depth or velocity

residuals. The option
Min number of TDR samples sefs a
lower limit for each well and each zone to be included ln the
estlmation.
The options
estimation o/K
for
both Linear velocity-speclfic selections.

Robust estimation: Attempts to generate good fits by
i,-,.---"1 For additional

inf ormation about these
settings, refer to the Petrel
TDH must exist for it to apply) or data wrth large reslduals.
you specify how to treat the

and the base of the
trajectory
the
well
rntersection between
zone. Select Estimae and adiust to base when the base
Base
-1
lra
t-
l!-
well intersection: Allows
estimation is used to derive the two unknown coefficients
Hel p..
Lr
(honors the rate of lncrease of velocity) are
down-weighting large residuals. Down-weighting can be

performed on wells (where a minimum number of wells with
L-.
Minimum'% of zone sampled by TDR
(percentage of zone filled with input data) and Optimize
'l
il
(V0 and K)
0utput: Allows you to quality check outputs
L-
r--
,L-
in the form of
logs, functions, and data pornts for each modeled veloctty

interval. lt rs important not to confuse these outputs wlth the
output for the entire velocity model specrfied on the
li-
-,-
Correction and outPut tab.

l
-L-
356.
Depth Converslon
-lL
L'
E
a-\
E.
El
IL
J
Procedure
Estimating Well TDB
1. Open-the Well TDR estmaton subtab.

2. Depending on the TDH estimation meth0d y0u ch0ose, click
3.
either the lnterval velocty or Linear velocity subtab.

Choose methods and estimation parameters for the
4.
selected rntervals.
Specify outputs for the modeled velocity intervals.
r' .ii
r::
$ 1r rmetoss i;'le.drloss
l- jt hen#h iil !1..q
3l E*,
Thls is an example of an error function

-1
t
I
:l
L-E
IJJ
I
I
I
legend
Allwells {TDRJ e=e{k}
Depth Conversion.35T
Velocity Modeling with Uncertainty

I
lncorporating uncertainty into the velocity model enables you t0
stochastically handle the variance in velocities. The workflow for

including structural uncertainty in Petrel has three parts:
1.
ldentify the possible error representing one standard

deviation.
2.
Multiply that error with a stochastic surface with values

around zero.
3. Add the error to the base case surface.

ln other words:
Sr=Sbc+U1s"Usgs
where
.
.
.
.
Sr is the surface realization

Sbc is the base case surface
U1s is the surface or constant representing one standard
deviation error
Usgs is the stochastic error surface (using Sequential
Gaussian Simulation).
L.
The standard deviation built into the velocity model can be

expressed either as a constant number or a surface.
i{f+
lire$
t::_fif=:i
Procedure
1.
2.
lk
L.
Inserting
a Standard Deviation Surface

- Velocity modeling
dialog box, toggle 0N the check
ln the
Dev. column.
Select the surface from the lnput pane and drop it in using
box to the left in the Std
the blue arrow.
L'L.
L.-
&_
l-
-,L,
t358
Depth Conversion
Petrel Geophysics
5-
L'
l-
-.
aE\
E-
-J
Procedure
Model
Using Uncertainty to Greate a Velocity
Create a new velocity model wth Well tops correcti0n
1.
Activate uncertanty page [e'?]to insert a ^S/d

Dev column and t0 actvate the Uncertainty tab.
Fill in appropriate standard deviation numbers.
Click
--_L
${
Mate velocity model
rl
rl
Create
ne*:
\'elocib/ i+1':del Llncertaini
[nnved fmm:
atum
{,
'*"---*--'----.Tim*:
-: ther:
roi.:::-
+ll',Ell#ilHll[:r!,*
l.Ell#l
Ease
ffil
w
&
s$risss i;+lt6trq.s
q)
xrlffi
3 HUST
urfase
ffi r*se
d: llffi FAHIS
Sur{are
lt
Applyfilter:
C,Effe{tbr*
r"Htiom l{+lm'tsE,$ .':l
\tJell iops
&
l"tjell tess
W KilEE
Hl tess
&PAEI5
sti
1*i
1i
HflUET
{
Dev.
J3
-)s-
--J
.-
4.
5. Toggle 0N the lconize uncertainty error surface
Fill in appropriate Variogram parameters'
_J
,-
checkbox.
t-rA
-)
,-
4
l--
-
}.
L-i
Lr
L
)--
generated contalnlng
Click Apply. A velocity model rs
velocity iurfaces with uncertainty built into them'
"
l';1
itudel thmt.*nitl
i*l \Hacil,
& l.l .rlrcns

r IV i L/ebeses
, Iv" lti .1,14s-?rFJ
l.
l,
r_.
Iv"
i:
lvo
tr
tr
.-: ,rt
.n
Hlf"gryFredi
Ea5 I -- -;r, .-i

!
r@
-lr.*m
Ik ili
I""
il
cc'scqsa?s.i
tt?051liirT'q-i
Ik
i,-:
.$sn:.'b' 'Tgs.l
=
L,
:' Iv- i- i trTti

TL . frETlTtFl
.',
tr
lv-';I PiFisrftF,i
Ik 1-,, -s,ar
;. ll:,1 ec,:aa
Petrel
360
Depth Conversion
Gec:-
.J
L.
I'
f---\
f--tt
f-
Check uncertainty statistics and display the corresponding
deterministic and stochastic V0-surfaces'
\i'r
Settinqs
I-\
f*r'
Llr*eertainrY*
1*38$.ffi 1'S1*7ffi.ffi
''l?sl&*.ffi
1:1*.ffi
14ffi*.*
-re?":s E4A,*57*
533.3435
-'r&**.ffi
A Determrnistic Vo-surface is shown on the left and a stochastic

V0-surface is shown on the right
:: -:
Seophystcs
)'lr-./
Lesson 2
You use Ihe
Domain Conversion
Domain convert by active velociQ model
process to perform a domain conversion for a single object. For

example, you can use this process t0 convert your interpretation
(horizon, surface) from time to depth.
Procedure
Performing a Domain Conversion by
Active Velocity Model
1
Make sure the correct Velocity model is actlve.
g-)
4-
|-/
!+
-
tH
From the lnput pane, right-click the object to be depth
converted and select Domain convert by active velocity

model.
i-w
$S
,, ,t l.-1
f,
ffi
v +x
rietrs
Ftelt
HDUStor'I a
ffi i. xosE ;
.*d
lb4l
I rnrJ
ffi I SALT
t--
Shf;. !E+tr'e!
5&C
li
tL-,1i1
tr'! Str,lii
Er:prd..
i:; arr3l E{ lqrl iilr lri!nj
$t E{lit 3lhl arlerlblr
l\cl/
Ftr?,ia
:l
;*
l<
BElEtr...
i;;
t&
a3lrlstrr
lrgi
Era
l'i3
i:"pi'
ii.
:,:
r"
..
alrl-E
.-
E-
rriltrte
3s aurtu.E
j--.ll,1ra'/Er,
Ei:tliad : rEt!:r!
nitfibLtt
N--'
i!.
|"."
a.
t362
rmpoted tmrDHilroh
,&l-.tffi,.
L-J
L
fope j
i--"1 Sesmic
,/:r.. 1-:: CultuEl dEla
'
H -
Depth Conversion
:lrd
ts
f--t.
in front 0f the depth-converted object to show

Click the
the available tlme and depth domains for the object.
'
1--
f--
---\
rE
I_*
,ffi
tJ {-} rt'r
ZI il nsat I {Ydodtv lrodd Wdl
ffi i-l
ffi i:
ffi
HoB
PHts
srr
The Time-depth settings can be changed in the top toolbar

Alternate between TWT and TVD while observing the
effect in a 3D window.
P3trel Geophysics
Depth Conversion
363
-'
)
.rl'*1
General Depth Gonversion
Domain convert by active velocity model process and

lhe General depth conversion process produce the same
domain convertecl result. However,fhe General depth
conversion process can perform a domain conversion on several
Ihe
data objects simultaneouslY.
^l
jt'
-

Procedure
Several 0biects SimultaneouslY
1.
To domain c0nvert several objects simultaneously, open the
General depth conversion process dialog box.
*.3,Tffi.---,,,
ks{"n
rdigrWtf
{ig*g**is
ffi
ffi
Sesr'n* xterp;etat*
Vei.,rne Stbr**
.'."$ Surfa*e attrxae
'.:i
*,rt*na-'"
tu*
ssdredi**
iV1 l'*ev*i*#ym*de
&xffi
ffi
C***aw$rds*
e;u:ucv+ell
&
2
V-1
ti*
$i&ks r*sc,ia*n ?B l*d*l
Choose the correct velocity model from the drop-down
Lr
["
L-r
L
trt!
menu.
EL
\!
f-
E
f.
364
Depth Coversion
i:\
,.
r-r---
L-
3.
pane and clicking Append selected tem
r,
L"
-
Drop in the objects by clicking their names in the lnput
Process dialog
ffi
er:*r*l **pttr
EJ
in the
box.
<uu***o
-e,$ cr,. efi
--
; l
I=
-r\
tr*lc*lly ri-:**ei:,'l*li -i
Bemi
3J
a=
--_f
Ohiadt
ffirg
[F.*ehzed]
i_I
linte
{i**:pr
!,1
Time
:IrT
4.
si*raic
F***ard
l*
*-*ard
HosE
Fa.tard
3 *ei*nie
Tine
Tim*
B,irctroff
1
ji
Fuli rrterpreiilc,.
Forxa;d
F*r*"ar.d
The Time-depth settings can be changed in the top toolbar
Alternate between TWT and TVD while observing the

effect in a 3D window and the lnput pane.
Deoth Conversio .365
*./
_-/
-+
Seismic Data Domain Conversion

Performing a domain conversion on seismic data can be timeconsuming. The 3D volumes consist of large amounts of data and
the entire volume must be read, handled, and included when
calculating the new domain version of the cube. The process also
Includes value scanning and realizing the seismic data.
Using the Volume attributes process allows you t0 create a
virtual (or realized) domain converted seismic cube and gives you
the option t0 use a lower interpolation quality of the result.
...*-
irl *
ir:
l=.ri
i.;i
Performing a Domain Gonversion on

Procedure
Seismic Data
1. 0pen the Volume attributes process under Geophysics
in the Processes Pane.
5
lr,L
L-
L
Under Category, choose Depth conversion. Under
Attribute, choose General depth conversion.
lt
F
l!-
366
Depth Conversion
Petrel Geophys cs
ll-
L
L
L
Ir
Toggle 0N
OFF
Realize to create
a Virtual volume (or toggle it
if this is not what you wish to do).
I----__J
II
I---J
l_
D*ptlr
csflr,ersior ;
Generai ciepth crsl*n
II
r*
ilil
,t
i
--___..--
Ir
lilry1-l_ *-*---l
1_
I lnpuuo':gut
lnput:
F-_i
L
f_
f
f
l__
f
f,
flup{t:
E]
r,
II
f_
E
l-is lnealedl l
rt
r,--I
l.'{@-l
rt
r-J
rf
4.
ll,!T,i i.!'-41
For rnput, choose the seismic cube to be depth converted.
0ptionally, specify the 0utput name.

0n the Parameters tab, specify the velocity model to use
for domain conversion as well as the interpolation quality.
-----I
rr-J
1_
-J
O.pth Conr.oiot
. mZ

Depth Gonversion for 3D Grids
To perform a depth conversion on a 3D grid, you must activate it in
the Models pane.
You select the velocity model in the Depth convert 3D
grid dialog
box. You can choose how the faulted and non-faulted pillar
geometries are treated when stretching the grid between the two
domai ns.
Procedure
Grid
1
Performing a Depth Gonversion on a 3D
Verify that the correct 3D model is active.
F
Lir
5T'#on
l:.
;ts
i.
ffi
ffi
--
l.-
L
.tr*f+
?ers
t'str
a"si
.--/
l'-/
r-I
ffiu .Ior'e.#e.
l;
L-r
L-I
l1
@$
ffi
tiic
l:
,#ss,rd,ix"r*
4t* .ftt*#er
ir
lffi tn
egltresdr$er
__t
From the Processes

select Depth
!-r
L.
EJ
L
H/
]--/
:l
L-
3.
368
Depth Conversion
k-i
Choose the appropriate Velocity model.

Petrel
Gecp.,,. :
-J
l*<
t_.1
ffi
vdtrdy nde{
rerre
Geophysics
,'r ,lti}, aE"l
Depth Conversion
.369
Y
4.
Alternatively, change the pillar geometry types for faulted

and nonfaulted pillars.
A new 3D grid displays in the Models pane wlth the name
of the input and velocity model extension.
!-
t
L-r
-.rJ
>.-d
t_l
rffiffi
: ffi;-l
ffi'
r ffi
&;:
:'
i{*
ffi
il
r, g gl
I ft $
,srr**n"
Fas
&siffi
ec**
|L<t
-r
***,sl*
serr,tu-
)-r
,r**me
*nei*r
fHtr
F
-]
_l
-a
5l
LJ
_)
)r-a
_r
'_l
LJ
370
Depth Coversion
Petre GeophVsics
-TI
L.
LL"
r--{
r,- t
r--
L'
Il_a-.
ln
Modeling
VelocitY
these exercises, you wlll perform basic velocity modeling
Exercises
in
Petrel.
Exercise Workflow
1. Ouality controltime-depth relationships for wells'

?. Define velocity model intervals.
3. Create an uncorrected velocity model using well data'
4. Create a corrected velocity model using well data'
5. Create a velocity model with uncertainty'
0uality Checking Time-Depth Relationships for Wells
---l
ts_r
lnput pane, right-click the Wel/sfolder and select

lmport (on selection).
fin'd tne NlCheckShots.cs file under Data import > Well
ln the
input data > Check Shots.

r)
J
Select CheckShots format (ASCll) as Files of type'

0pen the file and click 0K in the lmport dialog boxes' The
data in this file was exported from Petrel, so all
parameters are set correctlY.
Navigate
fo Wells> Globalwell logs>
cs > Attr i b ute s.

R i ght-c ick Al t C h e c kS h ofs. cs and se ect Spreadsheet'
From the Window menu, select the option to insert a new
Al I C h e c kS h ofs.
6
1
Function window.
Depth Conversion.3Tl
,-,/
?J,
>-.
picked
ln the Function window, create a crosspl0t of the
B.
IWT against the lnterval vel0clty attributes of

AllCheckShots.cs.
.)
::J
--_:-.1:-.,-,.-"-':.-----..--
,:rr
:.i
tl
;:
i
i.;
.j
.F
j.
H
L--
--
'lt
l-F
h , identify any outlying point'

Click Select/pick mode
and cllck it. The corresponding row in the check-shots
spreadsheet is now highlighted. You can edit the row or
delete it.
10. Click
,..,-...,: Editing or deleting

any check shot loint will
influence the calculated
velocitLes down to the next
check-shot pair. Make sure
that the resulting interval
,J
*
tr
i'
velocity is still within the
11
Select using freehand draw'@'
L.
unO
draw
polygon ln the Function window that captures some

outlying points. All points that fall lnside the polygon are
now highlighted rn the spreadsheet You can move the
polygon or edit any of the polygon nodes.
Click Gancel in the spreadsheet so that you do not change
the orrginal check-shot data.

and go
12 Open te Settings dralog box for the Wellsfolder
to the Time tab.
normal range of values. The

changes you make in the
372
Depth Conversio
L.
L.
[-
-3
L.
spreadsheet do not take

effect until you click APPIY
or 0K.
L-
!.
Petrel Ge:c
L-
13
AllCheckShos.cs check box and move it

to the top 0f the ltst. Make sure that it ls the only entry in
Toggle 0N fhe
the list that rs selected. This setting determines whlch

time-depth relationship is used when calculating V0 and
in fhe
Make velociQ model
process.
Clrck Run, then click 0K.

*$ Settieg:for'Yfell:'
.-., Fmm shaed cieekshat
lt,
From vElocft/
t:
fitiB
,--,.
,Ll
I
'J
itl *tt*t-siG*
lr: l
At
BT
Al
Scfl._
UH
l
l
ll *,,,:l tr$-:i iJrl

IMP0RTANTT All remaining steps in this exercise are optional
Depth Convers on
373
15.
ln the Well Tops I > Attributes folder, make TWT Auto

the active attribute.
16. ln the Stratigraphy folder of Well Tops l, right-cllck
CARACAS and select Convert the active afiribute to
points.
17. Click No
in the dialog box that displays. The new point
data appears at the bottom of the lnput pane and is named

CARACAS (TWT Auto).
18. 0pen the Settings dialog box for the point data.
19. 0n the Operations tab, expand lhe Arithmetic
operations tolder.
20
UseZ=Z-Surface(x,y)
21
ln the !nput pane, find fhe Surtacesfolder and click the
blue arrow to drop CARACAS into it.
ffi
ro
Click Create new obiects in the same folder
that you do not to overwrite the original point data.
23 Click Run t0 create time difference points between the
well tops and the time-interpreted surface. (lf there was a
perfect match between the surface and well tops, all point
values would be 0, but this is not the case.)
22
24
Click 0K
25. Under Utilities, open the Make/edit surface process.

26. Delete the object from Besult surface, if there is one, and
27
Lr
click YES in the dialog box that opens"

Drop rn the newest pornt data set (f rom the bottom of the
lnput
_\-
pane) as Main rnput.
28. 0n the Algorithm tab, selectMoving averagefor

Method.
29. 0n the Geometry tab, select,4 utomatic (from input
data/boundary).
30
CIick 0K.
J1.
a1
Open a new 3D window.
JL,
Toggle on the surface in the lnput pane and observe the
,}
-_
surface against the point data.

aa
.).1
ln the same 3D window, display the surface CARACAS and
Well Tops 1 filtered on CAHACAS. Make sure the display

setting for the 3D window is TWT. Try to determine which
well does not fit the time-interpreted surface.
n a new
374.
Depth Conversion
Well
t-
window
Petrel Geophysics
.-
E
fE\
-J
-._f
-
Select wells Fluorite-A7, Jade-A4, and Mica-A3.

Jb. Display Well Tops 1.
JJ.
3l
Under Globalwell logs, click
3B
Expand Al I Ch e c kS h ots. cs > Attri b ute s.
39
Display the lnterval velocity check-shot attribute in the well

section. There is no obvious deviating velocity trend in
Fluorite-A7 compared to the other two wells. At this point,
DT.
there is n0 reas0n to not trust the time-depth relationship

for this well.
&! ,i1
Depth Convers on
375
5.-.
, Defining Velocity Model lntervals

between time
ln most cases, veloclty model intervals are defined
Petrel because
in
prerequisite
a
interpretation surfaces. This is not
to define
,un use horizons (from the 3D grid) and c0nstants
-/
fo,
interval boundaries as well.

from 3D grids You
ln this exercise, intervals are based on hortzons
will define several velocity models from these intervals'
1.
open the
ln the Processes pane under Geophysics'
-L-
M a ke vel oc i tY mode I Process'
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click Append item in the

Change
6.
table:'dj'
.L
type t0 Horizon and leave
Correction set to None'

Set the Model tYPe to V=V0+K"Z'
{sretii}l
-*'rli*l
1
ih. But. interval
lists:
Make these selections from the drop-down
V0: Well TDB - Surface
'
'
K:
Well TDB
>
Constant'
Hdel
x'r*" I r r'erl rnR - l*"t**'

four more
Click Append item in the table ffi to insert
vo.e*r
entres.
u'*tt rnR--
ihis action dupllcates the previous setup for the
it manually'
remaining intervals, so you do not have to do
new
0n the Make velocity model tab, select Greate
and name the new model
vell'tod
well
data
L.
.L,
uncorrected.
.
t0 Z'
lnhe Convert from drop-down llst, select TWT
the
from
SBD
select
then
lnhe Datumara, select Time,
drop-down list.
(found under
10. ln the Models pane, expand 3D Grid model
New modell and its horlzons.
>
t-L-
L
376
Petrel GeoPhYsics
Depth Converston
f=
L'
LLU
L_
1f
U
---t
a---t
.:=
3 :< Multiple drop in the table iii an c ic< 're c r

tc slru laneolsly drop ali horizons ln the first
,',r',',
--
---_\
Ei.
--
TC\\'.
.q \li!i !.I.div Fr+dei

'':-: i :::. _::a
ltf:s
: e
r" r
Tim:
i-
E
r=
f
r_
-{
,:n
v lo'
'
SFlt
C{}-rar:
4jre
Nce
Hfl?et:
Harz*
]
;?:l
Hsri:r
a-
Vell-1.rd ',"iell Elala l-"ln'qretd
ft,-
l:.
r-^
--{
ne'i'r
ttr_ Frl
E_-\
-.
aet
illJll,ill
i=V3+lfi
KCBE
N+re
F;Fl
l*.e
5nL
Ha?of,
Vjlt*;
l.lcne
.J-i-rl
V0, \,,/*tl
T8
it"qe
!.iell TOR - Sufale

J0 r.'..re]i fSF. - Sudx:
tJ:
r'1lll TDR'tror
K: l',.;l TF' - Llsmti
K: !'Jell
f=V*lt"!
\"=\,t+lf!
K 'v.!lTD
r,r:
lellTE'
rfre
lr.:
TDH - ln:tr,1
\{el1 TDF -
Cei:tarl
you will use these intervals for the remalning vel0city modeling
function definitions'
exercises, changing 0nly the different velocity
Well
Creating an Uncorrected Velocity Model using
Data
Thetime-depthrelationshipsalreadyestablishedareusedt0Create
a velocity model with n0 correct0n'
1.
ln the
Make velocity model dialog box' click
iY@
2
(if the settings are
n.t already shown) A
box
set of subtabs displays in the lower part of the dialog
Correction
sure
make
tab,
0n the Gorrection and output
is set to None. Use the default settings for the remaining
parameters.
'0n
the Well TDR estimation tab, observe that only the

Linear velocity subtab is available because a linear
function is selected for all intervals' Leave these
velocity
settlngs as they are and click 0K t0 generate the velocity
model.
Depth Conversion o 377
,*Al
L--4
-l
)
L-
4.
5.
6.
1
B.
Perform a quality check of the velocrty model. lf a

spreadsheet rs opened, it will have no entries because no
correction has been done at this stage.
Close or iconlze the spreadsheet.
Go to the Models pane and expand Velocity models>
ln a 3D window, display CARACAS against Well Tgps
ldD
it-
L--J
.l,ln
the
toolbar drop-down list. 0bserve the mismatch between the

well tops and holzons in depth. This is what you willtry to
eliminate in a corrected velocrty model.
The welltop for Fluorlte-A7 is high above the horlzon in
depth. The time and depth pick of this marker is too high for
both models, which you can test by displaying the data in
TWT and TVD. However, the trme-depth relatronshtp is
good, as demonstrated by ihe check shots in a Well
section window. lt is the initial depth pick that needs
lE-J
L--
L--a
!.
L--
-/
correction"
ln the next exercise, you
will clear thls well top before
correctrng the velocity model to the well tops.
--d
L--r
f
--r
!
t"-
L-
,-
l+
f
E
378
Depth Conversion
-/
VelMod well data uncorrected> Horizon.

Change the time-depth settings to TVD
-_l
Petre Geophvslcs
ln the
lnput pane, right-click WellTops I and open the
spreadsheet.
i0
Find the CARACAS well top for Fluorite-A7 and clear it in
fhe Used by dep.cony column. (you can use the Well
filter in the dialog box to find it.)

11
f=
ta-.^
-E{f
fafL=
-
h-
Click 0K
Creating a Gorrected Velocity Model Using Well Data

1. Open the Make velocity model process.
2. Set well tops in lhe Correction columnfor all five
3.
4.
5.
entries
ln the lnput pane, expand Welt Tops / and drop the
correct well tops into the Stratigraphysubfolder.
Select Create new, name the new
well data corrected,
modelvelMod
and leave the intervals as
defined.
0n the Correction and output tab, take these actions:

ln he Correcfion section, select Adiust and Use
a.
influence radius and enter an influence radius of
b.
1000 feet.
lnthe Aueuf section, select the Time logs and
Velocie /ogs check boxes and make sure the Make
well report and Reset sheetfirst check boxes are
selected.
F--I
af
a!r-{
l---
-L-f
--
Depth Conversion
379
,
-)
E-{
-)
l il.!. ldaei* $de|
'
ar
E-,
:J
*s&:
,--
*)
L-J
-J
_l
L-.J
t6','c.:ilii;lesr,i. *iT-t:!!-'1..il
Oi
**
tso,c,
tl -rre:&:#':
*
tr
Ct.\.refr
liu*H*d:
r::-#bs
if*.s*
fr;'r*iq5
tr:
:": lm.r,
fi.&of f@s
*i: ,*'a**:*m
*. ': , arr" & e es
j-:
ri
J-
>
/
:&i
Le*fr#*r
6k:
' ,*,:{,,1:
qd
+l
ll
.ia
d 'ei
i,, ,!, aels*t
at. i!, sE
*sl&:::
r3#i
ust
-a
L
>
b.
0n the Well TDR estimation tab, Linear velocty

(This selecton
*U,un, click 0ptimize for estimation of K
the
gives a best esiimate of V0 and K, while still honoring
rate of increase of velocitY).
wlll downSelect Use data weights. This command
weight data points with large residuals'

1.
l*!.
E
E
Select these outputs:

Time-depth
.
.
.
o
]L
L.
Velocity
Error
Data Ponts.
E
L-
380
Petr
Depth Converslon
el GeophYsic:
FL
Clrck 0K t0 generate the veloctty model.
luEU tuuS
l,,linimum depth
h4inimum
relac
lclin
TDE samples:
oi one sampled
iJi
TDR
ptm* fnr eetimatin l K
--''-'
Robust rs'timtinn
;,,1 Use well ','*eiglrt*
r]l
fi'lin numberu{
lvlin numher
cf ivells
Use data,leillts
Ease rwell irtersetir,n:
l+rrecti.n
r-r
TF int+rs+ti*1,'
ft,lat number,l iterations:
I'ffi
Trleran*e:
:,,fi
--i
Estimet and adjust tn ba*e
'lutE,ut
'"'elacitl loqs
$ Tin e l':gs
ll .r Time.Jepth i \,Eli'chl
,pto
9.
,.d
hl in,::
Enrr
l.iumber uf smFle:
lat
Data noints
After the modelrng process is finished, check the well

report and focus on CARACAS. Fluorite-A7 has not been
c0rrected as spectfied ln the Well tops spreadsheet and
descnbed rn the previous exerclse.
10.
Close 0r icontze the well report.
1'1. Perform quality c0ntrol on the horizons and focus on

CARACAS
12
13
Under Velocity mldels in the Models pane, expand

VelMod well data corrected> Horizons.
Display CARACAS in a 3D wrndow and expand it in the
Models
pane.
Change time-depth setttngs for the wlndow to TVD ustng.

Compare the horizon in depth wlth the corresponding well
tops.
IB
0pen a new Function window.

ln the Models pane, expand VelMod well data
corrected> ac data.
0bserve the content infhe Zone: Datum - CARACAS
folder.
19
Plot any of the functions in the Depth/velocity functions

folder.
Depth Conversion.3Sl
=
20
Open the Settings dialog box for the velocity model
21
VelMod well data corrected and click the 0perations tab

Expand the Velocity conversion folder and observe the
available operations.
22
SelecI
"5.
=-
Averctge velocie cube (inc)and leave the
default parameters
23.
Ensure fhaf Use input domain type is selected. Thrs

option creates the volume in the time domain.
?4
Click Run. The realized velocity volume VelMod well data

corrected [Realized] appears in a new survey folder at the
bottom of the Sersm ic main folder in the Input pane.

Display the default in-line and cross-line from the velocity
cube in a 3D window.
26 Change the time-depth settings for the window to TWT.
21. lf necessary, update the colors for the seismic velocity
25
cube.
Greating a Velocity ModelWith Uncertainty
lrl
So far, you have defined interval velocities in a deterministic way
within the Velocie modeling process. The next step is to do

stochastic velocity modeling; that is, to incorporate uncertainty into
the process.
1. 0pen the Make velocity model process.

2. Use the same setup for this velocity model as you did for
3"
the last velocity model that you created.

Click Create new and name the new modelvelMod
uncertaint.y.
4.
Click
Activate uncertainty page
ff,,
Std Dev.
coiumn and the Uncertainty tab are activated.

Enter the standard deviation as constant values for each of
the velocity model intervals.
6
0n the Uncertainty tab:
a.
b.
I
382
Depth Conversion
Change Variogram type to Spherical and assume

isotropy. (Keep the default ranges and azimuth).
Toggle 0N the
check box.
lconize uncertainty error surface
L
L--
1-
L]
LI
tsl
-l
\-J
---l
L.
_l
L--{
_-l
L,
Click 0K
Petre Geophys cs
-J
-Lr
rL-
L-
r-\
l4;*&iiy'i*'
+<!,rlrtrt-r$
!*!a
L'
L'
I-I
|.
-.-
':_..---:l:::.
..:::*rtq{t*n- .1;..f_lf rl+,.,
r:,?
'
f...':rif'
':
-t
"l
1,*:,'tt $1,"r!,
gr
:.
t1&: &*
3
qr#r i6fr
f,F*
'{.t*!{lea*ekl
l: n-$.ee*$arss',v-.
f: r:,'r,t { taE{
When the process is flnished, close the spreadsheet and

qualrty check the velocity model by displaying some of the
res
lts:
a. ln a 3D window, view the V0 surface for CAHACAS in

b.
the Models pane (Velocities folder > VelMod

uncertainty modelt.
Compare rt with the V0 (Corrected) surface for
CARACAS. Right-click the V0 (Corrected) attribute
under CARACAS velocity surface and select Use as
visual vertical position for this velocity model.

Display the uncertainty surface:
a.
Fight click the Uncertarnty attribute under CARACAS

velocity surface and select Use as visual vertical
position for this velocity model.
b.
0pen the Settings dialog box.

0n the Statistics tab, find the mlnimum and maximum
uncertainty values.
2-
Exercises
Gonversion
Performing a Domain
will learn the fundamentals of domain
convers ion.
Depth Gonverting a 3D Grid

After establishing a preferred velocity model, or several models for
sensitivity purpOses, you can c0nvert 3D grids and other standalone
objects between domains.
1. lnthe Models pane underthe
New modelfoldet activate
3D Grid.
2
ln the Processes pane under Corner
point gridding,
Depth convert 3D grid process.
From the Velocity model drop-down list, select the
VelMod well data correctedvelocrty model.
open the
0ptionally, reduce pillar geometry complexity by clicking off

geometries for both faulted and non faulted pillars.
This step is not recommended but, in this exercise, the 3D
grid has simple geometries, so this step will have limited or
no effect.
5.
Click 0K. A new model named 3D Grid (VelMod well data

corrected) is displayed in the Models pane.
6. View and check the model in a 3D window. This 3D grid is

in the depth domain, as indicated by a blue icon in front of
its name;3D grids in the time domain have an orange icon,
L*
General Depth Conversion

You use lhe
General depth conversion process to perform
domain conversion 0n many objects that have been imported into or

created in Petrel. 0bjects n0t penetrated by wells will still have
well control if welltop c0rrection is incorporated into the Make
velociQ model
process.
lf more than one velocity model exists in the project, y0u can use
the sensitivity of the depth conversion method for the same object.
There are two ways to perform a depth conversion on the cropped
and realized seismic volume used throughout this course.
384
Depth Conversion
b*
Petrel Geophysics
!.
E=
E
r-'
E-.
I'L'
L-,_lr
EI
ff=
---r
Bight-click on a seismic cube (for example,

mig [Crop]
[Realized] 1) in the lnput pane and select Volume
attributes.
The Volume
attribute dialog box opens.
2. Under Category, selectDepth conversion.

3. Under Attribute, selectGeneral depth conversion.
,.o1,:"i.:.
fttgory
rlkr
D*pi (nl,eI1t
ti
ti
-.
r.-.r
Using the Domain Convert by Active

Velocity Model
Command
tnlut'trS{r
l;;ltiJi
ffi g
ni $rop) r l{rli:*d: r
I'
aL.'
I
-.
-.-l
a-I
-r-{
E
r_---|l
Depth Conversron
385
:-J
4.
model to use
0n the Parameters tab, specify the velocity
.L
(for example, VelMod well data corrected) and click 0K'

mig
The new seismic volume in depth appears under
mig lGrop] 1
lCropl tllRealizedl and is named
iRealizedl
I (VelMod well
data corrected)'
L-
>
L
lk
L
=
E.
C
L.
tr
6.
created
Display an inlrne and crossline from the newly
seismlc volume.
the window are set
Enqq!'g that the time-depth settings for
to
--jt :
ll-
tL.
t.386
Petrel GeoPhYstcs
Depth Conversion
Er-
f
f
f
E----
It"
Using the General Depth Conversion Process

1. ln the lnput pane under Geophysics, open the General
d epth co nv er sion Process.
2.
Seiect the preferred velocity model from the drop-down

I
J.
ist.
Highlight mig lCrop] 1 [Realized] 1 and drop it into the list
ial
by clicking Append
selected item to the list l**ll
Click 0K and observe the new volume in a 3D window'
-rr
f
f
-r
Fq
E
f
aF-I
F-{
Converting More than 0ne Obiect

You can use another approach to perform domain conversion on
other objects, such as horizon interpretations, fault interpretations,

surfaces, and point data.
1.
0pen the
General depth conversion process (if it
ts
not alreadY oPen).

ln the Input pane, select one of your horizon
interpretations, one interpreted fault, a surface, and if
available, a point data set.
Append them one-by-one into lhe
General depth
conversion process list and click 0K.
!,,e]ct
!"11
i3
csrlld
E
a
I_
--{
Open a new 3D window and display all oblects that you

selected rn the previous steP.
Depth Conversion
387
,)
Window menu, select Change time/depth
settings to change between TWT and TVD Observe the
ln the
differences.
Notice that these objects now have an Attributes
subfolder available.
see the
Expand one of the depth-converted objects to
I
nf
ormati on
spl
ayed in rhe Attri
ufes subf o lder'
Review 0uestions
.
.
well data in a depth

Can seismic data in a time domarn and
lf
be viewed together rn Petrel? yes' how?
domain
What inputs are required in Petrel to define a velocity
model?
can
When you have made a velocity model' what objects
l7ou use to convert the domain?
time domain A
in yow data set, all seismic data is in a
to the
new setsmic cube in a depth domain pertaining
you
use the
you
Can
adloining area becomes available t0
Domain conversion process to convert this seismic
t--
cube into a time domain?
L.
SummarY
a velocity model and
ln this module, you learned about creating
performing domain conversion'
.-
L-
388
PetreL GeoPhYs cs
Depth Conversion
Appendix A
Shortcut
for Seismic lnterpretationKeys
.-
-'-
SelectanyvsbleF
I e tnttne'
,ri""rr,l, i'l
,A/rnrlnrncl or .^):^r redispiay
verticai
,yll*y:)
rnterpretation
Shift +
crossline, qeneral
d lrne (Base map
",r*#;Xolun so
r,rrrJ
window).
Selecllniinelrlffiuw/
map
and 3D winoows)
setect oithos;;;',
,;;;,:'(Base
u,"'oL' ciick
,ffiand
,,J,:i:fl
drag
torlontarvtn
rn+-+^ -^
to rorate
il;;
*fl,;:;1,,v
CreateArbitrar}/
lntersection
wrndows).
Shift +
CreateseismicAF
l'0lyiine Intersection
uno so
E
E
I_-
-I
E-,.r
I_-
Shift + X
H/t)
(Base
*irl*i.''""'
Actiuate erase,
mode (il
,,
,up rno
gO
rg*. ,rp
w,ndo
Movether1uuffiacllve
section
lAil
windows).
'
by a given
incremil
t'tf'?t.trrritrrtlorr,z
!1,tt inturprutrt,*
(R
iTFrrftr,i.k/ffi
rr,.,p,.
Shift + A
1.,',::r
Sut 3p r.uouo
rriil.kio
sno,tcut t<eys torGsm,c.
tnterpffin -ras
J/
-l
L-r
fl
Set 2D seeded autotracking mode.
Set 2D guided autotracking mode.
Set manual drawing mode
Set paintbrush autotracking mode (2D window only).
Shift + 0
Set active box autotracking mode (2D window only).
Ctrl + 0
Set active box autotracking mode (2D and 3D window)
Del
Delete selection.
Activate the Select/Pick Mode.
Z-
Zoom (lnterpretation window).
Shit + Z
Unmagnify (only if magnifier has been used in the
:]
-}.1
L--/
-l
)
L--/
L]
lnterpretation window).
L--
(+)/ (-)
Zoom inlout (lnterpretation window).
Ctrl +Z
Undo the last editing action.
l--
Ctrl + Y
Redo the last editing acton.
Select parent points (Base map and 3D window).
Shift +
(+)i
Select child points (Base map and 3D window)
Zoom inlout (lnterpretation window).
{-)
Select Composite selection (Base map and 3D windows)
_-
>-ia
)--/
-
0r c0mpose wrth intersecting line lnterpretation
L.-r
window).
,L
Draw arbitrary composite intersections (Base map and

3D windows).
..
Draw alrgned composite sections (Base map and 3D
Shift + W
.E
windows).
Compose w th inline (lnterpretatron window)
Shift +
Compose w th crossline (lnterpretatron window).
Clip and extend composite (lnterpretation window).
Restrict active horizon
Shift +
Shift + Up I Previous vintage

t
/ fault (3D window).
Restrict visible horizons / faults (3D window).
Nrrrrx
L-
a-
-L.
E
E
L'=
----
LI-
Q-i;
D
rrow
Ciri + Up
E.
Arrow
ts-r
Down
hr
Nen,",iniage
l',','n
Ctrl +
Previous interpretation.
Next interpretation
Arrow
--.t
Sh0rtcut Keys f0r Seisri.
lrt.,[.tutio* fSt
rLL-_
LL-L'
lli
--
Appendix B
Attributes
Surface
L,-tt
E-
--I
surface attributes provide you with additional information and

understanding of the seismic data. The followinq surface attributes
are
available in Petrel:
Arc length
Measures reflection heterogeneity and may

be used to quantify Iateral changes in
reflection patterns. lt is a stratigraphic
sequence indicator.
Average duration
of negative loops
Gives the average duration of all negative

loops rn a given interval. lt is undefined if
Ea
I.-'
a-'
fl\
-.
I-
there is no loop that requires two zero
L-
E
a:
E
a--E4
E
a-
cross i ngs.
Average duration
of positive loops
Gives the average duration of positive loops

in a given interval. lt is undefined if there is
no loop that requires twO zero crossings with

positive amplitudes.
Average energy
The squared RMS Amplitude. This attrrbute

a measure of reflectivity within a time or
depth window and may be used to map direct

hydrocarbon indicators in a zone.
Average loop
duration
Defined as the average duration of all loops.

It is undefined if there is no loop (requires
two zero crossings). lts reciprocal (for

example, 500/Dav if the sample rate is 4 ms)
gives an approximate average frequency of
the seismic data within the extraction

window.
ts-rl
I---
Appendlx B
Surface
Attributes. 393
_l|
Average magntude
Measures the reflectivity within a time 0r

depth window, but is less sensitive to large
numbers than RMS Amplitude.
This attribute may be used as a hydrocarbon
indicatot or to isolate geologrc features that
express themselves as anomalous amplitudes
__Lb
relative to backqround values.
Average negative
amplitude
Gives the average of all negatrve amplrtude

values within the analysis window. The
amplitude range t0 include rn the calculation

can be controlled with the parameter
selector. The data range to include can be
within the defined interval or outside the
defined interval. The default is to use all data
_b
va Iues.
Average negative
trough value
Measures the negative reflectivity within a

time or depth window. 0nly trough values
which are negative are included in the

average. This allows discnmination of Iocal
minima in the posrtive lobes of the seismic
waveform.
Average peak
The average of all peak values in a window.
value
These peak values can be local maximums, in
which case negative peaks are also averaged

in. This attribute can be a measure of the
positrve reflectivity withrn a time-depth
window.
Large or small values may be used as a direct
L-
-L
L.
hydrocarbon indicator.
_-=!
Average peak
Similar to the Average peak value attribute,
value between zero but instead of takrng all peak values, only the
largest peak between each pair of zero
crossings
-L
crossings is taken.
The output may provide a better measure of
reflectivity when tracking a single event.
}
394 o Appendix B
Surface Attributes
Petre Geoflhysics
\-
Average positive
Glves the average of all positive amplitude
amplitude
values within the analysis window

The amplitude range to include in the
calculation can be controlled with the
parameter selector. The data range t0 include
can be within the defined interval or outside
the defined interval. The default is to use all
data values.
Average positive
peak value
Similar to the Average peak value attrlbute,

but instead of taking all peak values, only the
peaks in the positive lobe of the seismic
waveform are taken.
Average trough
value
Measures the average of negative reflectivtty

wlthin a time or depth window. lts uses are
similar to those of the Average peak value
attribute.
Similar t0 the Average peak value attribute,
Average trough
only the
I value between zero but instead of taking all peak values,
j crosslngs
largest negative peak between each pair of

zero crossings is taken.
This attribute may give a better measure of
reflectivity when trackrng a single evenl
Cipher attribute
Horizon local attributes measuring the

characteristic of one of the three peaks or
three troughs above and below the reference
horizon. The measured characteristics include
time of the peaks/troughs below or above the
reference horizon, amplitude of the peaks/
troughs, the isochron between the peaks/
troughs and the reference horlzon, and the
number of peaks or troughs below or above
the reference horizon withln the specified
window. There are forty attribute variants.

For further details, see the Petrel Help.
Appeno r
Slrid.e AtL rnLte)
'
395
-!r
_5
Extract value
Extracts the input seismrc value relative to
single horizon or an existing interpretation.

This allows you to produce Surface attrbute
-L
maps in two ways
1.
2.
from seismic volumes created as

Volume attributes with methods not
avarlable directly as Surface
attr b utes
-L
from volumes created with Seismic
calculator options.
Geometric mean
Gives ihe geometric mean of a data set as
given by the n-root of the multiplication of

the data points, where n is the number of
data points.
Half energy
Computes the time or depth requrred for the

energy within a window to reach one half of
the total energy wrthin the enttre wlndow.

Half energy may indicate asymmetrtc changes
in lithology or porosrty within a specified
z0
Harmonic mean
ne.
H of the positive real numbers
al, a2,
.., and
rs defined as
ff
where n is the number of data points used

the mean. The harmonic mean is typically
used with the averaging of rates (rates of
in
change).
lnterval average
Provides users with the same interval

averagrng options available prior to Petrel
2001 .1. The Average methods
lsochron thickness
Suface Attrlbutes
available are
Defined as the time difference between two

horzons. Measured rn the unrts of the input
horizons (millrseconds in Time domain, feet or
meters in Depth domain).
396. Appendix
_L-
Loop asymmetry
Measures the asymmetry of the loop that

straddles the horizon. lt is undefined if there
that requires two zer0 crossings.

The upper and lower parts 0f the loop are
separated by either the peak or trough ot in
the case of a doublet, the saddle (indentation)
between the local peaks or troughs.
rs no loop
Loop kurtosis
Measures the peaked-ness of a statistical

distribution (here the loop is considered as a
distribution). Thrs representation treats time

as the variant of rnterest and amplitude as
probability. The trapezord approximation is
the series of lines that connect sample
points.
Lower loop area
Sum of the areas of the trapezoids defined by
the amplitudes in the lower Ioop. The tail

triangles are also in the sum when the zero
crossings are defined by interpolation. The
amplitude and time values are not scaled.
The resulting area has units of amplttude
multiplied by milliseconds. Negatrve loops
have negative areas. lt is undefined if there ls
no lower loop (requires 0ne zer0 crossing
below the upper loop) or if there is no upper
loop.
Lower loop
duration
Time separation between upper and lower

zero crossings for the loop below the loop
that straddles the horizon. The upper zero

crossing for lower loop duration is the same
point as the lower zero crosstng for upper
loop duration. Loop duration is undefined if
there is no Iower loop (requires 0ne zer0
crossrng below the upper loop) or if there ls
no upper Ioop.
Make offset
horizon
Creates a surface at each of the search

windows specifred in the Surface attributes
dialog. The offset horizons are created as
new objects in the Petrel lnput pane.
Appendlx B
Surface
Attrlbutes. 397
Maximum
amplitude
Measures reflectivrty within a time or depth

window. Returns the maxrmum positive
number in the defined window. This attribute
is used to detect positive direct hydrocarbon
indicators such as bright spots.
Maximum loop
duration
The maximum duration (longest half-cycle) of

all loops, both positive and negative, in the
extraction window. lt is undefined if there is
no loop (requires two zer0 crossrngs).
Maximum
magnitude
Mean amplitude
Measures reflectivity within a time or depth

window. Returns the maximum positlve
number in the defined window. This attribute
is used to detect positive direct hydrocarbon
indicators such as bright spots.
The arithmetic mean of the amplitude and a
measure of trace bias. lf the seismic trace
has general bias (perhaps from the data
processing), this can be removed from the
seismic volume using the Graphic equalizer
attribute and removing the zero hertz
c0mp0nent.
.l-
Positive or negatrve bias may indicate the

presence of bright spots.
Median
The Median of the analysis window can be
[.
found by arrangrng all the values from lowest

to highest value and picking the middle one
(that is, 50% of the values in the window are

below the median value). The Median is less
sensitive t0 extreme values (outlrers) than the
computation of the Mean.
Minimum
amplitude
-La
Measures the reflectivity within a time or

depth window. This is the maximum negative
number in the defined window.
It is used to detect negative direct
.L,
hydrocarbon indicators such as bright spots.
398.
Appeno
'
Surlr e
Ali ibrle'
Petre Geopvsics
L.
Minimum looP
duration
The mintmum duration (shortest half-cycle) of

all loops, both positive and negative in the
extraction window. lt ls undefined if there is
no loop (requires two zero crossings).
Most of
Captures the most commonly occurring data

value within the analysrs window. A
histogram is computed from the input
window, and the value from the bin with the
highest count is output for each trace
location.
Number of negative
zero crossings
Besults in a value representing a counter for

the number of zero crossings encountered
within the analysis window that match the
criteria of the sample values going from
negative values to Positive.
Changes In the number of zero crossings can
be related to the comPlexitY of the
stratigraphy. A high number of zero crossings
generally indicates a greater degree of

vertical lithologic comPlexity.
Number of positive
zero crossings
Results in a value representing a counter for

criteria of the sample values going from
positive values to negatlve.
Changes in the number of zero crossings can
be related to the comPlexitY of the
stratrgraphy. A high number of zero crossings
generally indicates a greater degree of

vertical lithologic comPlexitY.
I Number of zero
cr0sslngs
Results in a value representing a counter for

criteria of the sample values going both from

positive values t0 negative ranges and from
negative to Positrve
range-
Appendix B
Surlace Attrlbuies' 39{l
Sum of negative
amplitudes
Arithmetic mean of the negative amplitudes,

multiplied by the number of samples rn the
window. Thrs operation provides a measure
of brightness multiplied by the formation
thickness (time or depth) and may be
regarded as a measure of brightness volume.
A large value may indicate a high net sand
ratro.
Sum of positive
amplitudes
Arithmetic mean of the positive amplitudes,

multiplied by the number of samples in the
window. This operation provides a measure
of brightness multiplied by the formatton
thickness (trme or depth) and may be
regarded as a measure of brightness volume.
A large value may indicate a high net sand

ratio.
Threshold value
Computes the percentage of samples inside

vertical window, that are greater than, less
than, or equal to a user-deflned amplitude

threshold value. Amplitudes in the selsmic
data can be analyzed using user-defined
threshold values. This might infer porosity or
fluid changes when amplitude driven.
Time at maximum
Results in a z-value (time or depth) as the
amplitude
output attribute, where the z-value

corresponds to the vertrcal position of the
maximum amplitude withrn the analysis
window.
Time at minimum
Hesults rn a z-value (time or depth) as the

output attribute, where the z-value
corresponds to the vertical positron of the
amplitude
minimum amplitude within the analysis
window
Appendix B
Suface Attrrbutes
401
t
Upper !oop area
Sum of the areas 0f Ihe trapezoids defined by
the amplitudes in the upper 100p. The tail

triangles are als0 in the sum when the zero
crossings are defined by interpolati0n. The
ampltude and trme values are n0t scaled.

The resulting area has units 0f amplitude
multiplied by milliseconds. Negative loops

have negative areas. lt is undefined if there is
n0 upper loop that requires two zero

crossings within the extracti0n window: 0ne
zer0 crossrng at or below the local horizon
rnterpretation and one zero crossing above
the local horizon.
Upper loop
Trme separation between upper and lower
duration
zero crosstngs for the loop that straddles the
l
E.
horizon. lt is undefined if there is no upper

loop which requires two zero crossings within
Upper Ioop
skewness
the extractron window: one zero crossing at

or below the local horizon interpretation and
0ne zero crossing above the local horizon.
L.
Measures the symmetry of a statistical

distrrbution (here the loop is considered as a
distribution). Skewness is zero for

symmetrical Ioops; it is positive for loops that
are top loaded and negative for those that
are bottom loaded.
Window length
t!
The output from this operation indicates bed

travel time thickness above tuning when
using peak above and trough below (or the
reverse). Tapering does not affect this
operatron, because the tapers are centered at

the start and end points of the window.
Window Length is computed in milliseconds

in the time domain, and in feet or meters in
the depth domain.
-L-
402. Appendix
Suface Attributes
Petrel Geophysics

Manual Petrel

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Manual Petrel

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

(1)

About this Manual

Creating a Jumper Composite Section....127

Linking Windows to Coordinate Groups..134

Synchron ized Camera Position for 3D Wind0ws............

Data Selection in the Survey Manager ..........................i47

lmport and Export of Color Templates.......... . .............151

Displaying Volume Wa11s.........................'l

Manipulating Seismic Llnes ln an lnterpretation

Exploring the Settings of the Interpretati0n Window .. 173

Setting a Display Scale for the lnterpretatlon Window 175

Creating a Jump Tie

Displaying Multiple Selsmic Vlews on the Same

Linking lnterpretatton or 3D Wlndows to Coordinate

Using a Seismlc Ghost

0pening the lnterpretation

Bestricting lnterpretation Displays

Editing and Manipulating Faults using the Function

Editing and Manlpulating Faults using the

Using the lnterpretation Manager for Handling Faults..229

Horizon lnterpretation ...................................233

Performing Seeded 3D Autotracking.......246

Paintbrush Autotracking in 3D Windows .."....................26S

Horizon Editing and Manipu1ati0n...................269

Displaying and Annotating a Horizon

Flattening 3D Vol umes.. ...........................28j

Smoothi ng a Horizon.. ". "........................... 290

and Surface Attributes Generation

Horizon 0perations: Bulk Shifting a Horizon

Horizon 0perations: Smoothing a Horizon

Displaying and Annotating Horizons: IVodifying the

Flattening a Horizon and Generating Flattened 3D

Creatrng 2D Grd Surfaces wrth the Make/Edit

Seismic Restoration 2D.................................323

Interpretation Ouarity check in the Bestored

Bestoration Model Settings......

... ......... 353

Using Well Data to Create a Velocity

Performing a Domain Conversion on

lnterpretation 0uality Check in the Restored Section....330

- Bestoring a Seismic Section

Correction and 0utput from Velocity Modeling ........ ....354

- Creating 0utput to Oualrty Check the........"355

Using Uncertainty to Create a Velocity

Performing a Domain Conversron by

Performing a Domain Conversion of

Performing a Domarn Conversion on

Depth Converslon for 3D

Performing a Depth Conversion on a

Creating an Uncorrected Velocity Model using Well

Performing a Domain C0nversi0n................384

Using the Domain Convert by Active Velocity Model

- Shortcut Keys for Seismic

About this Manual

functionalities in petrel and

use these for

rr,r pr*rrtritoors and argorithms

be used to calculate size/areaof your'leads

will be provided with a ready-to-use petrer

2Dl3D seismic and well data.

exercises provide hands on training

successfully complete this course,

basic Windows and practical